Home

R&S Pulse Sequencer Pulse Signal Generation Software User Manual

1. 276 DSRC CLEA p P o DSRC COMMent DSRC CREAG e DSRGATEMIADD e DSRC ITEM BITS tsia T DSRC ITEM DATA DSRGITEM Bkkele eee ter ope M D n tni eed ct e Y v t en el D captu DSRGUTEM PATEGFI iiir rci e eot eser Aia DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT DSRGITEM PRBS INITMALELUG teneret trece vere rtt A e A ep cus 300 DSRETTEMPRBS TYP E Ic iio depot 300 PSIG ads siste m 280 DSRG ITEM TYBE ect eto nervt er vete tn o aV tap geb des 301 DSRG NAME Em 277 pedis 278 pip euclzik ro M 277 sinapis ED Pi oia acc 276 EMIMterCOMMentscco custodios EMITter CREAtE ivi coo A i A A EE EMITter EIRP ES EMITter FREQUENCY m EMITter MODE ADD eter ttr ee de n t i et anaes er ecce bv dud tp ond ee deus EMITter MODE ANTenna eVa EMITErMODE AN Tenia CLEAT case iso Oir nun Idiota E EE neral EMITIter MODBE BEAM AJ D cote na nec bee cte Ro ce Ee aan ei EMITeCMODE BEAM GL EGAL itii to itte ideas EMITter MODE BEAM COUNt EMITter MODE BEAM DELete coxis Aa EMITtec MODE BEAM OFFSOeLUAZIMu lb 2 oa paisa ti 305 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet ELEVat
2. Model pyramidal Hom v 29 l ZRotation 00 Rotation 0 Frequency 106 Bandwidth iae A Simulate Backlobe se Parameters Length 0 076 m Remote command ANTenna MODel HORN LX on page 288 ANTenna MODel HORN LZ on page 288 Cosecant Squared Antenna Settings Cosecant squared antennas are designed for air surveillance radar sets AW 30 Antenna View My_TestScenarios gt My Cosecant My_Cosecant Comment Theta 1 5 Theta 2 80 Model Cosecant Squared iv 20 20 ZRetation 09 Rotation os Simulate Backlobe sn Parameters HBW 5 Theta ie Remote command ANTenna MODel COSecant HPBW on page 288 ANTenna MODel COSecant T1 on page 286 ANTenna MODel COSecant T2 on page 286 Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings A planar phased array antenna consists of several antenna elements The number of elements and the spacing between them is user definable Elements X Elements Z Pedestal The exact antenna pattern is defined by the selected Aper ture Distribution Antenna Pattern Settings Ex Y 30 Antenna View My TestScenarios gt My PlanarAnte c5 i 8x Comment planar phased antenna with Cos N aperture distribution Planar Phased Array iv 29 22 x Rotation 0 Bandwidth 1 GH
3. 1 Comment 2 MOP Type select a modulation scheme 3 Modulation parameters depending on the selected MOP Type 4 Data source Coding and Filter settings if required by the selected MOP Type Use the parameter MOP Type to select a modulation scheme and define the respective modulation parameters You can also add a description in the Com ment field Remote commands PULSe MOP COMMent on page 278 PULSe MOP TYPE on page 347 Further available settings depend on the selected modulation e AM and ASK Modulation e FMandFSK Modulation e Chirp Modulation Phase Modulation e QPSK Modulation e Noise Plugins The Modulation Graph displays the characteristics of the currently used MOP Some MOP types require a data source For description of the related settings see chapter 7 2 6 8 Data Source Coding Filter on page 95 7 2 6 1 Pulse Settings AM and ASK Modulation The amplitude modulation AM and amplitude shift key modulation ASK are modula tion schemes that vary the amplitude of the signal Comment MOP Type Type Frequency Mod Depth AM Type Modulation method like a double sideband Standard a Low Side Band LSB a Upper Side Band USB or a double sideband with suppressed carrier LSB USB amplitude modulation Frequency Modulation frequency Modulation Depth Depth of the modulation signal in percent i e th
4. HE M IPMI STEP STEBS enis he rne e Ro decr etre reete c e eere e A REED ERR FERE RD IPM IY O A IPM WAVeform BASE IPM WAVeform COUNt IPM WAV eto M ODFESOL T AAA a A dada a a 320 IPM WAVeto mm PEROU s iei ee eut Ecrire cetero ce ava eaa eo Eb v coget E Re cou SR RE EEUE QS cL ER ERE ER RET 321 IPMEWAV Som P EIAS B acere dietus estt reine ise NAE mesi arre MUS E ENS E ATERT PM RANE 321 IPMEWAV Eto ots PKPK OR EI EARA 321 IPM WAVefOIMmM T PE nier EE 320 PLOT POLar CUT a PEQT POLat EOQG M IN iiio Ht tpe tte desire d db ctp da cete d antec vet e dd 290 PEO TPO Lari MP Biss CEN 290 PEG i PANO A OO 276 PLUG In COMMON m 278 PLUGIMiGREatO iiri coercere aec tai 277 PEG in OP e A 328 PEUGIN MODule COMMENT cua m 328 PEW Git WO gr 328 PLUGM MODule NAME iietes cece ncn ten ala A acetates 278 PLUGIN REMOVE iret rte rer ebrei seen via Eat 278 PLUGIN ES o S 277 PULSE CATAl O Pic H 276 PULSS COMMON cta tonta cari orar 278 PULSe CREate PULSe CUSTom PULESe ENVelope DATA ELE cenar ironia ore 282 PULSe ENVelope DATATEMADO cusco A AA 279 PULSe ENVelope DATA TTEM COUNE iecit Ri nds 280 PULESe ENVelope DATA IMEM DELETE scort rt a Nte ac PULSe ENVelope DATAITEM
5. eesseseeeeseeeennee ee ennen nennt nentes rh nnnt ete tns nen ninad n nnn 377 SEQuencelTEM EOOP COUNEMINIEGL oic ccs didas 377 SEQuerncedTEM EOOPICOUNCESTEP irit teri daa ag Un E RO 377 SEQ ence FEM LOOP TYPE cett oput ene rinie net eun REY HE EPOR EH COE ERNST ESANEAN EEKEREN 377 SEQuericeJTEM LOOE VARIabIe crc penitentie a eter er ede E peg e cette 378 SEQuence ITEM MARKer ALL SEQuence ITEM MARKer FIRSt SEQuence ITEM MARKer LAST rre terere euge aeter veu e debe ee eee YER I AA TEGERE e eg 324 SEQUENCE ITEM OVL VARIaDIG iuris eee Once YE EFE EN EE RE EE ARE ER OY FERRE 378 SEQuence ITEM OVL WTIMe ssessssseeeeeneneee n Ee ere nennen nnn erre ennt nnne nns 378 SEQuence dTEM PBELBy cete bre Pone vp yx eee REPRE NE RED C ERE RR Exe v ue WEE ERES AAA 378 SEQuesricedTEM PHASS OFFSeL ciere prc ere rtr or ae 378 SEQuence ITEM PRI SEQuence TEM PULSG ueteres trente pe enr Yer ve npa e e eats neve Pav npe eer AERE 379 SEQuerice dTEM REP COUNEDURSIIOF retos riore tiere creer ene EN ber ee rer a ri Pe orc nego 379 SEQuence liT EM REP COUNCEFIXe6d cerent nenne pato eren s ia ee ne eR KIA EE E NEEESE 380 SEQuence dTEM REP COUNEMAXIEDUET cote eet orare eren ehe er NEP X Ee neo ea 380 SEQuerice WTEM IREP COUNEMINIIUITI assis ico ral neat chere a tr rre e one er eb E vier 380 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNtROUNding sss eene ener netten nre ennt i EEEE nnns 380 SEQue riceJATEM IRE
6. BPSK A Binary Phase Shift Keying BPSK modulation applies a phase shift with a selected offset Phase at each constellation point Comment MOP Type Type Symbol Rate Auto fit bits into Pulse Width 10 kHz Phase Transition Linear 5 Type Selects the BPSK modulation method like a standard BPSK modula tion or a BPSK modulation with a constant envelope C BPSK i Symbol Rate Symbol rate of the modulating signal user defined or automatically estimated Phase Phase shift between the constellation point Pulse Settings Transition Transition Function These parameters are particulary important when a BPSK modula tion with a constant envelope is used A Transition 096 is a border case where the change between two constellation points is performed immediately i e the transition skips switches back and forth on a direct line between the constallation points The greather the value the slower the transition With a Transition gt 0 the two constallation points are still exactly opposite but the transition follows a circular arc The Transition Function defines how the values are distributed on the transition curve e Linear all values are uniformly distributed in the transition e Cosine there are fewer values in the middle of the transition and accumulated values near to the two end constellation points Data Source Coding Filter See chapter 15 1 Dat
7. See also To create an antenna pattern on page 171 Remote command ANTenna MODel ARRay DISTribution on page 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay XDIStance on page 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay ZDIStance on page 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay PEDestal on page 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay COSN on page 284 ANTenna MODel ARRay NX on page 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay NZ on page 285 Custom Antenna Settings You can define an antenna pattern based on the required antenna characteristics See figure 10 7 HPBW XY HPBW YZ HPBW specifies the angular width within which the antenna is most sensitive Side lobe level Attenuation applied on the first pair of side lobes compared to the power level of main lobe Roll off factor Step size used to calculate the attenuation of the subsequent side lobes Side lobe scale Scale factor used to calculate the HPBW of the side lobes i e how much smaller or wider the side lobes are compared to the main lobe Remote command ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW XY on page 286 ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW YZ on page 286 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSTart on page 287 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLRolloff on page 287 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSCale on page 287 Imported Antenna Settings You can define and load you custom antenna patterns Use the Load Delete standard functions for file management You can load your cus tom antenna pattern file Antenna Pattern Settings The following file formats are su
8. SCAN CIRCular PRATe lt Prate gt SCAN RASTer PRATe lt Prate gt SCAN SECTor PRATe lt Prate gt Sets the scan rate Parameters lt Prate gt float Range 0 1 to 1000 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 see example Defining antenna scans on page 291 SCAN CIRCular PSQuint lt Psquint gt SCAN RASTer PSQuint lt Psquint gt SCAN SECTor PSQuint lt Psquint gt Sets the squint angle Parameters lt Psquint gt float Range 0 05 to 15 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 see example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Data Source Commands 22 7 Data Source Commands Example Creating data source SCPI DSRC CREate DataSource DSRC SELect DataSource DSRC ITEM ADD DSRC ITEM SELect 1 DSRC ITEM TYPE PATTern DSRC ITEM PATTern ONE DSRC ITEM BITS 2 DSRC ITEM ADD DSRC ITEM SELect 2 DSRC ITEM TYPE PRBS DSRC ITEM PRBS TYPE P15 DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT 1 DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT VALue 10 DSRC ITEM BITS 12 DSRC ITEM BIT Gerih anane a Dra etae et e reb a ba RE RR DL 299 DSRE ITEM DATA 299 DSBREJXTENEEAT TO tl E PANE ER RAP 300 DSRCHATENPRBSANIT eitis aed aceite t n t a c aee n Cn e aea b e 300 DSRGITEM PRBSUINITSMALIiI 33 3 961r Caro aa SEE TY ivi 300 DSRC ITEM PRBS TYPE naranai otn tao Retek ai 300 DSRETTEMTTPE 00 A a aaa aS 301 DSRC ITEM BITS lt Bits gt Sets the length of the selecte
9. SEQuence ITEM PRI Pri Sets the Pulse Repetition Interval PRI Parameters Pri float Range O to 1e 09 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See PRI on page 111 SEQuence ITEM PULSe Pulse Assigns a pulse or a waveform to the selected item Use the commands PULSe CATalog and WAVeform CATalog to querry the avail able pulses and wavefroms Parameters Pulse string Pulse name Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Pulse Waveform on page 110 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt DURation Duration Sets a time duration Parameters Duration float Range O to 1e 09 Default unit sec Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Repetition Number on page 112 Sequence Commands SEQuence ITEM REP COUNtFIXed Fixed Sets the repetition number as a numeric value Parameters Fixed float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Rep Cont on page 110 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt MINimum Minimum SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt MAXimum Maximum Se
10. 53 Scenario Settings eerie heretice iniecta tese cu SESA TESSAA AEAEE 54 Common Scenario SettidgS oooonnonccccnnnacccccnnnnoncccnonnnnnnccnn nan nn cnn nano enne enne 55 Scenario Specific Settings eccentric id 60 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario eene 63 Creating a Pulse Library uui piece cepe Eo Reo Eo eap epo nianna 66 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation seeueesessss 66 Pulse Settings iret pia 68 Pulse Name and Comment eus nnhse nnn pne creanme nena arenas 69 Pulse Timilig Settilijs aciei ener ias 70 Pulse Level Settings an 73 Pulse Envelope Settings iio arias 76 Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings 79 Built In Modulation Types and their Settings sm 82 AM and ASK Modulation rre o HE itte eerte techn aient a entera Rd 83 FM and FSK Modulation eo ere e E pr e RH CX use ERR x RS 85 Chirp Modulation IEEE 87 Phase Modulation iioc ene eere eet nao 89 eris E 92 Melle EE 93 xijg r aa 93 Data Source Coding Filter nennen 95 Envelope and Modulation Graphs sssssssssssesseeeee nennen 96 How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings eese 98 Building Pulse Sequences ccecimmiiioson dicci n 106 About the Sequencing Principles eeecccsesseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeseeseesneneneneeeneens 106 Sequ
11. 2222222212 ceto egeo ai 336 PULESeJENVelope DATASOFEPSBI cscs 12 22 ci Erden SER a ane xir er ER AA d ERE EAA aai 336 PULSe ENVelope DATA SAVE oooococcccononcnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn Siaka nn reati ti tit nh sten nn rennen nnns 336 PULSe ENVelope EUOlJation reta ce cone rh uoc a DLE DIO ID ARR 336 PUESCENVEIODEMODBE iii ds 337 PULSE EVID ROOD 40 di A IA il 337 PULSE LEVE ORE M 337 PUL Seth BVelON ui A AIR 337 PULESEMOP AMEREQUORGY aid ir 337 PULSE MORAM MDEP EM crnini aannaaien anaa rada ERU a e aep Ud 337 PULSS 8 Do Ub od 338 Pulse Commands PULSE MOP AMS Te DURO cita ad 338 PULSE MOP EMS Te CURAN nica iRRa Rac 338 PULSEMOP AMS Fop LE Vel nacina a ica 338 PULSe MOP FMSTepiF REQUOIGU maze cad A AA 338 PUELSSMOP ASKIN Vero TT 339 PULSSMOP ASIENDE Plate 339 PULSE MOP ASK SRA TO cui A iaa 339 PULSE MOP BARK CODE cocaina a ieee a a epa ei GESi 339 PULSeMOP BARKer TTIMe conri ena kay etse AREA He uEERREE 340 PULSE MOP BPSK PHASE EE 340 PULSEMOP BPSK SRAT G nonita eaii A A AAA td 340 PUESSMOP BPSK SRATS AUTO iiia dc e 340 PULSCMOP BPORCT TIME anita A A A A 341 FUSE MOR BPSK TTPO cu tia 341 PULESG MOP BPSICTYBE cuerpo Leap tot three terae etu bis 341 PULSeMOP CHIRp DEVI8liOn 5er aa E ETE 341 PULSEMOP CHIRP TYPE ae asics capes cto de gece awed pa 341 PULSE MOP DATA CODING 200 duc A eee eae oad sate acute ae ea 342 PULSSMOP DATA DSRC occ i 342 PULSE MOPIENAD Soi 342 PULSE MOP EXCLude
12. SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE BEAM cc ccecceeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeceaeeceeeceeecaeeeeaeessaesceeeeneeesseeeseeeseeeeaeees 365 SCENario GEMit SEb6Cli coord ertet er etre tpe actae ve det epar a AE SGENato COMMAOnf 22 iret a a coru ELSE It Eee ERE pad SCENI CREAG eene e E canes ste anes eee caesar aes ca nsec eset sees eeseegese naan eee SCENanio CSE QUINCE where HERR SCENario CSEQuence ADD E iei reimdes pi cs 363 SGENatio CSEQuence CLEat terret A edu i a nea dp gd Cd tt 282 SGENario GSEQuence CURRent iiie pere te reto eL Ea decur a ie cc Re ree ERE S 363 SGENario GSEQuence DELeltoe ntt rt eerte reuse o risada 281 SCENartio ESEQUuence SEL8Cl deret pectet epp tee A aiia be Ue sve tpe ee 280 SGENario CSEQuence VARIabIe ie proie oi ee ic cat ecu beet ees e Ed ag jas Ve Do rd d GERE RE EET 368 SCENario EMITter oe SCENario EMIMen Cl Balt cis rco a A A SS WE 282 SCENano EMITiter DIRection PRl iii tees alent bine ees iin Eee N EN E aee teri cer EE Re err ecu tees 364 SCENario EMITter DIRection THE T asia cnn nnn cnn cnn nana cra nennt RKT sinn crac 364 SCENario EMITte MODE eire ree eren AA eo OE y e ee PVP EE VERE SEEN S 365 SGENGrio EMITIte MODE BEAM crt iria rre cer Dr oe rer rere rM ra eorr dra 365 gt GENamo GENOralO ERE 362 SGCENartio GEN6 ratorPA LL etre retos eia ie ed xd E e d veda dug 362 SGENario L
13. 1 Orange color indicates the pulse area on that the MOP is applied 2 Lilac color indicates the pulse 3 Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse gt Exclude Time 4a 4b Excluded are 50 us from the beginning of the rising edge and at the end of the falling edge note that the pulse are the MOP is applied on is wider than the pulse width No restrictions The MOP is applied form the beginning of the rising edge until the end of the falling edge Pulse Width Automatic The MOP is applied during the time specified as pulse width time Pulse gt Timing gt Width Exclude time Defines a time span to be excluded at the beginning of the rising edge and at the end of the falling edge Level Threshold The MOP is applied during the time the signal level is greater than the specified level limits Remote command ULSe MOP EXCLude ENABle on page 342 ULSe MOP EXCLude MODE on page 343 ULSe MOP EXCLude TIME STARt on page 343 ULSe MOP EXCLude TIME STOP on page 343 ULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STARt on page 342 ULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STOP on page 342 Y Fd Fg hg hg tu Pulse Settings 7 2 6 Built In Modulation Types and their Settings To access these settings P Select Pulse gt MOP gt Settings A Pulse My TestScenarios gt My TestPulse My_TestPulse Timing Level MOP Marker General Risng Edge 100 Faling dge 100 w
14. 9 2 In the block diagram select Emitters gt Data Source Menu and select an emitter from the list of available emitters or create a new one See also To create and configure a new emitter on page 186 3 Configure the emitter settings like for example select the current Emitter Mode and Emitter Beam For description of the provided settings see chapter 11 3 Lists with Multiple Emit ters on page 185 To visualize the signal received by a static receiver 1 Open a scenario with single emitter e g SimpleEmitterScenario See also To configure an emitter in a scenario with static receiver on page 188 2 In the block diagram select Current Emitter gt 3D The dialog displays the signal as seen by a static receiver Per default the receiver is located in a way that the emitter scan is oriented with O deg Elevation and Azimuth at it 3 To move the receiver on the x axis and on the z axis enable Scenario Eleva tion and Scenario Azimuth The position on the y axis the distance to the emit ter is fixed How to Create and Configure Emitters i Durst or ore scan season pared The valo a e stow motn the vahan n large Phan the sean sere Normalred Romer Level at Recerver Tene in Rekalove to Start Fae 1 LEE 1 H 9 E 5 ESL BB TN EE fi Fig 11 3 Signal at the receiver XZ view understanding the displayed information 1 Receiver s position
15. Assignto Y Pulse Width 7 Variable Name y ax b E O Individual Values Each pulse from a set of repetitions uses a new IPM value Identical Values All pulses from a set of repetitions use the same value Restart IPM for this line item T Reset random generator Fig 9 11 Configure Inter Pulse Modulation Understanding the displayed information 1 Standard add delete functions to create new IPM of the selected type or remove the selected IPM from the repository 2 Graphical representation of the configured variations and the parameters they are applied on 2a Two variations are assigned the same element Assign to gt Timing gt PRI these variations are added 2b Second variation is assigned to a different element Assign to gt Frequency gt Offset 3 Variation profile 4 Defines the pulse parameter or the variable the IPM is applied to 5 Enables a transformation 6 Sets the way repeating pulses are processed 7 Configures the random generator Add PRI Jitter Add Frequency Hoping Add Customr Delete sssssss 143 IPM GA ses casas ccna EE 143 Source PY OM IS 143 PAB SIMD O ara A AA A 143 TratisfermaliOl erre R RON 143 A A ee a ee EE 143 PRES CoCr NO 144 IPM Profiles Settings Add PRI Jitter Add Frequency Hoping Add Custom Delete Standard functions to create new IPM of the selected type to disable the selected IPM or to remove an automatic
16. Sets the bearing Parameters Bearing float Range O to 360 Default unit grad Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Pointing Direction on page 208 SCENario EMITter DIRection THETa Theta SCENario CEMit DIRection ELEVation Elevation SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection ELEVation Elevation SCENario LOCalized DIRection ELEVation Elevation Sets the elevation Parameters Elevation float Range 90 to 90 Default unit grad Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Pointing Direction on page 208 SCENario EMITter lt Emitter gt SCENario CEMit EMITter lt Emitter gt SCENario LOCalized EMITter lt Emitter gt Assigns an existing emitter or an existing waveform see WAVeform CATalog on page 276 and EMITter CATalog on page 276 Parameters lt Emitter gt string Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 Scenario Commands SCENario EMITter MODE Mode SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE Mode SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE Mode Set the emitter mode Parameters Mode float Range 1 to 16 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manu
17. Sets the scan type Parameters lt Type gt CIRCular SECTor RASTer CONical HELical SPIRal LSW Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Scan Type on page 165 SCAN CIRCular NODDing lt Nodding gt SCAN SECTor NODDing lt Nodding gt Enables superimposing a horizontal nodding on the scan Parameters lt Nodding gt ON OFF 1 0 Example SCAN SECTor NODDing 1 SCAN SECTor NRATe 500 SCAN SECTor NELevation 15 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 SCAN CIRCular NELevation lt Nelevation gt SCAN SECTor NELevation lt Nelevation gt Sets the elevation angle Parameters lt Nelevation gt float Range 0 01 to 90 Example see SCAN SECTor NODDing on page 297 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 Antenna Scan Commands SCAN CIRCular NRATe lt Nrate gt SCAN SECTor NRATe lt Nrate gt Sets the elevation rate Parameters lt Nrate gt float Range 0 01 to 2000 Example see SCAN SECTor NODDing on page 297 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 SCAN CIRCular PALMer Palmer SCAN RASTer PALMer Palmer SCAN SECTor PALMer Palmer Enables superimposing a conical scan on the current scan Parameters Palmer ON OFF 1 0 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 see example Defining antenna scans on page 291
18. Single Sequence Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format a o 9 m Fig 6 1 Scenario dialog Understanding the displayed information 1 Status information report generation and kind of the generated waveform file 2 Major RF parameters 3 Functions for basic instrument control 4a Start builds the ARB waveform and transfers it to the instrument 4b Waveform generation status displayed during waveform calculation 5 6 7 8 Block diagram of the processing chain 5 Represents the signal source the ARB waveform file is built up from i e single or multiple pulse sequences a waveform sequence or single or multiple emitters 6 Accesses settings that influence the Waveform Generation 7a 7b Volatile Repository represent the temporary memory and the network storage the gener ated ARB waveform is stored in 8 Displays the currently selected generator s profile Upload to VSG Vector Signal Genera tor or indicates that a local ARB waveform is generated Load ARB File Green LED Indicates suitable source and instrument profile or stored local waveform Yellow LED Indicates insufficient instruments capabilities Red LED Indicates that there is no source or instrument s profile or no waveform assigned The provided settings depend on the selected scenario type 6 2 1 Scenario Settings Common Scenario Settings The following settings are common to all scena
19. 132 ME cn tii latas M 134 Item Blank 2 ine He d ee te tn 110 CW ay 110 DUMMY Aaa sein ic 110 Filet ie ar oy A 110 Inter pulse modulation IPM sssse 111 p la 110 Repeat p 110 SequenciFi cias 110 J Jitter L LODE SWITCHING SCAN sic coton bte trit ode eres 170 Lobes Lob Switching SCAM nro ee treat 170 Lock symbol Mead ascos ida 44 Locked repository Unlock iier raid 389 Long waveform Reducing Sizer uei tn Dese dom xo EORR 248 M Maim lobe eL 154 Marker Pulsando 236 in easy 236 Marker traces Enable nett tte mes 242 MOP Enable irt ita edens 80 FROSUACE ANC e m 80 MOP TYPE itc rentrer hr herein enint 82 N Nodding Circular Scan 2 1 2 2 n ic as 165 SOCIO SCAM 1 rerit etc ns 166 0 ORF iMac EA nE E ERASERS EEE INE 66 ONCHTIG E E E A x pete E 66 71 Options Identification remote sess 271 Overlay MM 110 Overshoot Definition sts Rai E P Palmer scan CInCUIARS CAM aiii et isi ci oes 165 Raster SCAN e t 167 SECON SCAN aanas P 166 Parameters Base PoWerFuesiraaaalda dia 73 Description ss DO ratas based Fall ME cuida ias IEEE 181 Standard is ON IERI OVEFSNOO EM Pulse Width En erm TES SA a pe inve Ree a IR Top Power PDW Repollo 260 Phase Miss oa 97 Plugin Vanable usaras 94 Power Base csi ais 73 TO
20. A new IPM profile is created automatically named and assigned to the Frequency Offset parameter 3 Configure the parameters for example as shown on the following figure User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 149 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters dill Inter Pulse Modulation My TestScen os Jer jpg j PSR_FHops Comment F1 12250 kHz F2 11140 kHz F3 9050 kHz with pseudo random pattern Unit of Affected Parameter M Profile oras gt Avoid Reuse 4 Use the 2D view to display the configured pattern see also figure 9 7 5 Observe the Sequence dialog The sequence configuration settings confirm the configuration HET emp mo poemeee D eo Wo s wee Amino meo E 6 Use the Waveform Viewer to visualize the generated waveform See also e To visualize the impact of the IPM profiles on page 148 R amp S Pulse Sequencer Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modulation Effects e chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 Waveform View SimplePulseTrain Aj ld del Wy Wt LI F2 gt Fret Fi Fig 9 14 Waveform Viewer Example of a pulse train PW 100 us Frequency hopping 1 View Mode gt Frequency 30 standard pulses 3 consecutive pulses per hopping frequency F1 12250 kHz not on the display F2 11140 kHz F3 9050 kHz The signal will hop the three frequencies according to a pseudo r
21. Fig 9 8 IPM with shape Profile Random Steps la 1b User defined value range 2a 2b User defined step size 3 7 Periodicity gt Count 7 5 i e selected are 5 random values 3a 3d Subsequent patterns Periodicity gt Count Sets the pattern length i e the number of values that are selected on a pseudo random manner Remote command IPM RSTep MINimum on page 319 IPM RSTep MAXimum on page 319 IPM RSTep STEP MINimum on page 319 IPM RSTep STEP MAXimum on page 319 IPM RSTep PERiod on page 319 Random IPM Profiles Settings Random jitter is unlimited in its value range and are usually caused by thermal noise and similar effects The IPM shape is a sequence of random values according to the select Distribution function Unit of Affected Parameter Profile Distribution Mean Std Dev Limit Time s Ds Random M 2D Normal Distribution M Histogram Bins e Relative Frequency Density 0 28982 Fig 9 9 IPM with shape Profile Random and Distribution Normal Distribution Uniform Distribution With this distribution values occur with the same probability in the range between the minimum and maximum level The granularity is the Step value Normal Distribution The Gauss probability density function or normal distribution is char acterized by the static parameters Mean u Standard Deviation c and Limit The figure 9 1
22. Imported waveforms can also be evaluated to retrieve information on the reference sig nal level 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings The waveform viewer reads the entire waveform data evaluates it and visualizes the signal in three sections The time domain view the spectrum waterfall and the I Q con stellation plot To access these settings gt Inthe Scenario dialog select Volatile gt View Data View My_TestScenarios SimplePulseTrain as Fox 4 a 4 Whe HER e Ss Qs o H alba 7 n Cursor Sample 43946 Q ov 21 808 ms Q Log Mag 240 0d8 O Frequency One Phase Xd a Fig 18 1 Waveform Data View Understanding the displayed information 1a Time domain view View mode I Q Envelope screen points represent multiple signal sam ples 1b Enabled marker traces M1 all M2 first M3 last see Marker traces 2 Waterfall diagram see Display Mode 3 1 Q constellation plot 4 Navigation controls SSS gt NE MC NN NUUS User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 240 Waveform and Data View Settings 5 View mode e g I Q data frequency phase magnitude 6 7 Zoom in out and signal part as number of samples or a time duration see Duration Samples 7 Time line 8a Delta cursors play and stop see Play Stop 8b 8c Retrieved delta information 9 File information clock rate number of samples and duration 10 Display Mode selectio
23. Pulse Commands Parameters lt Bwidth gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source on page 326 Manual operation See Filter on page 95 PULSe MOP FILTer LENGth Length Sets the filter length Parameters Length integer Range 4 to 512 Example see example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source on page 326 Manual operation See Filter on page 95 PULSe MOP FILTer ROLLoff lt Rolloff gt Sets the roll off factor Parameters lt Rolloff gt float Range 0 05 to 1 Example see example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source on page 326 Manual operation See Filter on page 95 PULSe MOP FILTer TYPE Type Selects the filter type Parameters Type NONE RECTangular COS RCOS GAUSs LPASs Example see example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source on page 326 Manual operation See Filter on page 95 PULSe MOP FM DEViation Deviation Sets the modulation deviation Pulse Commands Parameters lt Deviation gt float Range 0 1 to 1e 09 Default unit Hz Manual operation See FM on page 85 PULSe MOP FM FREQuency Frequency Sets the modulation frequency Parameters Frequency float Range 0 002 to 1e 09 Manual operation See FM on page 85 e PULSe MOP FSK DEViation Deviation Sets the modulation deviation Parameters Deviation float Range 0 001 to 1e 09 D
24. gt Inthe 2D diagram open the context menu of the receiver and select Properties we rate P DP Type Array Antenna sun 0 noces Um ao Type Circular Scan Gain Pointing Elevation Bearing Altitude For description of the provided settings see chapter 13 1 2 Receiver Settings on page 204 To visualize the signal on a 3D scan 1 In the 2D diagram open the context menu of an emitter interferer e g E2 and select 3D View with Receiver 2 Select Normalized power Level at Receiver Both On to display the resulting signal Emitter Name My EmitterGuidance Mode Beam Surveillance 1 Emitter Antenna My PencilBeam Emitter Scan My RasterScan 46 6677 s Receiver Antenna My Planar ntenna Receiver Scan My Circular 4 s Scan Simulation Start Time Period sj ls m Visualization Scan Line i Pattern A Show Line of Sight C HPBW Disc Minimum displayed level Me Duration for one scan simulation period The visualization is in slow motion if this value is larger than the scan period Normalized Power Level at Receiver Time is Relative to Start Time v Both Emitter Only Receiver Only dB 0 20 P 60 80 100 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver 3 To display only the signal at the receiver enable Emitter Only The calculation assumes a receiver with
25. 10 4 How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans See e To create an antenna pattern on page 171 e To create an antenna scan on page 174 e To create a custom antenna pattern based upon the required antenna characteris tics on page 175 e To importa user defined antenna pattern from file on page 176 To create an antenna pattern 1 Select Repository Tree gt Antenna Pattern gt New 2 Enter a name and a comment 3 Select Antenna Model e g Planar Phased Array How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans My PlanarAntenna Comment planar phased antenna with parabolic aperture distribution Model Planar Phased Array Y 3D 20 O Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation 30 de Parameters Aperture Distr Parabolic Ww Elements X o ter le se se me EE 4 Adjust further settings like Rotation Frequency or Aperture Distribution 5 Select 2D to display the antenna pattern in a graph in polar or with Cartesian coordinates atlas Fig 10 4 2D antenna pattern understanding the displayed information 1a 1b Antenna pattern diagram as a function of angle deg and antenna gain dB Z Rotation 10 Beam axis HPBW i e the beam width at half power 3 dB Side lobe level Antenna gain minimum 90 dB oun WN 6 Change the number of used elements e g Elements X 20 and compare the 2D diagram How to Create a L
26. cette tentent ttes 402 nt PS PLUGIN EXPORTS initfPIUgil socii ooo ot aporta eoo etr aa eo ideae cd 403 veid PS PLUGIN EXPORTS Shutdown Plugi ecen iaa 403 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getVarlable 1 pneter aeiee epe ada eto La aeta i ainiaan 403 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS selVarable ii e e egere yet nent cra 404 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getType char szModType 1024 mandatory Queries the plugin type Return values szModType string modulation mop Plugin for MOP ipm Plugin for IPM report Plugin for reports created during the waveform generation void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getVersion char szModVer 1024 mandatory Queries the version string of the plugin Return values szModVer lt Major gt lt Minor gt lt Revision gt lt Major gt lt Minor gt and lt Revision gt are numerical values void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getComment char szModComment 4096 mandatory Plugin Programming API Queries the comment string of the plugin Return values szModComment string Allowed are a single line a multiple line or an empty string void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getAuthor char szModAuthor 1024 mandatory Queries the author string of the plugin Return values szModAuthor string Empty string is allowed void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getName char szModName 1024 mandatory Queries the plugin name Return values szModName string Must not be an empty string Name must be unique
27. PRls PRlg Delay f f AFreq We assume that a sequence with four items has been created as shown on the follow ing figure How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements My_S2_S1 Fi_S1 F2_1 Comment Sequence Type EB Se DEUS E TT NRI The sequence type can only be changed in empty sequences Sequence Description Gg le Le LL Nesting Typ Pulse Waveform Rep Cnt PM Marker A Freq A Level O ek ae ee ES Joe Je O O i O P J I2 10 de Je D EA AA _ Y 1048 ES 1 In the Sequence Description table a select the third item and select Insert Item Before Selection b Select Type Loop C select the more icon and enable a random loop repetition A Randomly Selected Prefix sloop Index 1 N prefix i CountN prefix n Start Time prefix t Absolute Time prefix ta The loop will be repeated 2 4 6 8 or 10 times d to include the last two items Line items 3 and 5 in the loop select the Indent icon R amp S Pulse Sequencer Building Pulse Sequences AA a M H A ee ee Sequence Description 3 l kej k 2 Nesting Typ
28. Parameters Burst float Range 1 to 1000 Example see example Using the step IPM profile on page 311 Manual operation See Steps on page 132 IPM STEP INCRement lt Increment gt Sets the step size Parameters lt Increment gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Using the step IPM profile on page 311 Manual operation See Steps on page 132 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands IPM STEP STARt lt Start gt Sets the start value Parameters lt Start gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Using the step IPM profile on page 311 Manual operation See Steps on page 132 IPM STEP STEPs lt Steps gt Sets the number of steps Parameters lt Steps gt float Range 1 to 10000 Example see example Using the step IPM profile on page 311 Manual operation See Steps on page 132 IPM RSTep MINimum Minimum IPM RSTep MAXimum Maximum Sets the value range Parameters Maximum float Range 0 to 1e 11 Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random Steps on page 137 IPM RSTep STEP MINimum Minimum IPM RSTep STEP MAXimum Maximum Sets the step size range Parameters Maximum float Range 0 1 to 0 5 Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random Steps on page 137 IPM RSTep PERiod Period Sets the pattern length Inter Pulse Modulation Comman
29. SCAN CIRCUL SCAN CIRGUlARPRATE orita e XR Ee Fe NE da SCAN CIRCular PSQuint ad SCAN CIRCULE RO TOM ses coetus oec tenera ri tra ie Rel ieUreid e kie gee m M PH SEAN CONIcCal pe SCAN CONICALRO TOM o Aaa iie gere DEIN M atodos ia css 294 hle Beni m N 277 SCAN HELical ELEVation S TER nier erste rri nir o ea rec n ee erre FER RN ARE PERENNE 293 CAINE FAME Gea FR RAC o OA o O 295 SCAN HELica ROT AHON suitte a Ai thonte 292 SGAN HELEICaERPM ii irre a a ia ERE ERE ERIT 293 iie B HELIcal TURNS E 293 SCANS W DIRC COM e ea 294 SCAN LSW DWELI SCAN ESW LOBES i ooo e e E NDE EE EEE EEE AEREE SCAN ES WERO Tal Miserere e En AA AAA AA AAA SGAN ESW SQUIDL conici aiii clem m SCAN RASTE BARS eerte APPS TEMO Heiner ie ie dee pee e dst eee E teres PARE NP SGAN RASTGEBARWIidlli i iterecerea et nter Prec epe ERE ER OW EYE ES ERE OPE pec Ha e e cba oce eee EEA SCAN RASTer DlRection SCAN RAS TetELYBaGK iuto rotor erret A a Dept tree MR SCAN RAS Ter PALM Gl D SCAN RASITOCRPRAT e SGAN RAST6OEPSQOU rrr AAA ta ies p
30. Strength of the received signal The displayed value is the reference value used to calculate the power at the receiver antenna output It is the virtual power level at the receiver output for two perfectly aligned isotropic antennas of emitter and receiver Hence this value is the maximum signal level that can be expected at the receiver antenna output 13 1 2 Related Settings In practice the received signal will be weaker than the displayed signal strength The following parameters influence the signal strength e Distance between the emitter and the receiver i e the free space attenuation e Alignment of the antennas and used antenna patterns e Antenna gain Emitter Interferer position on the 2D map and distance to the receiver The 2D map indicates the current distance calculated from the current emitter inter ferer position on the 2D map To change the position of the emitter interferer use one of the following possibilities e drag the emitter interferer to the new position on the 2D map e open its context menu select Properties gt Location and change the East North coordinates the Altitude and the Distance Receiver Settings To access this dialog 1 In a Localized Emitters scenario select Emitters gt 2D 2 Inthe 2D map open the context menu of the Receiver and select Properties Ant Pattern Y my Planar ntenna M Type Array Antenna Scan OO My Circular M Type Circular Sc
31. Table 5 1 Overview of the available user roles and their access rights User Read Write Create a scenario form Delete ele Copy repository ele role access access the existing elements ments ments Creator x x x x x Admin x x x x x User x x x Guest x x Per default the R amp S Pulse Sequencer uses your Windows login name to access the repositories but you can also use a custom name See also To protect a repository from accidental changes on page 51 To change the default user used to access repositories on page 52 Remote command REPository ACCess on page 351 Storage This tab provides settings necessary to configure the default storage folder for the repositories Repository Settings General l Comment Users Storage Path C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequencer Repositories 20141124 100351 Obtain Write Permission Remove Write Lock Do not alter or remove files within Reveolin Explorer A the repository data structure LEVEL 2 Path Displays the location network or local folder the repository is cur rently stored in Remote command REPository PATH on page 353 Obtain Write Permission Repositories allow the simultaneous access from several users If a user with write permission has opened a repository this write permis sion is exclusive Another user will be granted with the write permis sion only after th
32. on page 228 e Coding on page 95 e Filter on page 95 Remote command PULSe MOP FSK DEViation on page 345 PULSe MOP FSK SRATe on page 345 FM Step The FM step modulation is a common pulse compression technique It defines a modu lation as a number of discrete states table rows each described with its Duration and Frequency Use the standard Append Remove Last or Delete All functions to add or remove a row The provided settings are self explanatory Pulse Settings Example Sequence composed of four pulses with MOP FM Step Configure a FM Step with feta 50 MHZ feng 50 MHz Step 25 MHz Steps 5 Build a sequence and use the Waveform View dialog to visualize the signal see chapter 18 3 How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with I Q Data on page 245 Comment fstart 50 MHz fend 50 MHz Df 25 MHz q MOP Type FM Step GJ ug Le La Ne Duration Frequency N Ci IL e 270 MHz 210 MHz 150 MHz 90 MHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 90 MHz 150 MHz 210 MHz 270 MHz Example Sequence composed of four pulses with MOP FM Step e 1 2 Start and stop frequency 3 Step 25 MHz 4 Pulse width 125 us 5 PRI 500 us 6 Frequency spacing 25 MHz Remote command PULSe MOP FMSTep ADD
33. on page 393 Parameters lt col_sep gt COMMA SEMICOLON WHITESPACE Column separator Antenna Pattern Commands lt decimal gt POINT COMMA Decimal delimiter lt col gt THETA PHI GAIN ETHRE ETHIM EPHRE EPHIM Data content of the column Theta Phi Gain Re E_Theta Im E_Theta Re E_Phi Im E_Phi At least one out of maximum 6 columns should exist Setting parameters lt start_row gt First row with data Range 1 to max Example ANTenna MODel TYPE USER ANTenna MODel USER CSV FORMat 2 COMMA POINT PHI THETA GAIN ANTenna MODel USER LOAD D PS ansys csv Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import Wizard on page 162 PLOT POLar TYPE lt Type gt Sets the coordinates of the 2D antenna pattern diagram Setting parameters lt Type gt POLar CARTesian Example PLOT POLar TYPE CARTesian PLOT POLar CUT XY PLOT POLar LOG MIN 90 Usage Setting only Manual operation See 2D and 3D diagrams on page 158 PLOT POLar CUT lt Cut gt Sets the diagram cut Setting parameters lt Cut gt XY YZ Example See PLOT POLar TYPE on page 290 Usage Setting only Manual operation See 2D and 3D diagrams on page 158 PLOT POLar LOG MIN Min Sets the minimum value displayed on the y axis Setting parameters Min float Antenna Scan Commands Example see PLOT POLar TYPE on page 290 Usage Setting only
34. ri Path A p start Idle Ref Level O dBm continuous E stop Sequence E Les ARB File Ae 1 EB ion ES Repository Trying Out the Software To start the ARB waveform generation If all preconditions are fulfilled the Start button is active and you can start signal gen eration gt Inthe Scenario dialog select Start The R amp S Pulse Sequencer creates the waveform and shows the current progress Name Scenario 1 Single Sequence Data output is in waveform format Created 9 Dec 2014 15 21 26 Reporting is turned off Comment _ Start with Reset O BUSY Current Task Pew 3GHz era al tte i 4 Repository A green indication in the Volatile block confirms that the generation is completed For information on the provided settings see e chapter 6 2 Scenario Settings on page 54 3 6 3 Verifying the Generated Signal in the Waveform View It is often useful to check the generated waveform visually before you transfer the waveform to the vector signal generator The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a built in function the Waveform View to represent the generated signal in a graphical form The initial situation is the configuration described in To start the ARB waveform gener ation on page 28 Trying Out the Software To open the Data View and view the generated signal gt Inthe Scenario dialog select Volatile open the context m
35. ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Nesting on page 110 SEQuence ITEM LEVel OFFSet Offset Sets a level offset Parameters Offset float Range 100 to 30 Default unit dB Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See A Level on page 111 Sequence Commands SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt FIXed Fixed Sets the repetition number as a numeric value Parameters Fixed float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Rep Cont on page 110 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MINimum Minimum SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MAXimum Maximum Sets the value range of the loop count Parameters Maximum float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Loop Repetition on page 113 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt STEP Step Sets the loop count granularity Parameters Step float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Loop Repetition on page 113 SEQuence ITEM LOOP TYPE Type Sets
36. tude and change the default color Customizing the Software 4 Select Save As to store your custom color profile in a file e g MyColors col To customize the general program settings 1 3 In the menu bar select Configure gt Settings Genere user Account Graphics Remote Ctl Program Settings 2 Show wizard on application startup A Open scenario on application startup Show upper and lower toolbar restart required A Add time stamp as comment when creating new entries Security Levels a Display workspace security level in lower toolbar restart required Level NO RESTRICTION m Level 1 Lever 1 m Level 2 LEVEL 2 m Level 3 Lever 3 m im m Change the settings for example customize the colors indicating the different security levels For information on the security levels see General Repository Settings on page 42 Confirm with Ok To set the size and color scheme of the hardcopies For documentation purposes you can create a hardcopy or screen shot of the current screen or dialog Hardcopies can be sent to the printer or stored to the clipboard 1 To adjust the hardcopy size in the menu bar select Configure gt Settings gt Graphics General User Account Graphics Remote Ctrl Use bright colors for screen shots f Use custom size for screen shots instead of 800x600 Width 480 Select Use bright colors for screen s
37. veillance 7 Usethe 3D view to visualize the signal received by a static receiver How to Create and Configure Emitters See figure 11 3 For description of the provided settings see e chapter 11 3 Lists with Multiple Emitters on page 185 e chapter 11 2 3D Emitter Preview Settings on page 184 12 Working with Waveforms and Generating Interfering Signals Additionally to creating pulse signals you can also load waveform files and create waveform scenarios with them or even use them as interferers An waveform can be calculated by the R amp S Pulse Sequencer or created with an exter nal software As long as the data format is in one of the supported import formats you can import any waveform into the waveform library Supported waveform types The fallowing types are supported e Internally created CW waveforms or AWGN waveforms with defined frequency and bandwidth e Externally created Waveforms in the Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary file format wv such files are generated with the signal generation software R amp S WinlQSIM2 or with the real time options of the Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators Files with custom l Q data created with other Rohde amp Schwarz instruments or third party software like MATLAB mat R amp S PR100 riq Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers iq tar or the Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary modified audio file format wav See also table 1 1
38. 55 SOCIO SCAM eee a erae erea AEE e 166 Sector width Raster Scan uie DE ette deor 167 Sector scan Security level FREPOSIONY cito 42 Sequence COMMON tii ti 109 Name 109 Select item 109 Type nene 109 Sequence settings 108 SHOW Tlllig cernere te reet na 96 SIMS NODS ee EUM 154 Signal generation ip M ota nin a 57 Socket communication coccion eee 266 Software IR quiremiehnts icon dices 16 Spectrum Spiral Sca cit ta 169 Squint angle Lobe switching SCAM 2er ici 170 Start delay MIOS a cree Sepe brenda vob 258 Storing FREPOMMS is 262 T Time delay Uu c 258 Time synchronization dle a 115 TOP POWGM iicet id 73 U Unidirectional Raster SCAN icd iii dada 167 Sector SCAM sica iii 166 Upload SPEEDUP T 252 E naaa aa banuennaentde 52 User data source RUIOS ciao la aaa E P User manual User name CUSTOM M citar aa 52 Set default US acopiar dicto relaci 52 WSOP TONGS C M 43 V Varying Pulse parameters iissa nri nitenin 143 View IPM Profile rtr nte ren rte nennen 131 Ww Waveform AWGN Bandwidth teni ee tedious 194 Cl ia 194 iens 194 IMPOR aaa 194 NaMe TR 193 Reference level 1 ae epe neni 194 Signal CONC cesis Ceo rode 194 TYPE 194 M Sutil ll 194 MISUAlIZ o id 194 Waveform size Red citig ee eere t rte er
39. 6 GHz Path B 6 GHz 9 amp 5692 E2 6 GHz My RS SMEV Unknown Path A 3 2 GHz RS SMW SMW200A 0 Path A 6 GHz Path B 6 GHz E3 6 692 1 Master instrument 2 Generator profile see chapter 14 2 Generator Profile Settings on page 219 3 Physical instrument and serial number Signal to Generator Mapping Settings EMITEN ad c c 251 Generator Profiles tiec derer Er Pe dec Deco tcx NE ex da cu S On qe I D Dr Y ERN ER Ru Yn eR 251 PRO AR COV ad 251 Comercio NAGA o dd dt 251 Emitters Interferers Lists the alias names of all currently configured emitters and interferers that are still not assigned to a generator Remote command ASSignment EMITters LIST on page 302 ASSignment EMITters SELect on page 280 Generator Profiles Lists the available generator profiles with their paths supported maximum RF per path and assigned emitters interferers The color LED are status indication of the mapping status e Green a physical instrument is mapped to the profile The signal generator is indicated with its name and serial number see also the List of connected instruments in the Instruments Config dialog Status Not mapped indicates that the generated waveforms are stored as locally Local ARB File gt Target gt File e Red no signal generator is mapped Remote command ASSignment GENerator LIST on page 302 ASSignment GENerator SELect on page 280 ASSig
40. Antenna Magus file format tsv Antenna Magus is an antenna design software tool The tsv files are text files that describe the antenna pattern in a tabular structure These file contain a header section and data part with tab separated values For information see http www antennamagus com Example Antenna Magus tsv file extract Far field exported from Antenna Magus 5 3 0 1686 On Friday March 06 Frequency 3 0E 9 Hz 2015 at 1 18 13 PM Power 0 171146735151053 W Theta Samples 181 Phi Samples 361 0 000000000000E 000 Theta Phi Re E Theta Im E Theta Re E_Phi Im E Phi 0 000000000000E 000 4 303687774512E 016 0 000000000000E 000 7 148424634567E 000 1 43626BS2E906E 000 0 000000000000E 000 4 425352450194E 016 0 000000000000E 000 7 363208895868E 000 1 542584165100E4000 1 000000000000E 000 Supported File Types and File Formats ANSYS HFSS file format ffd ANSYS HFSS software is the industry standard for simulating 3 D full wave electro magnetic fields The R amp S Pulse Sequencer supports the f d multi frequency far field pattern files but imports only the first frequency For information see http www ansys com Example ANSYS HFSS ffd file extract The values in the columns are the complex values of the electromagnetic field in Theta and Phi direction 0 180 19 0 360 37 Frequencies 1 Frequency 8 680000000000000e 008 3 029304169961667e 000 3 59256220389790
41. Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Unit of Affected Parameter on page 131 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet PARameter Parameter Sets the pulse parameter the IPM profile is assigned to Parameters Parameter OVERshoot LEVel ATOP RLEVel DROop AMDepth RISE WIDTh DELay FMDeviation FALL FMFRequency CDEViation ABASe RFRequency PRF PHASe AMFRequency PRI FREQuency Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Assign to on page 143 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet TYPE Type Sets whether the profile is assigned to a parameter or to a variable Parameters Type PARameter VARiable Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Assign to on page 143 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet VARiable Variable Sets the variable the profile is assigned to Parameters Variable string Manual operation See Assign to on page 143 IPM EQUation Equation Defines the IPM shape as a function Parameters Equation string Example IPM EQUation i 10 5 i 0 5 Manual operation See Equation on page 136 IPM LIST ITEM VALue Value Sets the value of the selected list item Parameters Value float Range 1e 11 to 1e 11 Example see example Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles on page 310 Manual operation See List on pag
42. PRBS TYPE on page 300 Bits Sets the length of the current item in bits Remote command DSRC ITEM BITS on page 299 Config Accesses a dialog with additional settings see Shift register on page 229 Shift register A PRBS sequence is defined by a length and an register shift number see table 15 1 PRBS Line 3 A Keep shift register value _ Initialize shift register b Keep shift register value Use the default values Initialize shift register Customize the shift register How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP Initialization value Set a new initialization value Remote command DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT on page 300 DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT VALue on page 300 User Data For Data Source gt Type gt User you can define your own data pattern see Suppor ted types of data source on page 226 User Data Line 3 0101 1010 binary Test string fx 20 20 20 hex numbers Preview Data Source Displays the data content See also example Data source processing on page 226 Refresh Perform refresh to display the current data content Start Byte Length Sets the data bits currently displayed 15 2 How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP See To configure the data source on page 230 To assign the data source to a MOP on page 231 To configure the data source To access the Data Source dialog 1 Select Repository Tree Data Source
43. Parameters lt Diameter gt float Range 0 05 to 100 Default unit m Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Parabolic Antenna Settings on page 158 Antenna Pattern Commands ANTenna MODel ROTation X lt X gt ANTenna MODel ROTation Z lt Z gt Sets the X and Z antenna rotation Parameters lt Z gt float Range 180 to 180 Default unit degree Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Z Rotation X Rotation on page 157 ANTenna MODel TYPE lt Type gt Sets the antenna pattern Parameters lt Type gt DIPole PARabolic GAUSsian SINC HORN COSecant ARRay USER CUSTom Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Antenna Model on page 156 ANTenna MODel USER LOAD lt Load gt Loads a custom antenna pattern file Setting parameters lt Load gt string Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Imported Antenna Settings on page 161 ANTenna MODel USER CSV FORMat lt start_row gt lt col_sep gt lt decimal gt lt col gt lt col gt Defines how the data in the selected csv file should be interpreted The settings in this command are not permanent The command affects only the cur rently selected antenna For description of the csv file format see chapter A 1 2 Antenna Pattern File For mats
44. Parameters lt Frequency gt float Range 1000 to 4 4e 10 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Frequency on page 56 SCENario OUTPut LEVel Level Sets the reference level used by the calculation of the pulse envelope Scenario Commands Parameters lt Level gt float Range 200 to 30 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Ref Level on page 56 SCENario OUTPUut PATH Path Sets the directory the generated waveform is stored in Parameters Path string file path Example see example Creating a simple emitter scenario on page 358 Manual operation See Load ARB File on page 59 SCENario OUTPut REPository ENABle Enable Enables file storage in the repository Parameters Enable ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Volatile Repository on page 57 SCENario OUTPut RESet ENABle lt Enable gt Restarts the connected instrument on sceanrio start Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Start with Reset on page 56 SCENario OUTPut RF ENABle lt Enable gt Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Manual operation See Set RF level and f
45. Rate ULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALue 100000 P P P P P PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable CATalog P P PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable SELect Type PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALue 2 selected is the third value from the list of variables DSRC CATalog DataSource PULSe MOP DATA DSRC DataSource PULSe MOP DATA CODing NONE PULSe MOP FILTer TYPE COS PULSe MOP FILTer LENGth 128 PULSe MOP FILTer BT 0 3 PULSe MOP FILTer BWIDth 1000 Plugin and Reporting Commands Example Using a plugin as an IPM profile SCPI PM CREate Custom IPM IPM UNIT PERCent PM TYPE PLUGin PLUGin CATalog My QAM PlugIn CustomIPM PM PLUGin NAME CustomIPM PM PLUGin VARiable CATalog Sstep Spw PM PLUGin VARiable SELect Spw PM PLUGin VARiable VALue 0 00001 Example Generating reports SCPI SCENario PDW ENABle 1 SCENario PDW PATH C My Report Files SCENario PDW TYPE PLUGin PLUGin CATalog My QAM PlugIn CustomIPM Report PDW Reporting DFS SCENario PDW PLUGin NAME Report PDW SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable CATalog File Header SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable SELect File SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable VALue pdw out txt IPMEPLUGin VARIable SELe6 t 1 cee ctiuace e sssneccedseiaseacccessaadeceaesigeadecesdaneeedecsnseaeceaes 329 PULSE MOP PLUGA VARADE SELEG sponini aliada acid 329 SCENario PDW PLUGIN VARlable VALUS coccion 329 IPM PLEUGID
46. The sequences containing wavefroms are also described in table form where the rows are processed sequentially Each row is repeated once or as defined with the parame ter Repetition Count Complex waveform sequences may contain waveforms and loops Other control elements are not supported See chapter 8 2 1 Sequence Description Settings on page 109 12 1 Waveform Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Waveform gt New Comment imported matlab file Type Custom I Q Data Signal Content Communication signal Import View Level Samples Clock Duration Pkto Av The following settings are available WV Matlab Waveform Settings Waveform NalTie x ise ecc a oe Deuce ecar ade tutos a 193 COMME n tis hens a aa ua odva aetna Ha um REA mes a tea ev edd 194 Hoc R 194 Ires m ta 194 o RR TED RETE 194 luos c u 194 IM 194 View Level M dd E TE EEE 194 Waveform Name Enters a name Remote command WAVeform NAME on page 278 WAVeform CREate on page 277 WAVeform SELect on page 277 WAVeform CATalog on page 276 WAVeform REMove on page 279 Waveform Settings Comment Adds a description Remote command WAVeform COMMent on page 278 Type Sets the type of the waveform to be created or
47. Upload to VSG gt Target gt Generator to transfer and upload the waveform s to a signal generator The second line indicates the currently select generator profile Upload to SG Fon msw Q Ow gt e RFA To assign a generator profile select Upload to VSG gt Select and select an existing profile Profiles must match with the capabilities of a physical instrument e Green LED indicates that the selected profile is suitable for the current scenario If all other prerequisites are fulfilled the Start function is active e Yellow LED indicates insufficient capabilities e Red LED indicates that no profile is assigned In a Scenario Type gt Localized Emitters use the Assign Emitters function to per form a signal to instrument mapping With the Sanitize function you can remove uploaded waveforms from the hard disk of the signal generator Scenario Settings Upload to VSG tO com A Q Target gt p e RFA Select gt Clear New Edit Sanitize gt This Scenario Entire Repository All Pulse Sequencer See also e chapter 19 2 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings on page 250 e To retrieve the profile of the connected generator on page 224 e To find connected instruments and assign the generator profiles to them on page 222 e To assign a connected instrument to a scenario on page 225 e To map the generated signals to the signal generator on page 214 e To delete wavefrom
48. determined by the selected Azimuth and Elevation the position on the y axis the distance to the emitter is fixed 2a Azimuth 10 deg turns the antenna horizontally i e the receiver is not at the central scan axis but rotated in clockwise CW direction on the x axis 2b Elevation 5 deg turns the antenna vertically i e moves the receiver on the z axis 3 Current position of the scanning beam 4 Scan and pattern visualization 6a uses Scan Line Pattern 5 7 Amplitude changes in the received signal over time 5a 5b Start time and simulation period max value on the x axis 6a 6b 6b is the XZ representation of the 6a 3D view 6b uses Scan Line On Use the mouse to change the orientation of the interactive 3D diagram and to zoom on it For description of the provided settings see chapter 11 2 3D Emitter Preview Set tings on page 184 To configure complex scenarios with several emitters If you test situation requires to test the receiver s ability to correctly detect the signal from different static emitters you can use Emitter Collection scenario In this dedi cated scenario you can configure several emitters and switch between them sequen tially You can also configure the receiver and change its position in the scanning beam of the emitters The following example create a complex scenarios with several emitters and a receiver to explain the principle 1 Create a new Emitter Collect
49. e chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 e chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 21 Automation of R amp S Pulse Sequencer In addition to working with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer software interactively it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC Remote control operation allows you to automate the configuration process and is useful when a higher configuration speed is required Remote control is an operation by which the software is operated remotely from a so called controller A controller can be any PC on which some required software is instal led and configured R amp S Pulse Sequencer might be but not necessarily is installed on the same PC In case R amp S Pulse Sequencer is not physically located on the control lers PC a LAN connection between both PCs is required The figures below depict the following two possible cases e The controller and R amp S Pulse Sequencer are on the same PC RES Pulse Sequencer PC e n some rare cases the controller and the software are installed on two separate PCs L PC 1 R amp S Pulse Sequencer UN PC 2 In remote control operation the software itself is operated by means of remote control commands For description of specific SCPI commands refer to chapter 22 Remote Control Commands on page 269 remote operation in a network as described in the documentation of the instrum
50. esssseee 206 2D Map Settings To access this dialog gt Ina Localized Emitters scenario select Emitters gt 2D The 2D diagram displays the configuration on a map with North East coordinates Related Settings Fig 13 2 2D view understanding the displayed information 1 Display options the Range Scale for example defines the radius of the displayed 2D map 2 Access the Assign Signal Source to Generator Profiles dialog and indicates the mapping status 3 Distance to the receiver and Strength of the received signal 4 Point to Receiver On antenna is automatically turned in the direction of the receiver 5 Emitter or interferer indicated with its alias name EIRP and transmission frequency Distance Level Direction EIRP Frequency oococincnnocccoccnncccnnocnnnnnnononncononnnnnnnnnnnnnns 203 cipis E AE yy sjceelecte As sexta terete ee ai ales tanned se euals E T 203 Assign EMOS ii 203 Strength of the received SigNal ooooccccinicninncccnnncccnonnnnncccnnrnnnnn rencores 203 Emitter Interferer position on the 2D map and distance to the receiver 204 Distance Level Direction EIRP Frequency To change the displayed information enable or disable the corresponding parameter Range Scale Sets the radius of the 2D map Assign Emitters Accesses the Assign Signal Source to Generator Profiles dialog see chapter 19 2 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings on page 250
51. gt Gate The envelope graph marks the time periods during that the markers are held high Remote Commands e PULSe PULSe PULSe PULSe PULSe MARKer MARKer MARKer MARKer MARKer Sequence markers RISE on page 324 WIDTh on page 324 FAL L on page 324 AUTO on page 324 GAT E on page 324 If pulse markers are defined you can also define markers on multiple repeating pulses and mark the first last or all pulses To access the sequence marker settings 1 Select Repository Tree Sequence Sequence Description Marker 2 Select M1 gt All M2 gt First M3 gt Last Repetition First Last All Some generators support less than A 4 markers These marker signals will be omitted during signal generation The Marker 2 will be generate only for the first pulse out of all repetitions Remote Commands e SEQuence ITEM MARKer FIRSt on page 324 e SEQuence ITEM MARKer LAST on page 324 e SEQuence ITEM MARKer ALL on page 324 Global markers In scenarios if the selected sequence contain markers you can enable that they are considered by the generation of the output waveform file To access the waveform generator marker settings 1 Select Repository Tree Scenario Waveform Generator Config 2 Select Features Markers Enable Markers Signals Output Clock Duration
52. ing gt Enable See also chapter 20 Creating Reports and Documenting Measurement Results on page 260 Scenario Settings Set RF level and frequency on target instrument If enabled the RF frequency and output level on the signal generator will be automati cally configured Remote command SCENario OUTPut RF ENABle on page 371 Frequency Sets the carrier frequency of the instrument on which the generated waveform is modulated on Emitters use their current operating frequency see EIRP on page 181 Remote command SCENario OUTPut FREQuency on page 370 Ref Level Sets the reference level This value is used by the calculation of the pulse envelope The reference level corre sponds to the Ref line displayed on the Pulse Envelope Graph as a relative ratio For example Ref 1 corresponds to 100 Ref Level For unattenuated pulses the Ref Level sets the pulse top power Example Pulse top power of an unattenuated pulse If e Ref Level 30 dBm e Pulse gt Level gt Attenuation gt Top Power 0 dB Then the pulse top power would be 30 dB at the RF output Example Pulse top power of an attenuated pulse If e Ref Level 30 dBm e Pulse gt Level gt Attenuation Top Power 10 dB Then the pulse top power would be 40 dB at the RF output If e Ref Level 30 dBm e Pulse gt Level gt Attenuation gt Top Power 0 dB e A Level 10 dB Then the pulse top
53. on page 399 See also To generate a pulse with raised cosine envelope shape on page 103 To define your custom envelope shape with an equation on page 104 Remote command PULSe ENVelope EQUation on page 336 Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data You can define an envelope function store it in a file and import and load files describ ing envelope functions Pulse Settings Fig 7 8 Custom Envelope gt Use Imported Data understanding the displayed information 1 Custom Envelope The duration between the beginning of the rising edge and the end of the falling edge is 100 us 500 us 100 us 700 us i e the x values of the 6 items are distributed equidistant at each 100 us 3 Use Imported Data 4a 7 cons that access standard functions 4b Import Data from File access a dialog for loading of custom envelopes 5a 5b 5e Value i e value on the y axis 6 Offset 0 Envelope Data Table An envelope curve consists of two or more items Each item is a line defined by the y value of end point the start point is allays the end point of the previous item The X values are calculated automatically so that the items are dis tributed equidistant between the beginning of the rising edge an the end of the falling edge Data Format Selects the scaling used by the Envelope Graph Multiplier Applies a multiplier t
54. plex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Remote command IPM PLUGin NAME on page 278 IPM PLUGin VARiable CATalog on page 329 IPM PLUGin VARiable SELect on page 329 IPM PLUGin VARiable VALue on page 329 9 1 3 Edit List Settings Edit List List editor with standard functions 1 Standard functions for item handling 2 Import Data from File icon 3 Populate list icon New Select Accesses standard functions for item handling like Select AII Remove All Insert After etc See table 3 4 Import Data from File Opens the Windows Explorer to navigate and select an ASCII file with list data IPM Profiles Settings Populate List Accesses the Populate List dialog Populate To fill in a list with values automatically set e Start start value e Increment step with that the values are incremented e Count number of list items Item Selects an item No Automatically assigned number to each list item Value Enters the value of the list item Repetitions Defines how many times a particular list item is repeated Remote command IPM LIST LOAD on page 314 IPM LIST SAVE on page 315 IPM LIST CLEar on page 282 9 1 4 IPM Profiles Settings Configure Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Settings To access these settings gt Inthe Sequence dialog select a pulse item and select IPM gt Static Source Profile e My PW itter 5
55. to visualize the pulse width rise and fall time on the graph About the Sequencing Principles 8 Building Pulse Sequences This section explains the sequencing principles and signal processing like creating loops and defining overlaying signals For information on sequences containing waveforms see chapter 12 Working with Waveforms and Generating Interfering Signals on page 192 8 1 About the Sequencing Principles Sequences are described in table form where the rows are processed sequentially and appended to the final waveform see figure 8 1 Fig 8 1 Default segments processing One segment after the other Each row is repeated once or as defined with the repetition count parameter see Rep Cont on page 110 See also To define and enable pulse repetition on page 118 chapter 8 2 2 Pulse Repetition Settings on page 112 Complex sequences may also contain loops overlays and fillers Loop A loop spans one or more rows pulses and processes these rows in the same order several times Nested loops are complex loops that span rows and loops The loop duration is defined by the loop repetition number The loop repetition number is a fixed value or a randomly selected value within a value range defined with its minimum maximum and step values See also To define and apply a loop on page 119 chapter 8 2 3 Loop Settings on page 113 Overlay An overlay processes rows in parallel The row pr
56. 2D map are static elements with configurable coor dinates Properties Location Pointing 1327 27 m 6245 19 m EA AAA East North Altitude Distance 10m 5384 68 m To change the location of an element drag this element on the 2D map Use the Location parameters to define the position more precisely See also To enable static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 Remote command SCENario LOCalized LOCation EAST on page 366 SCENario LOCalized LOCation NORTh on page 366 SCENario LOCalized LOCation ALTitude on page 366 SCENario LOCalized DISTance on page 365 Pointing Direction Properties l Location Pointing Point to Receiver Elevation Bearing Defines the orientation of the antennas as Elevation and Bearing How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver Fig 13 3 Bearing understanding the displayed information 1 Bearing is the angle between the antenna s boresight and North If Point to Receiver is enabled the antenna is automatically turned in the direction of the receiver Remote command SCENario LOCalized DIRection TRACK on page 366 SCENario LOCalized DIRection ELEVation on page 364 SCENario LOCalized DIRection BEARing on page 364 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver If you test situation requires to test the receiver s ability to correctly dete
57. E REQUTIC esunt pneu t too epar ku te EITE ATIN u NAE ERST ER EE SCENario LOCalized WAVelform SGAN acit tee yt cp cr tert dg d ge eee det verde pere iiec End 278 SCENario QUTPut GLOCK AUTO BORDJLE 2 ciet tte eer tnl aor nr Aa aee 369 SGENario OUTPut CLOCKkAUTO OVERSsamplirig 5 5 665 tion nin aariaa 369 isjei iimexolByndusueEoe dope 368 SCENario QUTPUtCLOCKUSER cocoa repetere ect rtp nr OL Ue ved cd ye uec Eo de ep uu 369 SCENatio OUTPUEDURation MODE ieri rii E het Enter En inn ean 369 SGCENatio OUTPut bURaltion MIME occasion 370 SGENario OD TPutFORMAal erento tt eee tede e o RV d E EXE REN n 370 SCENario OUTPut FREQuency gt CENano OUTPRUCDEVO reir nen m 370 SCENario OUTPUELOOP COMB Eross teme edt tp nette Eger ree tgp ecw 370 SCENario OUTPUEMARKer ENAB Sii ora idas 325 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURatiON ooooccinocccinnncccnonccacinoncnnononcnnononcnnonononnnnononcnnenannnn cnn nennen 325 SCENario QUTPut MARKer SCENAario ENABloO pente il 325 SGENANOZOUTIPUUPAT Fie m an ia tai SCENario OUTPut REPository ENABle SCENatio GQUTPuUt RESeEENABIG receta etre ter tete pre eee stp tob uc dp etu ce vut o ds SGENario OD TPUCRF ENABIG ic cr t terrere t resi re E crc e EU recrear ERE ERA gt GENano OUTPUERUNMODE SCENario QUTPUETAR Onil it te Dec dpa ita SCENa
58. Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope settings or Pulse Envelope Set tings For example see the envelope graph on figure 7 4 Normalized Pulse Envelope Changes the used units Available are Watt dBm W and Voltage Show Timing Set Show Timing gt On to visualize the pulse width rise and fall time on the graph This visualization is useful if you are not familiar with the definition of the pulse parameters when different profiles are used See also chapter 7 1 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Genera tion on page 66 Temporary delta information Drag the mouse cursor on the graph The delta information is displayed temporary above the line Example Measuring the pulse width with the help of delta marker 498 577 mV Eius o 498 577 mV re Om 1 Delta information upper value is the Ax s lower value is the A y units depending on the selected Pulse Envelope Units 2a 2b Start and end y values units depending on the selected Pulse Envelope Units Remote command PULSe PREView MODE on page 349 Pulse Settings Modulation Graph Displays the current modulation characteristics depending on the selected Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings The MOP is visualized on three diagrams the time domain view the spectrum and the 1 Q constellation diagrams AW 1 5 us d A o j 0 1 0 T 42 5 us div 0 71 U 05 1 0 Clock 10 MHz limited Samples 1250 10 dB div I
59. IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Restart on page 144 SEQuence ITEM IPM SOURce Source Selects the profile source Use the command IPM CATalog to querry the exsisting prfiles Parameters lt Source gt string Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Source Profile on page 143 22 12 Marker Commands Marker commands enable or up to four markers in any combination at once Markers signals are binary signals Each marker signal is represented by a single bit within a marker byte The table 22 1 explains the assailment Marker Commands Table 22 1 Setting parameter as function of the marker states Marker Marker byte Value of the settings parameter in the remote com mands M1 0000 0001 0x01 M2 0000 0010 0x02 M3 0000 0100 0x04 M4 0000 1000 0x08 In the following examples we assume that a pulse base sequence Test Sequence and the required Pulses have been created See also e example Handling items on page 272 e example Creating an unmodulated pulse on page 331 Example Defining pulse and sequence markers and enabling the global markers SCPI ULSe SELect P1 activate Marker 1 for the whole pulse on time rise fall with time ULSe MARKer RISE 1 ULSe MARKer FALL 1 LSe MARKer WIDTh 1 enable Marker 2 on restart ULSe MARKer AUTO 2 enable Marker 3 als gate marker H ce Dy c UU UU UU c a c ULSe MARK
60. Inthe menu bar select File gt Load and Manage Repository E4 Load dy Export Copy to ES Discard Name Tera area Wein Aer Ts es Y C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse SequenceriRepositories e K300 and K301 Tests 19 Nov 201415 1Dec 2014 11 1 10 NO RESTRICTION Add Path E My TestScenarios 12 Feb 2014 15 21Jan 2015 08 4 1 0 R amp S LEVEL 2 p 29 My_TestScenarios 25 Jun 2014 15 2 21 Jan 2015 10 1 2 2 Rohde amp Schwarz LEVEL 2 Add Install Path Repos 1 9 Dec 2014 16 1 21Jan 2015 08 3 1 NO RESTRICTION OO Newt O Jan 2015 12 9Jan 2015 12 5 10 NO RESTRICTION Add Home Path PRS b K300 Remove Path w K301 SS E R amp sDemo 11 Jul 2014 12 4 23 Jul 2014 15 2 1 0 Rohde amp Schwarz NO RESTRICTION D Avionics D Plugins D Radar Available are the following settings Discovered Repositories on the Mass Storage 47 A acts ETT TD 47 3 M 47 CODY iia 47 A A O 47 o IM 47 Add Path Add Install Path Add Home Path oooccnccccccocnncnnncnocoronnnnncononorononononarononononos 47 Remove Pam ida 48 Repository Manager Settings Discovered Repositories on the Mass Storage Lists all found directories and the repository files they contain You can change the column width and order A red lock symbol amp on the data base icon in the Repository Manager indicates one of the following situations e repos
61. M Marker Arra Aie Phase PA Deny gt d i y l 234 os 15m los gt P2 lesz bull Static 1234 oe od o 25ms los 3 To include the first three items Line items 2 3 and 4 in the overlay select the Indent icon Sequence Description la Le as L9 La La A A os os oe ME ul l ER ERM ote ode e 25ns los The block diagram confirms that the three items are overlaid the fourth item will be processed after elapsing of the overlay duration 4 To observe the effect of an enabled overlay open the Data View dialog How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements See also chapter 18 3 How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with 1 Q Data on page 245 e je fi ped i i ud n e A A 99 e i 1 1 l 1 Overlay 1a Overlay Duration 5 ms 2 Generated pulse sequence sum segment followed by the item outside of the overlay 2a 2b Resulting sum segment 2a Short segment 2x pulse P1 with PRI 1 ms remainder is left blank 2b Long segment 4x pulse P1 with PRI 1 5 ms segment is truncated 2c Outside segment 2xP2 appended right after the overlay 2d The first P1 short segment and the first P2 long segment
62. MARKer AUTO lt Auto gt Enables up to four restart markers Parameters lt Auto gt float see table 22 1 Range O to 65535 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Pulse markers on page 236 PULSe MARKer GATE lt Gate gt Enables up to four gate markers Parameters lt Gate gt float see table 22 1 Range O to 65535 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Pulse markers on page 236 IE II SEQuence ITEM MARKer FIRSt First SEQuence ITEM MARKer LAST Last SEQuence ITEM MARKer ALL lt All gt Enables up to four markers of the corresponding type Marker Commands Parameters lt All gt float see table 22 1 Range 0 to 65535 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Sequence markers on page 237 SCENario OUTPut MARKer ENABle lt Enable gt Enables that markers are considered by the generation of the output waveform file Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Features on page 249 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario ENABle lt Enable gt Enables an additional marker that is
63. MOP FMSTep ULSe MOP FMSTep ELect 2 URation 2 49999993684469e 05 REQuency 25000000 ULSe MOP FMSTep ULSe MOP FMSTep WU UU U U U vU c S D E ULSe MOP FMSTep A S D E ULSe MOP FMSTep Pulse Commands Example Creating a BPSK pulse SCPI ULSe CREate Test ULSe MOP ENABle 1 ULSe MOP TYPE BPSK ULSe MOP BPSK TYPE NORMal LSe MOP BPSK SRATe AUTO 0 ULSe MOP BPSK SRATe le 06 ULSe MOP BPSK PHASe 180 ULSe MOP BPSK TTYPe COSine ULSe MOP BPSK TTIMe 5 WU vu w ve Uo VU Uo DU uU c Example Creating pulses with custom envelope SCPI ULSe SELect Test ULSe CUSTom 1 ULSe ENVelope MODE DATA ULSe ENVelope DATA LOAD C _PS files mop shape custom csv UNIT VOLTAGE MULTiplier 1 OFFSet 0 TEM SELect 1 ULSe ENVelope DAT ULSe ENVelope DAT ULSe ENVelope DAT LSe ENVelope DAT ULSe ENVelope DAT 0 2 ULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM SELect 7 TEM VALue ULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM VALue 043 LSe ENVelope DATA ITEM COUNt DO y CU c Tom U JU U UU uU Uu a PULSe ENVelope MODE EQUation PULSe ENVelope EQUation Sech Pulse 1 cosh 2 t Tr Ton 2 1n l sqrt 2 Ton 2 PULSE CBS TON ta ene Dre a NE A 335 PULS ENVelope DATA ITEM VALUE ori 335 PULSe ENVelope DATA LOAD cooooococncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononononnononnnnnnnnanann nana nnnnnnnnnananananeninines 335 PULSeENVelope DATA UNT ur A aia 335 PULSe ENVelope DATA MULETipliBr
64. Manual operation See 2D and 3D diagrams on page 158 22 6 Antenna Scan Commands Example Defining antenna scans SCPI SCAN CREate My RasterScan SCAN TYPE RASTer SCAN RASTer WIDTh 70 SCAN RASTer BARWidth 3 SCAN RASTer RATE 15 SCAN RASTer BARS 10 SCAN RASTer DIRection HORizontal SCAN RASTer RETRace 0 001 SCAN RASTer UNIDirection 1 SCAN RASTer FLYBack 0 001 SCAN RASTer PALMer 1 SCAN RASTer PRATe 5 SCAN RASTer PSQuint 1 5 SCAN CREate Test Antenna Scan SCAN TYPE HELical SCAN HELical RPM 45 SCAN HELical TURNs 8 SCAN HELical ELEVation STEP 3 SCAN HELical RETRace 1 SCAN HELical ROTation CW SCAN OIROUISERGUESUOL cedat a tut re redeo petu des rex dine gne danti etude uen 292 SCAN CONIC RO TOUDI cris a A e c Red tete meds 292 SCAN HELICAIER Tali co cra eite netto bae en esce a a RE RR eens 292 CANES VV WAM OU ideas 292 SCAN SPIRSERO TAO ete A A endear 292 sene uM prid MT 293 SOANIBIEBICSI SP nct dor eheu Iv e EX Ca A ea Saa ye 293 SCANICONIGSERATE 0 A insgesamt A REED Edd 293 SBANISSEGTOGBATE isis aos 293 SGAN RAS TERRA TE ui dana 293 SCAN HELICSEEEEVSOIm STEP a ii do ti Dl adds 293 SCAN HEbicak TURNS T a AA A E A A AA 293 SCAMS WW DIRS OOM ti Soa re aoc eras cord debe Sod eje ates en tea eke 294 SCAN ES DWEL Sorride dada 294 SCAN LSW LOBES iia AA E EAE AAA AAA 294 SCAN CONG SOU ara pat as 294 Antenna Scan Commands SCAN ESOO E 294 SCAN RAS Ter BARS aia 294 SCAN RASTercBABRNWIGED e cvascacandrciria
65. On gt float Range 0 to 100 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Attenuation on page 73 PULSe MOP AM FREQuency lt Frequency gt Sets modulation frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt float Range 0 001 to 1e 09 Example see PULSe MOP AM TYPE on page 338 Manual operation See AM on page 83 PULSe MOP AM MDEPth lt Mdepth gt Sets the modulation depth Parameters lt Mdepth gt Example Manual operation Pulse Commands float Range 0 to 100 Default unit percent see PULSe MOP AM TYPE on page 338 See AM on page 83 PULSe MOP AM TYPE Type Selects the modulation type Parameters Type Example Manual operation STD LSB USB SB PULSe MOP TYPE AM PULSe MOP AM TYPE STD PULSe MOP AM FREQuency 50000 PULSe MOP AM MDEPth 50 See AM on page 83 PULSe MOP AMSTep DURation Duration PULSe MOP FMSTep DURation Duration Sets the step time Parameters Duration Example Manual operation float Range O to 3600 Default unit s see example Creating a FM step pulse on page 332 See FM Step on page 86 PULSe MOP AMSTep LEVel Level Sets the step level Parameters Level Example Manual operation float Range 100 to O see example Creating a FM step pulse on page 332 See AM Step on page 84 PULSe MOP FMSTep FREQuency Frequ
66. PATH C My ARB Files SCENario STARt Scenario Commands Example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes SCPI SCENario CREate LocalizedEmitters SCENario TYPE LOCalized EMITter CATalog My EmitterGuidance TestEmitter WAVeform CATalog My Waveform WV Matlab CW AWGN ANTenna CATalog Isotropic My PencilBeam My Cosecant My PlanarAntenna Testantenna SCAN CATalog My RasterScan My Circular Test Antenna Scan SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ANTenna My Cosecant SCENario LOCalized RECeiver SCAN My Circular SCENario LOCalized RECeiver GAIN 5 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ALTitude 1 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection BEARing 0 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection ELEVation 5 SCENario LOCalized ADD SCENario LOCalized SELect 4 SCENario LOCalized SELect 5 SCENario LOCalized TYPE WAVeform SCENario LOCalized ALIas I3 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform My Waveform SCENario LOCalized WAVeform EIRP 50 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform FREQuency 3e 09 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform ANTenna Testantenna SCENario LOCalized WAVeform SCAN Test Antenna Scan SCENario LOCalized DIRection TRACk 1 SCENario LOCalized DIRection ELEVation 0 SCENario LOCalized DIRection BEARing 53 3035 SCENario LOCalized LOCation EAST 2860 34 SCENario LOCalized LOCation NORTh 3837 93 SCENario LOCalized DISTance 4786 57 SCENario LOCalized ADD SCENario LOCalized SELect 6 SCENario LOCalized TYPE
67. PE cocinar ie ced a aee ec etna AA Aaa 289 AR TennaMODeEUSERUEGQAD 32 2 erdt ere ii ee trii don 289 ANTenna MODeEUSER CSV FORMlBL ae er ameti se scat k e Rare Ra Ra PRI S XR MAR Na aaa DOR 289 PLOT POL TIP E ei secre ve et tavedenasixchuav a A O ARM ERI RN RR EE 290 PLOTPO Lar 819 n TET 290 PLOT POLI LOG MIN eT 290 ANTenna MODel ARRay COSN lt Cosn gt Sets Cos N of the Planar Phased Array antenna Parameters lt Cosn gt float Range 2 to 10 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings on page 160 Antenna Pattern Commands ANTenna MODel ARRay DISTribution Distribution Sets the aperture distribution of the Planar Phased Array antenna Parameters lt Distribution gt UNIForm PARabolic COSine CSQuared COSN TRlangular Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel ARRay NX lt Nx gt ANTenna MODel ARRay NZ lt Nz gt Sets the number of elements of the Planar Phased Array antenna Parameters Nz float Range 1 to 1000 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel ARRay PEDestal lt Pedestal gt Sets the Pedestal of the Planar Phased Array antenna Parameters lt Pede
68. Peak to Peak value a constant Offset can be applied to the entire waveform the waveform period is set as Period Time or as num ber of pulses Pulse Count it lasts 20m 0 20m 40 m 0m 39 100 m 120 m 140 m 160 m 180 m Fig 9 5 IPM with shape Profile Waveform Type Ramp 1 Offset 40 ms 2 Peak to Peak 120 ms Linear Ramp The linear ramp is a profile with a sawtooth shape The generated values monotonically increase from Offset Pk to Pk 2 to Offset Pk to Pk 2 Sine Triangular IPM Profiles Settings The sine profile creates values that follow one period of a sine wave Enable a Phase Offset to change the start phase of the sine wave The triangular profile changes a parameter from a minimum to a max imum value and back to the minimum value following a triangular shape Remote command LEM IPM IPM IPM IPM IPM IPM WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform BASE on page 320 TYPE on page 320 PKPK on page 321 OFFSet on page 320 PHASe on page 321 COUNt on page 320 PERiod on page 321 Interpolated Shape The IPM shape is a sequence of values defined in a list where the list items are map ped to a number of repetitions Pulse Count or equally distributed over a selected period of time Period Time The transition between the increments can also be linearly int
69. Plugin Programming API Envelope name Equation Envelope shape Raised Cosine Pulse 0 5 1 cos 2 PI t T Gaussian Pulse exp 4 In 2 t Tr Tw 2 Tw 2 Lorentzian Pulse 1 1 4 sqrt 2 1 t Tr Tw 2 Tw 2 2 Sech Pulse 1 cosh 2 t Tr Tw 2 In 1 sqrt 2 Tw 2 where Amplitude value range is O 1 V A 3 Plugin Programming API The functionality of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer can be extended by Plugins A plugin is a Microsoft Windows DLL This DLL can be loaded into a repository and then remains there You can load Plugins to specify your custom modulation scheme MOP e define a custom inter pulse modulation profile IPM A 3 1 Plugin Programming API e create a report file The following is a list of all functions that the plugin have to provide COMNONFINCIONS 2 am desire dedo eas A ta 401 MOP RUACUONS siria eens 404 CM Une c i 409 Common Functions Void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS GEYDE coa tt e E Ren e terae eene taa 401 Void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS gelVersioli ione ene aee Per a Rn etra mr Aaa 401 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getComtighi iiie eiecec e pspeaoce rd 401 Void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS gelAUTIOE ucc crore tte reete xe ott rtp cera elata 402 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getName 2 2 iit ede ec ra ee codo aa cio ei s eode 402 Void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS QEIEMO arios 402 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getNextMsg
70. Pulse Sequencer Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the signal generation R amp S Pulse Sequencer Configuration and Settings logically divided in several topics A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure signal gen eration with their corresponding remote control commands How to Generate a Signal with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer Options The basic procedure to perform signal generation tasks and step by step instruc tions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Detailed examples guide you through typical signal generation scenarios and allow you to try out the application immediately Typical Application Examples Example signal generation scenarios in which the software is frequently used Remote Control Commands Remote commands required to configure and perform signal generation in a remote environment sorted by tasks Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Commands required to set up the vector signal generator or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the User Manual of the base unit Annex Reference material such as extensive lists tables or overviews Glossary Alphabetical list of often used terms and abbreviations User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 9 Documentation Overview e List of remote commands Alphabetical list of all remote commands described in the
71. Remote command SEQuence ITEM FILLer SIGNal on page 375 Mode Filling segments are commonly used for synchronization purposes This parameter defines the way the filler duration is determined Duration Enables a dummy signal for a given period of time Time Synchronization In this mode signal data is generated up to the defined point in time If the selected time has already elapsed an error is generated and the calculation is stopped Use this mode if a signal shall start at a defined point in time and the length of the previous signals vary or is not known Remote command SEQuence ITEM FILLer MODE on page 375 Time Defines the timing of the filler Fixed Uses a fixed time Sequence Settings Equation Defines the point of time as an equation Remote command SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME on page 375 SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME FIXed on page 376 SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME EQUation on page 375 8 2 6 Lists with Multiple Sequences Collection of Sequences Properties of Selected Sequence ss as Le Le lla le Sequence My_51_P1 E F H ops Collection Variables My PT PRI Stagger a Prefix Index 1 N prefix i Count N X prefix n Switching between multiple sequences is possible in the pulse train sequential sce nario List of sequences Displays a list of sequences To add a sequence select the Data Source icon and select Insert After To reorder
72. S SMW SCENario GENerator R amp S SMW SCENario GENerator PATH 1 SCENario OUTPut REPository ENABle 1 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk MODE AUTO SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO OVERsampling 8 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO BORDer 1000000 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk MODE MAN SCENario OUTPut CLOCk USER 1e 07 SCENario OUTPut DURation MODE SEQuence SCENario OUTPut DURation TIME 0 10 SCENario OUTPut FORMat WV SCENario OUTPut THReshold 100 SCENario STARt SCENario STATe RUN SYSTem PROGress 14 SYSTem PROGress 100 SCENario CACHe VOLatile VALid 1 SCENario CACHe VOLatile CLEar SCENario STOP Scenario Commands Example Creating sequence collection scenario SCPI SCENario CREate My PT Collection SCENario TYPE CSEQuence SCENario CSEQuence ADD SCENario CSEQuence SELect 1 SCENario CSEQuence ALIas PT SCENario CSEQuence My S2 S1 F1_S1 F2 SCENario CSEQuence ADD SCENario CSEQuence SELect 2 SCENario CSEQuence ALIas F Hops SCENario CSEQuence My PT F Hops SCENario CSEQuence CURRent 1 SCENario STARt Example Creating a simple emitter scenario SCPI SCENario CREate SimpleEmitterScenario SCENario TYPE EMITter EMITter CATalog My EmitterGuidance TestEmitter SCENario EMITter My EmitterGuidance SCENario EMITter MODE 2 SCENario EMITter MODE BEAM 1 SCENario EMITter DIRection PHI 10 SCENario EMITter DIRection THETa 5 SCENario OUTPut TARGet FILE SCENario OUTPut
73. SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM RANGe 2 m displayed is the time span of 0 s to 2 ms Usage Setting only Manual operation See Zoom in out on page 242 Waveform Viewer Commands WAVeform VIEW ZOOM RANGe lt Range gt SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM RANGe Range Sets the displayed waveform part as a range around the selected center point set with the command SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt Setting parameters lt Range gt float expressed as a time span units can be omitted or as number of samples Example see SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt Usage Setting only Manual operation See Zoom in out on page 242 23 Querying Error Messages and Trouble shooting The R amp S Pulse Sequencer monitors the functions performed and automatically detects errors and irregularities The software logs status and error messages warnings SCPI commands send to the software or additional information in a log file Some of the messages are also entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system The Message Log dialog lists information about all messages in a history list If the software detects an error the Message Log dialog pops up automatically and dis plays the error message The log information may helps you determine the cause for an error or an unexpected program behavior To access the Message Log dialog gt Perform one of the following a In the tool bar select the Log icon b In the m
74. VARIable VALUE 2 2 tine ian nne dada cnica N A SD re DIR incida 329 PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALUGC ccccscccecesceccseseeceseeeceaceeceeseeesseeeceegeeeseeseseanes 329 SOENarip PDWIENBBIB etna c t etae adas 329 SCENano PDW PATH 329 He PV AU MH es tics dd ii at adas 330 SCENario PDW PLUGIENAME ic A nen a cepa demas 330 SBENano PDWITEMPIAIe outra 330 Plugin and Reporting Commands PLUGin LOAD Load Loads the selected DLL file see also chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 Setting parameters Load string file path incl file name and extension Example see example Laoding plugins in the repository on page 326 Usage Setting only PLUGin MODule AUTHor PLUGin MODule COMMent PLUGin MODule VERSion PLUGin MODule TYPE Queries information on the loaded file The query returns information as specified in the description of the corresponding func tion in chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 The following is are the possible values for the type query Return values lt Type gt MOP REPort IPM MOP Plugin for MOP IPM Plugin for IPM REPort Plugin for reports created during the waveform generation Example see example Laoding plugins in the repository on page 326 Usage Query only PLUGin MODule DATA Queries whether the plugin requires data from a data source Return values lt D
75. YT Heg E LJ pitt s LI 15 t O 1 LJ cA Fig 7 12 Modulation Graph Understanding the displayed information MOP Type Polyphase code Type P4 Length M 10 1 Time domain view 2 Spectrum 3 1 Q constellation diagram 4 Modulation gt I Q Time domain display Modulation Graph Use the Modulation parameter to change the displayed modulation characteristics Available are Q diagram Displays the and Q signal versus time Both signals use a linear scale in the range between 1 0 and 1 0 How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings Phase diagram Displays the phase angle of the signal versus time The diagram shows the phase changes in the range m and T resi PI I f j j f f 12 5 us div Pi 2 A phase change is equivalent to a rotation at a constant radius in the constellation diagram Frequency diagram Displays the instantaneous signal frequency versus time 12 5 us div Remote command PULSe PREView MOP on page 350 I Q constellation diagram Modulation Graph Displays the probability at which l Q points occur The color scale is logarithmic the most probable points are indicated with bright yellow color Spectrum Modulation Graph Displays the FFT spectrum The FFT uses a logarithmic scale between 0 dB and 100 dB 7 3 How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings Pulses are the fundamental building el
76. and Manage Repository 2 If necessary for example by loading and exchanging repositories with another user change the directory the repository files are searched in 3 From the listed files select a repository file e g New 1 How to Manage the Project Data E Load de Export Copy to J ES Discard ame eei Modified Wein author sey giis Y C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse SequenceriRepositories ES K300 and K301 Tests 19 Now 2014 15 1Dec 201411 1 1 0 NO RESTRICTION Add Path ES My TestScenarios 12 Feb 201415 21Jan 2015 08 4 1 0 R amp S LEVEL 2 A E My TestScenarios 25 Jun 2014 15 2 21Jan 2015 10 1 2 2 Rohde amp Schwarz LEVEL 2 Add Install Path ES Repos 1 9 Dec 2014 16 1 21Jan 2015 08 3 1 NO RESTRICTION ar eena Ned g Jan 2015 12 5 9 Jan 2015 12 5 10 NO RESTRICTION Add Home Path PRS i b K300 Remove Path K301 Es SP R amp SDemo 11Jul 2014 12 4 23Jul201415 2 10 Rohde amp Schwarz NO RESTRICTION D Avionics b Plugins D Radar 4 Confirm with Load The repository is opened and displayed in the project tree To create and export a repository archive We assume that you have created a repository and configured at least one scenario 1 Inthe menu bar select File gt Load and Manage Repository 2 If necessary change the directory repository archive files are stored in 3 From the listed files sel
77. and Work with Waveforms See e To create a waveform scenario on page 195 e To create a new sequence of waveforms on page 195 e For how to build an waveform library see To create a new waveform on page 196 To import a custom waveform on page 197 Toretrieve more information on an imported waveform on page 199 e To simulate an interferer on page 200 The Waveform Sequence scenario is a dedicated scenario type for processing wave froms To create a waveform scenario P Create a new scenario with Scenario Type gt Waveform Sequence See also To create a single pulse train scenario on page 64 Name My Waveforms Waveform Sequence test waveform scenario Default report is written to C My Report Files Data output is in waveform format 7 set I Start with Reset O BUSY Current Task Frequency 3 MHz Path A Sa Ide Ref Level O dBm Continuous we M Stop Waveform Generation Usdin ss e Q e Volatile o RS_SMW 2259 4 E vi Repository To create a new sequence of waveforms 1 Perform one of the following a In the Waveform Scenario dialog select Waveform Sequence New b Select Repository Tree Sequence New and select Sequence Type Wavefroms How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms Sequence Description SAAHA Cro TT neno e Pawon Ree eM arer Area Aime pme PR Deb
78. and select Rename 4 Enter a name for the emitter mode e g Guidance 5 Select Ant Pattern and select an antenna pattern from the antenna library or cre ate a new one See To create an antenna pattern on page 171 6 Select Scan Type and select an antenna scan from the antenna library or create a new one See To create an antenna scan on page 174 7 To configure the Beam a Select Activate gt On b Select Sequence and select a sequence from the library 8 Ifrequired enable a second beam My EmitterGuidance Comment guidance amp survaillance eme 90 dBW Frequency 6 GHz Emitter Modes ENSE eerte P 5 Type Gaussian Model Frequency N A SP IT 3 o Type Raster Scan la LJ 9 man s Freq Offset E kHz Beam Offsets Elevation Azimuth How to Create and Configure Emitters For description of the provided settings see chapter 11 1 Emitter Settings on page 180 To configure an emitter in a scenario with static receiver 1 Create a new Single Emitter scenario or open an existing one e g SimpleEmit terScenario See for example To create a single pulse train scenario on page 64 wwe SimpleEmitterScenario Single Emitter puer Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform Format Start with Reset Current Emitter e BUSY A l m el imd Ere Mum 0m emen m im Cae mmm oe La
79. between them sequentially The following example creates a complex scenario with two pulse train sequences to explain the principle 1 Select Repository Tree gt Scenario gt New 2 In the Scenario Wizard select Scenario Type Sequences Collection EN Scenario Type The Sequence Collection scenario is used to create multiple sequences which can be selected in arbitrary order Pulse parameters include the pulse envelope modulation on pulse MOP carrier frequency and level The sequence editor defines the order in which the pulses are generated and also adds control Sequences Collection y elements such as loops and fillers Inter pulse modulation profiles can be applied to vary pulse parameters Waveform Generator E Create Cancel 3 Confirm with Create 4 Enter a scenario name and add a description 5 In the block diagram select Sequences gt Edit The Multiple Sequences dialog opens 6 Use the standard New function and insert the first sequence in the list You can select from the list of available sequences or create a new one See also To create a simple sequence on page 117 7 In the list of sequences select a Sequence and use the standard New Append Remove and Up Down functions to add new items to the list and reor der them How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements Collection of Sequences Properties of Selected Sequence ba ae Les Lal
80. creto ivre Eat AAA aa 318 IBS TEPIBUSI ies 318 IPNESTEPANGCRE MONE iecit et i ote A oe eoe patena Ei 318 PMESTEPISTA biocidas 319 IPM STEP STEPS 0 a 319 IPM RS Tep MINIMUM ci aaraa epa iada aiaia 319 IPMERS TED MAXIMUM a oca dnce tre A a dene eet a a ed 319 PMIRSTEpP STEP MINiMU A nrnna N ARARA 319 IPM RS Te pS TEP IMAXIMUM oo a Az 319 IPMS Tep PERO it A A eb E Madre A b Tete ceu ved 319 IPMEWAVetOMTYAPE suicida 320 IPMEWAVefotTeBASE cocina daa oda dada 320 IPM AINAN orm COUN m 320 IPWAVeto OFF SEE ioci etae roe inei AE AAEN teet deno ndi 320 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands IPM WAVeformMmi PHASE moniaita n da AAA desea dd Cog dex dica 321 IPMEWAVefotm PEROU reran et e eoa eR idad 321 PREVIA CIO EPISC a a a RR GR US 321 SEQuence TEM AP WA rucni a a aan Aa 321 SEOuence I IPM aan 321 SEQuence I TEMIPM MODE nionean aaa A a 322 SEQuence ITEM IPM RANDom RESft oocccccccccccccnnnnoccnncconnncnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnannnnninos 322 SEQuence TTEMIFM RES Tallo iio 322 SEQuence dTEMJIPMISQOURGG oaan aiaa a aia 322 IPM TYPE lt Type gt Sets the shape of the profile Parameters lt Type gt STEPs WAVeform RLISt LIST SHAPe RANDom EQUation PLUGin RSTep Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Profile on page 131 IPM UNIT Unit Sets the units of the profile Parameters Unit NONE SEConds HERTz DB DEGRees PERCent
81. displayed information Pulse Width 500 us Restrict MOP to Pulse Width 1 2 3 Three discrete states with different attenuation values and a total duration of 400 us 4 The last 100 us are not attenuated 7 2 6 2 Pulse Settings If the total time of the defined states is shorter than the duration of the pulse area on that the MOP should be applied an attenuation of O dB is assumed for the remaining time Remote command ULSe MOP AMSTep ADD on page 279 ULSe MOP AMSTep COUNt on page 280 ULSe MOP AMSTep SELect on page 280 LSe MOP AMSTep INSert on page 281 ULSe MOP AMSTep LEVel on page 338 ULSe MOP AMSTep DURation on page 338 ULSe MOP AMSTep CLEar on page 282 ULSe MOP AMSTep DELete on page 281 T FU U u u Do oo C 33 FM and FSK Modulation The frequency modulation FM and frequency shift keying FSK modulation are mod ulation schemes that vary the frequency of the signal comet O Frequency Modulation frequency Deviation FM frequency deviation Remote command PULSe MOP FM FREQuency on page 345 PULSe MOP FM DEViation on page 344 FSK Enables a FSK High symbols set the frequency to Deviation and low symbols to Deviation Pulse Settings cant eee Deviation Symbol Rate Deviation FSK frequency deviation Symbol Rate Symbol rate of the modulating signal Data Source Coding Filter See e chapter 15 1 Data Sources Settings
82. duration of a filler by defining the time duration to be filled in total duration or by defining of a certain moment of time time synchroni zation The filler duration can be a fixed value or as an equation where the equation uses the loop variables if the filler is configured within a loop See also To create and add a CW segment on page 122 chapter 8 2 5 Fillers Settings on page 114 Sequence Settings 8 2 Sequence Settings To access these settings gt In the repository tree select Sequence gt New leds Eidinn or ow 0 ise Jo e e rre se or Jese o qq Fig 8 3 Sequence Settings 1 Sequence name comment and type 2 Sequence description table where each row represents on item 3 Interactive graphical representation if the current sequence displayed if Block Diagram gt On For step by step descriptions see chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements on page 117 The following settings are available e Sequence Description Settings sess 109 e Pulse Repetition Settings essssssssssssssssseee enne 112 JN oec tee e aene oen tel tene eoe ce adig 113 e Overlay Settings iic ie dad 114 e Fillers Settings arsch ete reatu Do date EP UR FEES BD uu de hag add cu eee 114 e Lists with Multiple Sequences ssssssssesseeenenmennnnn enne 116 8 2 1 Sequence Setti
83. ei in 281 EMITter MODE BEAM DEL ete seesesseeeeeeeen nennen eene nennen nnn enses nane n sre aser 281 EMI MODE DELAS dre A et AA AA AA cues 281 IPNEEISTAITEMIDELGtG iio iia 281 PULS ENVelope DATA ITEM DELele etri a Rene xd Ree Rey Rin R e REM RUE 281 PULSE MOP AMS bepiDEEetg cn a dni erred ee ea xt pee oe daa n epa ados 281 PULSe MOP FMSTep DELete 2 21 eicere a E RHET XR ER RA pd 281 Commands with Similar Syntax PULSeNMOPIPOHITBIDELele tir eerte A A dt 281 PULSEeMOP PLISUDELelte 2 iiiter rit reote ee reu erac e RR eae eR A ED e ROMRERRRAR 281 SGENario LOGCalized DEL elte 5 rnirar cea its zeecteesdaatecarecsaeatendsaiaecouvssioaveadesedie cass 281 SCENario CSEQWUence DELE coc a e ades zi n ede er did 281 SGENaro GEMIEDELet6 ida 281 SEQuencedTEMJIPM DEbLete iiri eoe easy anciana ida 281 SEQu rnicelTEM DELelt 1 iecore pedit eaaet e fae Dore tea idad 281 INS Tr meDECBESE usa 281 ANTenna MODeEUSER GLEEar entier Rete asa 281 DSRC OED v E EQ 281 EMITter MODE ANT nna CLEAR cocida aaa 281 EMITIECMOBDEBEAM GDESL siii see re eie ecu bod ERR 281 EMIMterMODECLESN RT 282 EMiTter MODE SCAN CLES e 282 Ma VESIES A E lemen 282 PUELS ENVelope DATA CLE aP aia 282 PUESe MOP AMS Tep CLEF aiena yanii ihe a Ai iaaa aiaei 282 PULSE MOP FMS Iep CL
84. groups listed in the following sections Commands for handling of repository elements Repository elements are referenced by their unique name The name may contain empty spaces Almost In each of the command groups there is a SELect com mand Use this command to select one repository element to which the subsequent commands apply A typical remote control sequence would look like in the example Handling repository elements on page 271 Example Handling repository elements The following is a simple example that explains the principle of repository elements handling by using the common commands Commands with Similar Syntax activate the remote control mode SCPI create new empty repository REPository CREate Repository for tests REPository CATalog Repository for tests REPository SAVE create two new scenarios SCENario CREate New 1 SCENario CREate New 2 SCENario SELect New 1 SCENario COMMent simple test scenario rename the scenario SCENario NAME New remove it from the repository SCENario CATalog New New 2 SCENario REMove New 2 SCENario CATalog New create new pulse PULSe CREate New PULSe CATalog New although the pulse and the scenario use the same name they are different and unique elements for the repository Commands for handling of list and table items Several repository elements are described in table form or as lists like f
85. gt current Account and select Set Password The Change Password dialog opens Please enter the new password A b Enter a password and confirm with Ok On a new start up or when this repository is loaded the R amp S Pulse Sequencer requires the correct password to load the repository amp Open Repository Qu The repository you are trying to open is password protected Please enter the correct password or cancel the load process 4 To allow a read only access a Select Users gt and select Set Role The Change Account Type dialog opens Please select the new account type b Select a new role with read only access e g Guest and confirm with Ok How to Manage the Project Data To remove the password protection on a repository In the project tree double click on the repository name 2 Inthe Repository dialog select Users 3 Select Users gt current Account and select Set Password 4 Inthe Change Password dialog do not enter any password 5 Confirm with OK The Users dialog confirm that the repository is not protected with password To change the default user used to access repositories 1 In the toolbar select Configure Settings User Account 2 Select Custom On and enter an existing user name Overview of the Available Scenarios and Their Complexity 6 Select
86. imported see Supported waveform types on page 192 Remote command WAVeform TYPE on page 384 Signal Content Defines the waveform signal type so that so that during the resampling process differ ent filters are applied on pulsed signals and on the waveforms containing digital stand ard signals Waveforms containing digital standard signals are usually intended for continuous playback The end of the waveform fits the beginning to avoid spectral regrowth caused by the wrap around For pulsed signals however wrap around and overshoot effects due to steep filters are undesired Thus low order filters are applied to prevent from overshoots Remote command WAVeform SIGCont on page 385 Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth of the generated AWGN waveform Remote command WAVeform NOISe BWIDth on page 384 Import Accesses a file import wizard Remote command WAVeform WAVeform LOAD on page 385 Clear Removes the imported waveform or file with I Q data Remote command WAVeform WAVeform CLEar on page 385 WAVeform IQ CLEar on page 385 View Level Access dialogs which visualize the waveform and displays more useful information on it see chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 e chapter 18 2 Waveform Reference Level Settings on page 243 Remote command WAVeform LEVel REFerence on page 385 How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms 12 2 How to Create a Waveform Scenario
87. in first expression MB 19 40 39 Unexpected token amp gt T 2 t T 2 1 t T 2 T 2 found at position 2 E 19 07 35 Configuring math expression 1e6 1 2 t T h 19 07 35 CCoreMOP setModDuration 19 07 35 Modulation Total time 0 0001 5 h 19 07 35 Modulation Min sample rate 2e 06 Hz y 19 07 35 Modulation Preview samples 8192 1 Info message 2 Error message 3 Debug message To remove write lock that results from a previously crashed session A red lock symbol amp on the data base icon in the Repository Tree indicates that a session was terminated improperly A locked repository can be unlocked only from the same PC and by the same user with write permission that had opened the repository before 1 In the project tree double click on the repository name 2 In the Repository dialog select Storage gt Remove Write Lock The repository is unlocked you can change or store repository settings See also chapter 5 1 Repository Settings on page 42 A Annex Supported File Types and File Formats A 1 Supported File Types and File Formats This section summarizes the file types supported by the application and provides infor mation about the default file locations List of supported file types and file extensions Table 1 1 Supported file types Extension Description ant_pat Efe SV ffd X CSV Antenna pattern See chapter A 1 2 Antenna Pattern File Form
88. io 284 ANTenna MODel ARRay DISTEDUIO caca A Aa 285 ANTenna MOBeLARRAy INX ien rne rhet a 285 ANTenna MODSEARRAYy NZ t eter trn a 285 ANTenna MOBeLARRAy PEBDestal ct rtr eee do cin re dV e ee Ee NL dud 285 ANTenna MODeLARRay XDISItatiCa i cre ntt trt bett t iR rper aid 285 ANTe nna MODeEARRay ZDIStarice 2 nacti eer aeaa eadair eaaa 285 ANTenna MODeEBACKlobe AT Tenuation rone na a a aE 286 ANT nna MODeEBACKIObDG ENABIG 2 oer tr rre a ia 285 ANTenna MODel BACKlObDe TYPE eis eased nee E a es ANTenna MODel BANDwidth ANTenna MODel COSecant HPBW ANT nna MODeECOSecant T lucia iot Dd Ce A Ei heats ANTenna MODel COSMO aia ANT nmna MODeSEGUS Tom HPBNWEXY cc ori coner arri te cereo re trace deren EE ee ESTEE RE E ER ada 286 ANT nna MODSECUSTom HPBW YZ 2e ctrca ot aea Ope tute aed i 286 ANTenna MODeECUSTom SLRolloff 5 2 caccia ias 287 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSCale ANTenna MODel CUSTOMS Tira A weenie i hana ANTena MODelFREQUENOY ai A Oe ANTenna MODel GAU SSI HPB insanis aaee E ANTenna MODeEHORNILX icc iier etae be edge A td ee ANTenna MODOeEEORN LEZ tios dsd ANT nna MODeEPARabolic DIAMeIGr cerra co ic coe iren io Eno Eo Ene ce ead 288 ANTenna MODel ROTation X 289 ANTenna MODeEROTatlonmZ csi oe teet ia 289 ANT nnmna MODeESINGZEIPBW c aree A da ba 288 ANT nmna MODGETYPE 2 5 cito Hnc A abeto 289 ANTenna MODel USER GLEEGSLE iniret oit es
89. le Jm e For information on the provided settings see e chapter 8 2 Sequence Settings on page 108 e chapter 7 2 2 Pulse Timing Settings on page 70 Trying Out the Software To assign the sequence to the scenario 1 In the repository tree select Scenario gt Scenario 1 The Scenario dialog opens and displays a block diagram of the signal flow 2 In the block diagram select Sequence and select the icon to open the context menu 3 Select Select Sequence 1 The status indicator in the Sequence block is green The status indicators in the Volatile block is still red 3 6 2 Generating an ARB Waveform File The initial situation is the configuration described in To assign the sequence to the scenario on page 27 To store the created ARB file on the file system of your PC 1 In the repository tree select Scenario Scenario 1 The Scenario dialog opens and displays a block diagram of the signal flow 2 In the block diagram select Local ARB File and select the icon to open the con text menu 3 In the context menu select Set Path 4 In the Windows Explorer navigate to the directory in that the file should be stored The block diagram shows the settings Name Scenario 1 Single Sequence Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform Format Created 9 Dec 2014 15 21 26 Comment _ Start with Reset BUSY Current Task
90. le la My SLPT M ca E ES ops Collection Variables My PT PRI Stagger lt prefix gt _i lt prefix gt _n For description of the provided settings see chapter 8 2 6 Lists with Multiple Sequences on page 116 8 Inthe Scenario dialog select the name of the sequence that is currently used e g PT Nome My PT Collection Sequences Collection Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format For description of the provided scenario settings see chapter 6 2 Scenario Set tings on page 54 9 Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modula tion Effects Per default pulses calculated from the settings of one table row in the sequence description table are identical To simulate a change of parameters from one pulse to one another like PRI stagger for example you can define and enable inter pulse mod ulation IPM effects and assign them to the sequence elements Throughout this description the IPM effects are commonly named parameter varia tions Pulse repetition patterns The pulse repetition patterns are commonly used to e Avoid range ambiguities caused by echoes of far away objects which fall into the detection period of the next pulse Protect the radar signal against jamming e Deal with clutter ground sea weather e Make the radar more difficult to be identified by frequency hopping IPM effects In the following two common IPM technics the Jitte
91. level of the complete signal or a particular signal part See figure 18 2 4 Setthe cursor on a particular point A single cursor is indicated by a blue line It sets the center point for all zoom oper ations 5 Use the mouse wheel or the Zoom In Out functions to display a part of the wave form or the whole waveform 6 To measure the reference signal of a particular signal part a e Setthe cursor on the start point of the waveform interval to be measured or e Select Cursor 1 Time and enter the beginning of the evaluation period b Select Cursor 1 gt Set c Perform the same for the second cursor The two cursors are indicated by brackets They indicate and define the beginning and end point for the reference level evaluation period 7 Select Measure Ref Evaluated are all samples in the defined period The calculated reference signal level is displayed Waveform Generation Settings 19 Playing the Generated Waveform Files Complex pulse signals created with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer can be played by e R amp S SMW e R amp S SMBV Depending on the installed option and the capabilities of the vector signal generator files and waveforms are processed as an ARB file or in real time Waveform types waveform handling and impact of the instrument s hardware on the calculated waveform The R amp S Pulse Sequencer determines the kind of waveform the signal generator instrument is able to handle Supported are
92. location 262 Template 262 Template custom 263 Template edit 262 Uf M 262 Repository AUTOR cr a ia cd 42 Comment roere 202 0 cte rrietisu ie der at aes 43 Complexity level 42 COPY MO vainas 47 Crash 389 Deluca a O te es 47 Discard 47 Export 47 MOE 47 Lai E AA ee retreat eee reer ane 47 LOCION A A O 44 Name rossoi rinne rat a eie a tects ee ee 42 Obtain write permission ssssseeeeeess 44 Open in Explorer tret re eene 44 Path add 47 Remove write lock 44 Search 47 Security level 42 DS iia a a 43 Reset values REMOTE uri A a 271 Restart Connected generator ei tret tts 56 Retrace Time Spiral SCAM speiir e i repete re ER 169 al ads 75 DeETINIION detonerte nti ipei a cas 75 FRISC fiie a es tele I ovs aba 66 71 Round Time Spiral SCAM ii a Ara 169 Rounds A 169 S SE P 58 Scan rate Circular SCAM aci dec th etd edu e Roa 165 Raster Sca M esinin nanira 167 Sector SCal iriiria nikinin aeaa ia Ea 166 Scenario BUSY M Comment A Create ARB file cit iaa 59 FREQUENCY siii e 56 Name 4 55 Play mode 2 94 Ref level 2n 56 Reset connected generator 2056 RUM a rird bf DOMINIOS aria ida 54 ip 57 Stop A E E TE 54
93. manual e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S Pulse Sequencer consists of the following parts e Online Help system included in the software e User Manual e Release Notes e Web Help e Application Notes Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the software It offers quick context sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming The online help contains help on operating the R amp S Pulse Sequencer and all available options User Manual The user manual describes the R amp S Pulse Sequencer and all its options It provides basic information on operating the R amp S Pulse Sequencer in general In this manual all functions are described in detail together with examples on some specific tasks Fur thermore it provides a complete description of the remote control commands with pro gramming examples The user manual is available for download from the R amp S website on the product page of the signal generator For example at http www rohde schwarz com product SMW200A html Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the software new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The correspond ing software version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are available for download from the R amp S website on the signal generator s product page F
94. of Waveform Files and Files with I Q Data See e To access the Waveform Data View dialog on page 245 e To adjust the display and retrieve more information on the waveform on page 245 To measure the reference signal level of a waveform on page 246 To access the Waveform Data View dialog Perform one of the following 1 Select Repository Tree Waveform and a Select an imported waveform e g WV Matlab See To import a custom waveform on page 197 b Select Waveform View 2 Select Repository Tree Scenario and select for example SimplePulseTrain We assume that the scenario is configured a signal generator is selected and a sequence is assigned to this scenario See e chapter 6 3 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario on page 63 e chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements on page 117 a In the Scenario dialog select Start The software calculates the waveform Green LEDs indicate that the process ing is completed b Select Volatile View See figure 18 1 The Waveform Data View displays the and Q data the spectrum and the con stellation diagram of the signal as well as evaluated information from the wave form file such as the clock rate number of samples or the duration To adjust the display and retrieve more information on the waveform 1 Select the signal characteristic to be visualized e g View Mode gt I Q 2 Setthe curs
95. off time For description of the related settings see chapter 7 2 3 Pulse Level Settings on page 73 chapter 7 2 4 Pulse Envelope Settings on page 76 Pulse Settings To access these settings Select Repository Tree Pulse New Pulses are characterized by the following settings Pulse Name and Comment ici icti nad than ani tbe rao ERR S 69 Pulse THING SONS iii 70 Pulse Level SettilijS 2 one rb reir cate detta tote tada 73 Pulse Envelope Settings ssssssssssssssssseseneee nennen 76 Modulation om Pulse MOP Setlilgs tico ertet io eren t etit 79 Built In Modulation Types and their Settings sssssssssseseees 82 Envelope and Modulation Graphs 96 Pulse Settings 7 2 1 Pulse Name and Comment My TestPulse Comment test pulse for visualizing the impact of different pulse parameters Pulse IaImg uste it 69 COMME ceso ii a add db 69 Pulse Name Displays the name of the current pulse Remote command PULSe CREate on page 277 PULSe NAME on page 278 PULSe CATalog on page 276 PULSe SELect on page 277 PULSe REMove on page 278 Comment General pulse information like comment etc Remote command PULSe COMMent on page 278 Pulse Settings 7 2 2 Pulse Timing Settings To access these settings gt Select Pulse gt Timing 100 us div Time period between beginning of rising edge and
96. on figure 9 2 within a pulse train group each successive pulse uses a different PRI the pulse train group is slewing e Frequency Hopping Frequency hopping and frequency agility is a further anti jamming method If fre quency hopping is used the radar signal switches rapidly and periodically between different carrier frequencies There are no predefined parameter variations in the software but IPM profiles can be assigned to the parameter listed in table 9 1 Table 9 1 Pulse parameters to that IPM profiles can be assigned Parameter group Pulse Parameter Level Overshoot Offset dB A Level Attenuation Top dB Attenuation gt Top Power Attenuation Base dB Attenuation gt Base Power Droop Ripple Ripple gt Level Ripple Frequency Hz Modulation AM Modulation Depth AM Frequency Hz FM Deviation Hz FM Frequency Hz Chirp Deviation Hz Parameter group Timing Pulse Parameter Rise Time s Pulse gt Time gt Rising Edge Pulse Width s Pulse gt Time gt Width Fall Time s Pulse gt Time gt Falling Edge Delay s PRI s PRF Hz Pulse repetition frequency calculated from the selected PRI Phase Offset A Freq Source profiles Offset Hz Parameter variations are described as the combination of a source profile and the tar get element pulse or sequence the vari
97. optional Presets the IPM pattern For example if an IPM list pattern is used this function sets the start index to first list entry int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS calculateNextlpmValue double dTime unsigned int64 iCount double pdValue mandatory Requests the next IPM value Setting parameters dTime Time stamp of the next IPM value Return values iCount 64 bit value 1 Q sample of the next IPM value Range 0 to 29 1 pdValue Value of the next IPM Common Coding Algorithms A 4 Common Coding Algorithms In the notation used below a denotes the n input symbol and b denotes the corre spondingly coded output symbol Individual bits in the symbols from the LSB least sig nificant bit to the MSB most significant bit are denoted by apn ain etc The same applies to the output symbols Common coding types are listed in table 1 10 Table 1 10 Common coding algorithms Coding Coding algorithm Applicable for K bit symbol None b a k 1 8 Differential b a b_ modulo 2 k 1 7 Differential Gray Gray coding with additional differential coding k 1 7 The following example illustrates how one of common coding schemes in combination with a modulation method influence the signal Example Differential coding for QPSK modulation with K 2 bit symbol Decimal display the value range for modulation symbols is a 0 1 2 3 According to table 1 10 and for k 2 the recursive
98. per row A negative level offset simulates a pulse attenuation For example a Level 3 dB means that the pulses of the current row are processed with power level that is the half of the power Level dependent parameter values are defined relative to this value See also To define and apply a loop on page 119 Remote command SEQuence ITEM LEVel OFFSet on page 376 Phase Sets a phase offset at the beginning of the row Phase dependent parameter values are defined relative to this value For example a Phase 30 deg shifts the phase in the very first pulse of the current row enabled modulation would further change the phase The phase offset is not com pensated at the row end Remote command SEQuence ITEM PHASe OFFSet on page 378 PRI Sets the Pulse Repetition Interval PRI i e the pulse period see figure 7 1 Use the PRI parameter to define pulses with constant total pulse cycle duration and enabled timing variations like jitter for example Remote command SEQuence ITEM PRI on page 379 Delay Enables a start delay 8 2 2 Sequence Settings A delay within an overlay shifts the start time of the overlay elements relative to each other Time dependent parameter values are defined relative to this value See also To define and apply a loop on page 119 Remote command SEQuence ITEM PDELay on page 378 Pulse Repetition Settings Per default a table row in the sequence descriptio
99. power would be 20 dB at the RF output Remote command SCENario OUTPut LEVel on page 370 Start with Reset Sends an initial reset command RST to the connected instrument to set this instru ment to a definite state Remote command SCENario OUTPut RESet ENABle on page 371 Scenario Settings Path If the connected instrument is a two path instrument selects the signal path that will process the generated signal Remote command SCENario GENerator PATH on page 362 Playback mode Defines the way the generated sequence is processed played back once Single Shot or looped Continuous Remote command SCENario OUTPut RUNMode on page 371 Start Stop Busy Standard control function If the prerequisites are fulfilled the Start button is active Select Start to start signal calculation The software informs you about the estimated file size A red Busy indication and a detailed progress information indicate that the calculation is in progress The waveform is transferred to and processed by the connected instrument Signal routing and RF settings are configured as defined with e Set RF level and frequency on target instrument Frequency and Ref Level e Start with Reset Path on page 57 and Playback mode on page 57 Remote command SCENario STARt on page 361 SCENario STOP on page 361 SYSTem PROGress on page 383 SCENario STATe on page 361 Waveform Generation In the general
100. pulse start NO Time period between end of pulse and end of falling edge 62 5 us Fig 7 2 Pulse Timing understanding the displayed information la Standard Profile gt Voltage 10 50 90 1b Pulse Envelope Units gt Voltage 2 Show Timing gt On indicates the pulse timing parameters on the envelope graph 3a Rising Edge 100 us i e the time it takes the voltage to rise from 10 to 90 of the top level 3b Falling Edge 100 us i e the time it takes the voltage to fall from 90 to 10 of the top level 4 Width 500 us i e the duration the voltage is above 50 of the top level 5a 5b Beginning of the rising and falling edge 6a Time period between beginning of the rising edge and pulse start 62 5 us i e the time it takes the voltage to rise from 096 to 5096 of the top level 6b Time period between end of pulse and the end of falling edge 7 62 5 us i e the time it takes the voltage to fall from 5096 to 096 of the top level Use the following parameters to define the pulse in the time domain Custom Enveloep6 cancer ord em dee atento p dum tectis 70 Standard TIVA ATOM a iia aN 71 Rising Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope sees 71 Time period between beginning of rising edge and pulse start Time period between end of pulse and end of falling edge sessssssssseeseeeeee nnns 72 Custom Envelope Applie
101. renes 155 Antenna scan COMME our aiii 165 Na uva ie ii 165 MP ii da 165 Antenna scans settings ssiri 164 ARB file Greate canta noria 59 Load sie AUTOMATION eos UCET 266 Available connected generators sssss 220 Avoiding data truncation Iising falling titrie 2 rrr ns 72 B Back lobe m M 154 BASS POWER 73 Beam AZIMUTH OFSET coin ica ais 182 Elevation OffSet 2r nter ias 182 Frequericy offset ison crece iaa 182 Black I C Blank segment E DDURAUOM coa ctm MO rara aia Boresight ut A Displacemlent ciar ia 157 C Cannot change repository Obtain write permission ssis 44 Cannot store repository Remove write lock sese 44 Carrier frequency 35 90 Change user 43 Circular scan 165 Conical SC morros 168 Create Frequency hoping JIE oniinn eero 143 d Ptr 143 Jitter PRI 143 A C 43 CW A A 110 CW segmiell 6 eerte e 115 Duration 4 115 MI P 115 D Data Source COMMEN arroces ando 228 Frequency e cn EE 228 PIGVIOW ossium eur seme isum Dr Ud et 230 Data source guard bits Avoiding data truncation seeseessess 72 Data source Settigsu coin irte retro re Re nar 228 Data truncation PAGO QUANG DS ratio 72 A O
102. scan period Normalized Power Level at Receiver Time is Relative to Start Time A Both Emitter Only Receiver Only de 0 20 40 fo 60 80 100 13 1 4 Related Settings This dialog displays e alive plot of the normalized signal power level at the receiver e a3D view of the receiver and emitter antennas with their patterns and scans Use the following setting to adjust the display Sos Su HO aiii dado caida 206 Misualizatlli 2 combo eet beetle ees eee inae bee pedi bleed a gene bb eed oa cos eger ee dud 206 Both Emitter only Receiver only 3 i ale 206 Scan Simulation Sets the time span visualized on the live plot as a start time and simulation period The Period i e the total duration the antenna scan simulation determines the max value on the x axis The visualization is relative to the selected Start Time Use the Pause icon to stop the visualization Visualization Defines the way the scan is represented Scan Line The scan is visualized by a line the antenna pattern is disregarded Pattern The visualization corresponds to the current selected antenna pas tern Show Line of Sight Displays the line of sight LOS between the emitter and the receiver HPBW The antenna is represented by its HPBW See also To visualize the signal on a 3D scan on page 213 Minimum displayed level Defines the minimum displayed side lobes level Simulation
103. schwarz com appnotes Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the software several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the menu bar is described Many elements that can be accessed form menus can also be accessed by clicking an icon or using the context menu Alternative procedures are only described if they deviate from the standard operating procedures Conventions Used in the Documentation The term select may refer to any of the described methods 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to i
104. sequence x starts a hexadecimal input for the remainder of the line Anew line turns hexadecimal input and comments off Ones and zeroes are evaluated as single bits Strings can be enclosed in quotation marks e PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence The PRBS generators deliver pseudo random binary sequences of differing length and duration They are known as maximum length sequences and are generated with the aid of ring shift registers with feedback points determined by the polyno mial The pseudo random sequence from a PRBS generator is uniquely defined by the register number and the feedback see table 15 1 Example By way of example the diagram below shows a 9 bit generator with feedback to registers 4 and O output The generated serial data is converted internally e g 2 Bit Symbol in case of QPSK S HEMEMEHEIMEMEHEH Sara data Fig 15 2 A 9 bit PRBS generator Table 15 1 Overview of PRBS generators PRBS generator Length in bits Feedback to T bit 2 1 127 Registers 1 0 9 bit 29 1 511 Registers 4 0 11 bit 211 1 2047 Registers 2 0 15 bit 215 1 32767 Registers 1 0 16 bit 216 1 65535 Registers 5 3 2 0 20 bit 220 1 1048575 Registers 3 0 21 bit 2 1 2097151 Registers 2 0 23 bit 223 1 8388607 Registers 5 0 Data Sources Settings 15 1 Data Sources Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Data Sourc
105. sequences items in the list use the Up Down functions Use the standard Append Remove Last or Delete All functions to add or remove a sequence The provided settings are self explanatory Remote command SCENario CSEQuence ADD on page 279 SCENario CSEQuence SELect on page 280 SCENario CSEQuence CURRent on page 363 SCENario CSEQuence CLEar on page 282 SCENario CSEQuence DELete on page 281 Name Enters a name Remote command SCENario CSEQuence ALIas on page 363 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements Sequence Select a sequence from the list of available sequences Remote command SCENario CSEQuence on page 368 Collection Variables You can define collection variables and use them e g in the formula editors in the reports etc Prefix Indicates the sequence to that the variable belongs If empty no vari ables are used Index 1 N prefix i indicates the current number and is a value in the range 1 N Count N prefix n is the number of variables Remote command SCENario CSEQuence VARiable on page 368 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Ele ments See e To create a simple sequence on page 117 e To create and add a CW segment on page 122 To define and enable pulse repetition on page 118 To define and enable overlaying segments on page 122 e To include a sub sequence in an existing overlay on page 124 To define and apply a l
106. set to the required PRI items are processed once ox D 5 Fig 9 12 Example of a simple staggered PRI IPM profile 1 PRI 600 us 2 PRI 750 us 3 PRI 910 us How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters 4 In the IPM dialog select 2D gt Time Series to visualize the configured IPM pro file in the time domain Created is a simple profile with three values only 5 Select Histogram to retrieve statistical information on the IPM profile Duration ims Histogram Bins 30 Relative Frequency Density 9 5 0 000755 0 00091 In practice an staggered PRI profile will follow more complex structure and com prise of a larger number of pulses see for example figure 9 4 To assign the staggered PRI profile to the PRI parameter of a pulse 1 Open the pulse sequence the created profile should be applied on e g My_PT_PRI Stagger See also To create a simple sequence on page 117 2 Inthe Sequence dialog select a pulse item and select IPM gt Static The Configure Inter Pulse Modulation dialog opens Per default there are no predefined parameter variations 3 To assign the created IPM profile How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters a Select Add Custom New empty profile IPM NONE is created b Select Source Profile gt My_PRI_Stagger c On the right of Assign to parameter open the
107. to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans 171 Emulating Emite Suecia 179 E e 180 3D Emitter Preview Settings iieieeeecee rennen trennen inicr inni innen 184 Lists with Multiple Emitters eurer een rrt enne anatarana enun 185 How to Create and Configure Emitters eene 186 Working with Waveforms and Generating Interfering Signals 192 Waveform Settings 2 tenente eiui aane asas inei pasa terii Eua 193 How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms 195 AR RC 202 2D Map Selttlligs c ciatis exeun ex rbd ce papers at 202 Recelver Seltlligs naaa 204 3D Scan Pair VIEW Seting secre oinn ON 205 Lists with multiple emitters and interferers ssssssssssR 206 User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 5 R amp S Pulse Sequencer Contents TE 13 2 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 15 15 1 15 2 16 17 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 19 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 19 4 1 19 4 2 20 20 1 20 2 21 21 1 22 22 1 22 2 22 3 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver 209 Creating Generator Profiles and Configuring the Instruments 216 Instrument Configuration Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeennnennn ener 217 Generator Profile Settings eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeen
108. to the same LAN To access the required settings 1 In the Menu bar select Configure gt Settings gt Remote Control General User Account Graphics Remote Ctrl File transfer to signal generator via SCPI interface TX Block Size 2 MB A Use FTP data transfer for large files User Name instrument The default user name and password A For R amp S signal generators is instrument Password instrument Ok Cancel 2 Ifrequired change the size of the transport blocks transmitted via SCPI interface 3 To make use of the FTP data transfer a In the signal generator enable the FTP interface You find the required settings in the Setup gt Security dialog For more information see the signal generator s embedded help or refer to its user manual see chapter A 6 References on page 412 b In the R amp S Pulse Sequencer enable a FTP data transfer to speed up the data upload to the connected signal generator The FTP transmission requires User Name and Password The default User Name and Password is instrument Note The R amp S Pulse Sequencer will attempt to connect to any connected signal generator with the same credentials i e User Name and Password Depending on the file size the software will use either the SCPI interface or the FTP data transfer Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator 19 4 Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator Th
109. use the save icon in the toolbar 2 In the explorer enter a file name e g MyWorkspace pswk and confirm with OK Per default the pswk file is stored in the application data directory To load a workspace 1 In the menu bar select File Open Workspace 3 7 2 Customizing the Software Existing default and user defined workspaces are listed 2 Selecta workspace The workspace opens All dialogs and repositories associated with the workspace are displayed To close a workspace You can close a workspace if you do not need it no longer or you need to switch to a different one gt Inthe menu bar select File gt Clear Workspace The workspace is closed Closing the workspace unloads all repositories and closes all dialogs You can open a workspace again see To load a workspace on page 35 Changing Colors and Default Configuration You can change the default application settings for example change the display col ors or change default settings of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer To customize the display colors 1 In the menu bar select Configure gt Colors NO 2 mum ym 4 K a 1 Cares mt a a ID Q FF ree mw B g ET LI ne m ae 1 Color scheme 2 Assigns colors to the different display elements 2 Select a predefined color scheme and if required adjust the display colors individu ally 3 Adjust the display colors of the individual elements e g select Traces gt Magni
110. 0 Conventions Used in the Documentation esee eene 11 Typographical Conventions ierit eee eei ee itte eae v ada e aate Lcd 11 Conventions for Procedure Descripti0MS oooonconcnnccnncncncnncnccnconoononnnnnnnnncnonnnnnnr rca ncnnnno 11 Notes on Screenshots danser Ai 12 Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer suus 13 Accessing the Pulse Sequencer eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneen nnne nnne nnn tennis 14 Sn Starte Pc 15 Required OptiONS ococccoccooncoccccnenonennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn aman anne nn nnn nene nnn nn nan nn tnnt n nnne sn nnne 15 Installing the Softwaro inrer REENA ETR ARAKERE ARAARA NAERAA 16 Starting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time ss 18 Understanding the Displayed Information eene 19 Means of Users Interaction eeeeeseseeeeeeneeeenennnnn nnne nennen nnn nnns 22 Trying Out the Softwaro ieeiieciesieeetesesi secte crisis ANKEREN EEAS na 25 Completing the Scenario that was Automatically Created upon Start Up 26 Generating an ARB Waveform Fil8 ooononnccccnnnnnccccnnnoccnccccnnoncnn conan nc n rc nnnn emen 27 Verifying the Generated Signal in the Waveform View ssm 28 Launching the Built In Wizard iiio teret id 29 Using the Wizard to Create a Co
111. 0 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 40 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 30 100 100 20 100 100 10 100 100 0 00 100 10 100 100 20 100 100 30 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 40 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 80 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 90 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 data antenna pattern Formula Syntax Pattern Visualization Minimum Level Fig 1 3 3D view of the imported antenna pattern with back lobes A 2 Formula Syn
112. 0 illustrates the probability at which values would occur related to the standard deviation if no limit was set Fig 9 10 Normal distribution IPM Profiles Settings U Distribution The U distribution is characterized by a function with lower limit and upper limit that are calculated from selected Center and Range values Remote command IPM RANDom DISTribution on page 315 IPM RANDom UNIForm MINimum on page 316 IPM RANDom UNIForm MAXimum on page 316 IPM RANDom UNIForm STEP on page 317 IPM RANDom NORMal MEAN on page 315 IPM RANDom NORMa1 STD on page 316 IPM RANDom NORMal LIMit on page 315 IPM RANDom U CENTer on page 316 IPM RANDom U RANGe on page 316 Plugin Custom IPM profiles are used in the same way as the internal IPM profiles PRI Stagger Comment Plugin creates values between 2 5 and 2 5 Unit of Affected Parameter s v Profile Plugin 2j Pun No We Wee See chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Plugin Name Selects and loads a user defined IPM profile from a file The IPM profile must exist in the Plugin library of the repository IPM Profiles Settings Plugin Variables Sets the values of the variables defined and used in the plugin Use the standard context menu functions to e reset the plugin variables e access the load Plugin settings see chapter 16 Defining Com
113. 1 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements To create and add a CW segment 1 Open an existing sequence 2 In the Sequence Description table add a new item select Type gt Filler and select more 3 In the Configure Filler dialog 8 select Signal CW b select Mode Duration C select Time gt Fixed 5 ms A Duration Time Synchronization WZ Fixed 5ms Equation Variables amp 9 To define and enable overlaying segments This examples explains how to overlay three items see figure 8 2 We assume that the a sequence with four items has been created Da lt gt Pulse wn mg asl static 1234 ore ode os tms os Ds lt gt Pulse ME w llle ls sll static 1234 ote od os 25 ms llos 1 In the Sequence Description table of this sequence a select the first item b select the New Select icon and select Insert Item Before Selection C forthe appended first item select Type Overlay and select more 2 In the Configure Overlay dialog select Overlay gt Duration 5 ms How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements 1 Overlay Duration sets the length of the resulting sum item The block diagram confirms that an overlay is created There are still no segments added to it Sequence Description l8 las ke k Lt Puer RepCre
114. 1 P2 P3 P4 Manual operation See Poly Phase on page 90 PULSe MOP QPSK SRATe lt Srate gt Sets the symbol rate Parameters lt Srate gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 93 PULSe MOP QPSK TYPE lt Type gt Selects the modulation type Parameters lt Type gt NORMal OQPSk DQPSk Manual operation See QPSK Type on page 93 PULSe MOP TYPE Type Select the modulation scheme Parameters Type AM ASK AMSTep FM FSK FMSTep CHIRp NLCHirp PCHirp BARKer POLYphase PLISt BPSK QPSK NOISe PLUGin Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation see chapter 7 2 6 Built In Modulation Types and their Settings on page 82 PULSe OVERshoot lt Overshoot gt Sets the overshoot level value Parameters lt Overshoot gt float Range O to 50 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Overshoot on page 74 PULSe OVERshoot DECay lt Decay gt Sets the number of peaks Pulse Commands Parameters lt Decay gt float Range 1 to 100 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Overshoot on page 74 PULSe RIPPle lt Ripple gt Sets the ripple level Parameters lt Ripple gt float Range O to 50 Example see example Creating a lin
115. 1024 MS Memory 1024 MS 1024 MS Scenario Types Scenario Types Single Sequence ARB ARB Single Sequence ARB Sequences Collection ARB Sequences Collection ARB Waveform Sequence Waveform Sequence Single Emitter Single Emitter ARB Emitters Collection Emitters Collection Localized Emitters Localized Emitters ARB Fig 14 1 Instrument Configuration understanding the displayed information 1a 1b status messages Mapped gt Error indicates insufficient instrument s configuration for the cur rent profile 2 lists the retrieved instrument configuration 3 lists the profile capabilities see chapter 14 3 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments on page 221 The following settings are available REPOS ICON ME 218 Delete Delete Allis ooo nia da cta 218 Scan USB OPIB ILAN Alicia daa 218 RN 218 Renos AN 218 Listof connected instruments cire dida ene it i er cada ad s 218 Device Capabilities Profile Capabilities seessseeeeen 219 Instrument Configuration Settings Repository Indicates the current repository Delete Delete All Standard edit functions to handle the list of instruments Remote command INSTrument DELete on page 281 INSTrument CLEar on page 281 Scan USB GPIB LAN Any Scans the selected local interface for connected instruments To limit the scan time select the instrument s type e g SMW200A The GPIB scan is limited to the f
116. 12250 kHz F2 11140 kHz F3 9050 kHz with pseudo random pattern Unit of Affected parameter Frequency hz jw Profile Random List M 2j w O Avoid Reuse Fig 9 7 IPM with shape Profile Random List 1 Burst Length 3 2 List Items 3 3a 3b 3c Subsequent patterns with values that are selected on a pseudo random manner from the defined 3 list items Burst Length Defines how often an increment is repeated IPM Profiles Settings Avoid Reuse Ensures that each value is used only once per burst List Accesses the standard list editor to define a list in table form see Edit List on page 140 e To create a list manually use the standard icons and functions in the context menu see Standard function in the context menus on page 24 Enter the list values manually e To importa list in ASCII format select Import Data from file icon navigate to a suitable file select it and import it e To create a list automatically and fill it in with values select the Populate List icon Enter the Start and Increment values and the number of list elements Count and select Populate Remote command IPM RLISt BURSt on page 317 IPM RLISt REUSe on page 317 Random Steps The IPM shape is a sequence of desecrate values and step size that are randomly selected from a user defined value ranges T ISASUN all IPM Preview Test IPM
117. 220 Profile type i220 Pulse sequencer 221 ISE Settings ui oe iie eot into rh char Unde tonta bx 220 Streamis seid oe co bel ecdesiae reu ICA 221 Guest user ACCESS MOS sioe esie aii 43 H Hardware CPU sc a a aaa 16 Requirements cocaina encore dicit t PEDIR DRO 16 Virtual Memory s iet id hei koe cate reti eel 16 Helical SCANT ita 169 l 1 Q constellation diagram VQdiagiaM ean eA tia Identification Remote acustica deta 270 Installation iia 14 Installing Hardware suit tac 16 SO cR tias 16 Uninstalling old Version nettes 16 Instrument Joe E aa 218 Delete IP address 218 Refresh list 218 Scan interfaces rccte ee rte 218 SCA TO ico irent dias 218 Signal pathi reet eere eph P eres 57 Instruments settings 216 Inter pulse modulation IPM eeeese 111 Inverse pulse ler ri E 73 IPM Create c 143 IPM profile Assign to pulse parameter or variable 143 Comment Name we 131 Repetition we 143 SGlECE ER 143 Transformation alcantara lia 143 E Niro 131 Unit MIW cat redatto re Cea tupra Ce v tee de tpe tec A IPM shape EQUAION ET 136 Interpolated shape odere 135 List MOJE inertem eri aas 133 A O heiter a un t 139 Pseudo randomlist isine rr tente 136 FRANGOM ge A M 138 iier m 132 Ei
118. 6 EMITter SELect on page 277 EMITter CATalog on page 276 EMITter REMove on page 278 Comment Enter a short description Remote command EMITter COMMent on page 278 EIRP Sets the equivalent isotopically radiated power EIRP of the emitter This parameter is used if the emitter is configured in a Scenario Type gt Localized Emitter Example For emitter with e Transmit power 1 MW e Antenna Gain 20 dBi Set EIRP 120 dBW Remote command EMITter EIRP on page 304 Frequency Sets the emitter s operating frequency If the selected antenna is calculated for a particular frequency set the emitter s Fre quency to a value within the suggested frequency range see Emitter Modes on page 181 Remote command EMITter FREQuency on page 305 Emitter Modes Defines one or more modes the emitter works in Use the standard functions in the context menu to create or rename modes Each emitter mode is defined by the combination of an antenna pattern antenna scan and a beam with assigned pulse sequence Use the 3D view to visualize the selected antenna scan and pattern see e 2D and 3D diagrams on page 158 e 3D Scan View on page 165 Emitter Settings Antenna Pattern Selects an existing antenna pattern or accesses a dialog for creating a new one See To create an antenna pattern on page 171 The antenna pattern and type are displayed A warning symbol indicates that the selected e
119. 8e 000 6 108290737961166e 001 1 376043194687679e 000 2 877212877279787e 000 3 299035718428788e 000 1 127582356352358e 000 1 978979886470077e 000 Antenna patterns in csv file format Several of the popular antenna design software tools export antenna patterns also as csv files The csv files are text files that describe the antenna pattern in a tabular structure These files contain a header section and data part with up to six columns The values can be separated by commas semicolons or withe spaces When a file is selected the Import Wizard tries to automatically determine the used column separator decimal delimiter and to data content of the columns You can change the values afterwards Example Antenna Magus file in csv format extract FRO 3 0E 9 PIN 0 171146799151083 THETA_SYM_0 0 THETA_SYM_50 0 PHI SYM 0 0 PHI SYM 30 0 INTERP DBI 0 Theta deg Phi deg E Theta Re E Theta Im E Phi Re E Phi Im Far field exported from Antenna Magus 5 3 0 1686 On Friday March 06 2015 at 1 17 55 PM Theta Samples 181 Phi Samples 361 0 000000000000E 000 0 000000000000E 000 4 303687774512E 016 0 000000000000E 000 7 148424634567E 000 1 436268526306E 000 1 000000000000E 000 0 000000000000E 000 4 425352450194E 016 0 000000000000E 000 7 363209895868E 000 1 542584165100E 000 Supported File Types and File Formats Example ANSYS HFSS files in csv format extract The following are two ex
120. A ad 351 RE POSON AU WOO osa a 352 REPbositorg COMP a Aia M pn NS AREE ias 352 REPOSO DA TE dM A A A A A aula 352 REPositoyiFILenaMe coin ai 352 REPOSO PATH dba 353 REPOSO SAVE oi A A di da ia 353 REPositoyiSECU Veinte paa 353 REPOSO VERSION ia 353 REPManager CATalog evoca ii dada 353 REPManager LOAD coincida iia dt tia 354 REPManager DISGald inert da c ese uaa A ibi 354 E A re rit cere erepto a Fen tesa EEE 355 REPManager PATHIADOD coincidan fender 355 REPManager PATH DEL ete iiio ai ia dai ODE ia 356 REPManager PATA UE TE nnr di 356 REPository ACCess Queries information on the access rights of the current user Return values lt Access gt lt permission gt lt login gt lt pass gt lt Uname gt lt permission gt Permission of the curret user e g RW read write lt login gt lt pass gt Login Pass No Password not required Login Pass Yes Password required lt Uname gt user name of the current user Repository Commands Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Manual operation See Users Management on page 43 REPository AUTHor lt Author gt Enters information on the author Parameters lt Author gt string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 REPository COMPlexity lt Complexity gt Sets the complexity level Parameters lt Complexity gt PTR
121. AT 72 Default values Iis MIS atasca 271 Delete All pulse sequencer wavefroms form VSG 58 ld e 143 JI cC 143 Delete waveforms Automatically ssie ER E 58 Delta FREQUENCY 0 242 E cee odes psec asp EN e EDI 242 into 242 rie ceso 242 Direction LOBE switching SCali eorr metto t rem 170 Display options 2D MAD m Dres M Definition M tup Dummy data pp 110 Dwell time LODE SWITCHING SCAM ssrin nnie 170 E Emitter st e ras 182 Comment 181 EIRP epee 181 Frequency 181 Name 181 Operating mode 181 Envelope fUNCIONS ceci cene errore rana 76 Error queue query 382 383 sodium 59 F A emet Eee 66 71 Fast data upload FTP e teet ae eno itae 252 Filter parameter goo 410 Flyback time Raster SCAM cas tio tarta rbd 167 Sector scan sus Frequ ricy diagratm ertt eret nnn 97 FTP Upload to the signal generator 252 G Generator profile P ip 221 Baseband bandwidth 221 Capabilities 221 Comment 5220 gung lc dci 221 Generator typ8 isis aida 220 Installed options 221 Memory extension 4 221 Name
122. CENario CSEQuence SELect Select SCENario CEMit SELect Select DSRC ITEM SELect Select IPM LIST ITEM SELect Select SEQuence ITEM IPM SELect Select SEQuence ITEM SELect Select Selects the item to which the subsequent commands apply Parameters Select float Item number within the range 1 COUNt Range 1 to 4096 Example see example Handling items on page 272 Commands with Similar Syntax Manual operation See Select No on page 110 PULSe MOP AMSTep INSert lt Insert gt PULSe MOP FMSTep INSert Insert PULSe MOP PCHirp INSert Insert PULSe MOP PLISt INSert Insert Inserts a new item before the selected one Setting parameters Insert float RST 0 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Custom Phase on page 90 INSTrument DELete Delete ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter DELete DSRC ITEM DELete Delete EMITter MODE BEAM DELete Delete EMITter MODE DELete Delete IPM LIST ITEM DELete Delete PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM DELete Delete PULSe MOP AMSTep DELete Delete PULSe MOP FMSTep DELete Delete PULSe MOP PCHirp DELete Delete PULSe MOP PLISt DELete Delete SCENario LOCalized DELete Delete SCENario CSEQuence DELete Delete SCENario CEMit DELete Delete SEQuence ITEM IPM DELete Delete SEQuence ITEM DELete Delete Deletes the particular item Setting parameters Delete float RST 0 Example see example Handling items on p
123. COMPlexity on page 352 REPository SECurity on page 353 Comment Enter a short description of the repository Remote command REPository COMMent on page 278 Users Management The R amp S Pulse Sequencer uses its own user rights management that is independent from the user administration of the operating system but follows the same principles the current user cannot delete its own account users with lower access rights cannot delete accounts with higher rights Repository Settings Creator No Enabled Fs Admin No Enabled Set Role A nobody Guest No Disabled 909000 ES Enable Disable Delete User LEVEL 2 1 Current user 2 Standard functions for user management 3 Login name or custom user name 4 Assigned user role the creator role is assigned automatically and cannot be changed see also table 5 1 5 Identifies if the repository is password protected or not 6 Current user state Repositories support a simultaneous access from several users Per default all users are granted with the same administrator rights The user rights can be restricted by assigning of a different user role other than the creator role At least one user with administrator rights must always exist To protect a repository form accidental changes the repository data can be password protected Passwords are then required to access a repository and any loss of the password would render the repository inaccessible
124. Clock Duration Clock Rate Y Automatic Duration 4 One Single Sequence _ Fixed Duration O One Antenna Scan Provides clock related settings Clock Rate Retrieves the clock rate automatically form the generated waveform or sets a user defined value The clock rate influences the size of the generated waveform To reduce the size of long waveforms change the clock rate Waveform Generation Settings Duration Defines the waveform content The generated signal may e contain one single sequence short sequences result in waveform files with small size e last a specified duration short sequences are repeated longer once are truncated e contain the signal describing one emitter antenna turn short sequences are repeated longer once are truncated Remote command SCENario OUTPut CLOCk MODE on page 368 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO BORDer on page 369 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO OVERsampling on page 369 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk USER on page 369 O O SCENario OUTPut DURation MODE on page 369 SCENario OUTPut DURation TIME on page 370 Features Output Clock Duration Features Reporting Markers Globally Enable Markers 09 Set mi at scenario start For Fixed duration Only available in waveform mode be 1j Threshold Pulses at levels below this threshold are omitted Sets Markers Enables that the configured markers are considered in the gener
125. Contents tab is displayed The Help toolbar provides buttons with standard navigation functions The Help window contains several tabs e View shows the selected help topic e Contents contains a table of help contents e Index contains index entries to search for help topics The index is sorted alphabetically You can browse the list or search for entries in the list e Bookmarks contains custom bookmarks e Search provides text search To close the Help window P Select the Close icon in the upper right corner of the help window 4 About the R amp S Pulse Sequencer The R amp S Pulse Sequencer generates complex pulsed signal for use with a signal gen erator A typical setup includes a PC with installed software and a connected vector signal generator See figure 4 1 for an example of a simplified test setup 1a DUT A S RF Signal Marker Fig 4 1 Simplified test setup From the configured settings like selected emitter and receiver configuration the R amp S Pulse Sequencer verifies the capabilities of the connected instrument The R amp S Pulse Sequencer checks whether the instruments capabilities fulfill the require ments of the generated waveform In particular this affects the bandwidth the carrier frequency and the waveform length of the calculated signal The R amp S Pulse Sequencer then calculates a waveform and transfers it to the instrument See also chapter 19 Playing the
126. Core provides samples used with a digital I Q modula tion such as QPSK or QAM Typically the output signal is created with oversampling factors of two or larger thus multiple l Q samples are generated for each symbol The folding operation however only requires one single sample per symbol as a dirac impulse This function indicates which sample is used as the dirac impulse The and Q channel can be controlled separately This is required if the constellation points rotate around the origin In this case the and Q waveform are time delayed by a fraction of the symbol duration If the function is not implemented all generated samples are assumed to be dirac pul ses This is equal to a sample and hold operation Return values pcGenl pcGenQ The return value for pcGenI and pcGeno is true 1 if the last sample shall be used as the dirac pulse In all other cases the main application replaces the sample value by zero Plugin Programming API int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setGlobalVariable const char szType 256 const char szValue 256 optional Returns a global variable value to the plug in Global variables can be defined in the IPM profiles or in the sequences Parameters szType string Variable names always begin with a dollar sign The following variables are predefined RFC RF center frequency LEV RF level in dBm REP Repetition count ITEM Item number in a sequence szValu
127. D view of the receiver and currently configured emitters and interferes together with their main character istics See figure 13 4 3 Enable and configure emitters interferers and the receiver see e Toenable static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 e To add an existing waveform as an interferer to the scenario on page 210 e To configure the receiver settings on page 213 4 Use the context menu to a display the 3D antenna patterns and scans b to add remove an emitter or an interferer 5 Use the mouse wheel to change the scale of the 2D diagram i e to change the distance between the receiver and the emitters interferers For description of the provided settings see chapter 13 1 Related Settings on page 202 To add an existing waveform as an interferer to the scenario 1 Toaddaninterferer a select an waveform in the repository tree and drag amp drop it into the 2D diagram or b use the context menu in the 2D diagram How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver The Emitter Interferer Properties dialog opens and lists all emitter and interferes configured in the scenario Properties of selected Emitter Interferer vo reme m Alias Name 11 Properties Location l Pointing A Configuration EIRP 100 00 dBm Frequency 2 500 GHz Antenna My_Planaranter M Scan My Circular M ES 2 Configure the interferers s properties e g
128. Double click Opens the selected element for editing Clone Creates a copy of the selected element e Drag amp Drop A drag amp drop operation creates a copy of the selected element together with all referenced elements assigns an element to a 2D view Mouse wheel Turning the mouse wheel zooms in and out 3 6 Trying Out the Software This chapter introduces the most important functions and often used settings of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer step by step The complete description of all functions and their usage is provided in the corresponding main chapters of this user manual Prerequisite The software is running and started up as described in chapter 3 3 Starting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time on page 18 For the first signal generation tasks you use the on demand Wizard to generate an ARB signal so you do not need any external instruments More complex signal gener ation tasks however may require an external signal generator equipped with the options listed in chapter 3 1 Required Options on page 15 The software is manually operated Try out the following Trying Out the Software e Completing the Scenario that was Automatically Created upon Start Up 26 e Generating an ARB Waveform File esses 27 e Verifying the Generated Signal in the Waveform VieW sccccsssssceeesssstreeeeeees 28 e Launching the Built in Wizard cin ere re etl ee tn 29 e Us
129. EA ii a a AA Rt A a ua 282 PULS amp MOP PCH CLE sinnn oa 282 PULSE MOP PLISECLES oi da dias 282 SCENAtIOEMITIeEGDESE 3 orit Ai dida 282 SCENa o CSEQuENCa COLES iii iii rto si andoaad lt td PR RE AREE PNE Ys 282 SEQuerncedTEM GLEGE Liao aa Naia aaa i a a aa AAA ERNA EEA 282 ANTenna CATalog DSRC CATalog EMITter CATalog GENerator CATalog IPM CATalog PLUGin CATalog PULSe CATalog SCAN CATalog SCENario CATalog SEQuence CATalog WAVeform CATalog REPository CATalog Queries the available repository elements in the database Return values Catalog string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 zu ANTenna CREate Create DSRC CREate Create EMITter CREate Create Commands with Similar Syntax GENerator CREate lt Create gt IPM CREate Create PLUGin CREate Create PULSe CREate Create SCAN CREate Create SCENario CREate Create SEQuence CREate Create WAVeform CREate Create REPository CREate Create Creates a repository element with the selected name Setting parameters Create string Must be unique for the particular type of repository elements May contain empty spaces Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting only Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 ANTenna
130. EMITter SCENario LOCalized ALIas E4 SCENario LOCalized EMITter My EmitterGuidance SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE 1 SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE BEAM 2 SCENario LOCalized DIRection TRACk 1 SCENario LOCalized DIRection ELEVation 0 SCENario LOCalized DIRection BEARing 87 8901 SCENario LOCalized LOCation EAST 253 448 Scenario Commands SCENario LOCalized LOCation NORTh 6879 31 SCENario LOCalized DISTance 6883 98 SCENario STARt SCENa nOo TYPE CREER EE 361 GENIO Pda iaa aida 361 SOENario S TAREA aid 361 SCENSMO S TA Te T M 361 SCENaric CACHe VOLatile CLEAr 2 centena tree redet coU rre A REI ID Rc SR RR enn d NERA 362 SCENario CACHE VOLatile VALIQ ea oce arc coenae ret Da nante eoe era ar Da ee eet 362 SOENamo GEINGAION cesar 362 SCENario GENerator PATH i inrer dins 362 SCENA SEQUENS ota ii dada 363 SCENano SEQUENCE CLEAN iio Ada AE 363 SGENSITOGEMIEAEISS aiii a cried idt decide 363 SCENaric CSEQuerice ALIas 2 ro A nen cU emn Rr CR A RR RAP XN IRR OQ Vae 363 ScENarib LOGCalized ALIas tu eae ed edad ot bodas east ada aia 363 SGENaro GEMIEGIIIROnL iiri reos A Eo e Rude 363 SCENario LOCalized CUR Renhl teneri rerom canina nana daa cc xi seus RE Rar Aaa aaa ARR 363 SCENaro CSEQueticet CURRO coat caricia deausteeadaltisieseedsaugnacenecdamdaawess 363 SCENano EMITte ED Recon PE uiii ate A ree tene ave
131. ENABIS miinan ei paaa ad dada re 342 PULSe MOPIEXChude EVO STA Rosi ae de 342 PULSeMOP EXCLude LEVEESTOP conca tancia dable 342 PUESEMOPEXC bide MODE 02 iba 343 PULESC MOP EXGLude TIME ST AIL rra tette A A add Rad 343 PUESS MOP EXCLude TIMES TOP ooo aa 343 PULSeMOPFIL TED ieri urne choeur ARA AAA Rd 343 PULSE MOPFILTEEBWIDIA osa di Ea 343 PUESS MOP FIL Ter LENGU suicida 344 PULSE MOP PIL TSE ROLLO caia AA rune 344 PUES MOP FILTER TYPE diia 344 PULSE MOP FREDEN AOR iaa 344 PULSSMOPFMFREQUSNEY ista 345 PULSEMOP FSK DEVIAHOfi cis a A cad 345 PULSE MOP FSK SRAT 2 rare A da 345 PULSeMOP NLO HIP EQU ociosos 345 PULSE MOP NOISS B WIDE 345 PULSE MOP PCHirp COBRE T pista 346 PUESSMOP POH Tp TERM aida taa 346 PULESe MOP PEISEVALUB cial ida 346 PUES gt MOP POETEENCGA umi a aus 346 PULSEMOP POLY TYPE ire E nete teh o or th ett A 346 PULSS MOF QPSK SRAT O t reine A ic diis dedu 347 PULSCMOP OBSK ITE occitano e eo un uad 347 FUESSMOP MYP E C 347 PULSO VERSO SA TA AAA RR Ei 347 PULSSOVERSho00 DEC Y coin craves AEAT NEEN EY 347 PULSE RIP Re snc ri E a 348 PULSE RIPPle FREQUENCY 5 sc atto d t to e d e d vete v desi eee 348 PUL Set TIME FAL em D 348 Pulse Commands PUESSTIMERISE 000 ii 348 PULSe TIME REF fEL ICe 1 e ettet epar cet ia SATARcEdis 348 PULSS TIME WIDTH oreesa upra deua V A di 349 PULSS TWPEFALDL ia A eres a dax ed Ev e aO vd eai a De 349 PULSTYPE RISE ard a 349
132. Features Reporting Markers Globally Enable Markers O set Mt at scenario start For fixed duration Only available in waveform mode im Threshold Pulses at levels below this threshold are omitted 100 dB See also Waveform Generation on page 57 3 Optionally select Set at scenario start for fixed duration gt On and set Duration 1 ms to enable an additional global signal This marker signal is output as marker 1 If other marker signals e g pulse and sequence markers are defined all markers are summed How to visualize the configured markers 1 Open the Waveform Data Viewer see To access the Waveform Data View dia log on page 245 2 Select Marker gt On The Waveform Data Viewer evaluates the marker information and displays the marker traces M1 to M4 Marker Fig 17 1 Example Waveform View Marker traces M1 All M2 First M3 Last R amp S Pulse Sequencer Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms 18 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms Waveform generated with the software or imported to the repository can be visualized with the built in Waveform Data View function The R amp S Pulse Sequencer reads in all a selected waveform evaluates it and displays the and Q data the spectrum and the constellation diagram of a signal section or of the entire waveform The Waveform Data View is only available if a waveform was created successfully
133. Generated Waveform Files on page 247 Introduction to the Software Concept The following is brief introduction to the software concept and the way it handles files and settings Repository The R amp S Pulse Sequencer organizes the data in repositories 4 LER A repository is a file based database located on the local hard drive or on a network storage drive Repositories are entirely managed by the R amp S Pulse Sequencer They can be pass word protected against unauthorized access Repositories can be exported as archives and shared among multiple users if they are located on a network drive Several user can have read permission to load and use the same repository simultaneously How ever only one user can have a write permission at a time To move or share repositories with other users use the Export Import Repository Archive function Do not directly access the repositories from your windows Explorer For more information see chapter 5 Organizing the Project Data in Repositories on page 42 Scenario The scenario is the top level description of the signals to be generated Y amp My TestScenarios i The type of the scenario determines which kind of signal is calculated and how this sig nal is processed A more complex scenario combines several signals Scenarios may also contain information about the time variation of the signals 9 SimplePulseTrain Starting a scenario creates the I Q waveform sends th
134. Generator Profiles and Instruments Commanods eene 307 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands eeeeeneeeenenn nennen 310 Marker ComMaNA t 322 Plugin and Reporting Commands eene nennen nnns 326 PulSe COMMANA t 331 Repository Command wasicciccccccccscccessceeciccestteececeesseeccceenated cc an eta arnes 350 Scenario COMMANAS ccuiniiiiiocnarriciccrrni eensecce cesa a ERSEN 357 Sequence Commands iere r enint te tha daa aaa 372 Status COMMAN S oicicorirriccccrii rain reina ano ics naa a avo sa aao aevo Ea aa a FERE ra aua Eo aun 381 System Commands uieecieseiiceiieseiee cues sse ii so cd na ka suec ceca aea ge 382 Waveform Commanxds i riucuaiie ine itin uu nasa nion nua sia nmn rr maia naa RE RR PRA NANREN 384 Waveform Viewer Commands eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nennen nnn nnn 385 Querying Error Messages and Troubleshooting 388 rq CT 390 Supported File Types and File Formats cessere 390 File Format of the Reporting Template ssssssssesesee 390 Antenna Pattern File Formiats 1c e a Fea ERRARE 393 Formula e nico enoi Aa oaea ANKEA ccc ceedeseccendencuatedcuneeass 398 Plugin Programming API eese rn rra nenne n
135. Graph confirms that the envelope overshoots the Top Power experiences damped oscillations and amplitude Droop and settles to the final value Fig 7 14 Pulse Level understanding the displayed information 1 Pulse top power corresponds to 1000mW Pulse Envelope Watt i e little or no attenua tion Attenuation Top Power 0 dB 2 Base Power i e high attenuation typically 100 dB 3 Amplitude change from the beginning to the end of the pulse ON time 4 7 Overshoot level in Volt diagram uses Watts 5 Damping constant that influences the time it takes the overshoot to decay 6 Amplitude of the oscillating signal in Volt diagram uses Watts 7 Signal oscillating with the selected frequency Frequency 10 kHz i e the oscillation period is 100 us 8 Pulse amplitude units Y axis units 9a 9b Pulse timing Profile gt Standard 0 100 Rising Edge Falling Edge 100 us Width 9c 500 us see Standard Timing Profile 10 Reference value used by the calculation of the pulse level parameters Ref 0 dB 1 Watt the value is set with the parameter Ref Level How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings To define and apply modulation on the pulses MOP The MOP settings define the intra pulse modulation i e the modulation applied on the pulse rise on and off time The R amp S Pulse Sequencer
136. INSTrument CAPabilities RFA 6e 09 BWA 1 6e 08 MEMA 1e 09 SWA K300 K301 RFB 6e 09 BWB 1 6e 08 MEMB 1e 09 SWB K300 K301 GENerator CAPabilities RFA 2e 10 BWA 1 6e 08 MEMA 1e 09 SWA K300 K301 RFB 6e 09 BWB 1 2e 08 MEMB 6 4e 07 SWB K300 NSTrument STATus 0 NSTrument MAP RS SMW Connected NSTrument STATus 1 NSTrument SELect 1 NSTrument FIRMware 3 1 18 2 3 20 012 88 GENerator TYPE ii nea eni teres A A ae arse 307 GENeraltot OP THON csetera dde asii 308 CENSO LOGK M 308 INSTrament CAPabiliies ac a Doe A pe ament ear ceo tres 308 GENertorCAPAbI es 2 2 2 2 N Pei diia da 308 INS Trumen ADD e INSTrument MAP INSTrument STATus GENerator TYPE Type Sets the instrument s type Generator Profiles and Instruments Commands Parameters lt Type gt SMW SMU SMBV SMJ SGT Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Manual operation See Generator on page 220 GENerator OPTion Queries the installed options Return values lt Option gt string Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Frequency Range on page 220 See Baseband on page 221 See Installed Options on page 221 GENerator LOCK Lock Locks the created generator profile for editing exclusively per remote control As long as the profile is locked
137. ITter ADD EMITter MODE ADD EMITter MODE BEAM ADD PULSe MOP AMSTep ADD PULSe MOP FMSTep ADD PULSe MOP PCHirp ADD PULSe MOP PLISt ADD SCENario LOCalized ADD SCENario CSEQuence ADD SCENario CEMit ADD DSRC ITEM ADD IPM LIST ITEM ADD PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM IPM ADD SEQuence ITEM ADD Appends new item Example see example Handling items on page 272 Usage Event Manual operation See New Insert Append Remove Clear Items on page 109 Commands with Similar Syntax INSTrument COUNt EMITter MODE BEAM COUNt EMITter MODE COUNt PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM COUNt PULSe MOP AMSTep COUNt PULSe MOP FMSTep COUNt PULSe MOP PCHirp COUNt PULSe MOP PLISt COUNt IPM LIST ITEM COUNt SEQuence ITEM IPM COUNt SEQuence ITEM COUNt Querries the number of existing items Return values Count integer RST 0 Example see example Handling items on page 272 Usage Query only Manual operation See Select No on page 110 INSTrument SELect Select ASSignment EMITters SELect Select ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter SELect Select ASSignment GENerator PATH SELect Select ASSignment GENerator SELect Select EMITter MODE BEAM SELect Select EMITter MODE SELect Select PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM SELect Select PULSe MOP AMSTep SELect Select PULSe MOP FMSTep SELect Select PULSe MOP PCHirp SELect Select PULSe MOP PLISt SELect Select SCENario LOCalized SELect Select S
138. Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example IPM RANDom DISTribution NORMal IPM RANDom NORMal MEAN 0 IPM RANDom NORMal STD 1 IPM RANDom NORMal LIMit 3 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom NORMal STD Std Sets the standard deviation parameter of the normal distribution function Parameters Std float Range 1e 09 to 1e 06 Example see IPM RANDom NORMal MEAN on page 315 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom U CENTer Center Sets the center parameter of the U distribution Parameters Center float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom U RANGe Range Sets the range parameter of the U distribution Parameters Range float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom UNIForm MINimum Minimum IPM RANDom UNIForm MAXimum Maximum Sets the range of the uniform distribution function Parameters Maximum float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random on page 138 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands IPM RANDom UNIForm STEP lt Step gt Sets the granularity of the uniform distribution function Parameters lt Step gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RLISt BURSt Burst Define
139. LCHirp EQUation on page 345 Polynomial Chirp Define the chirp as a polynomial with one or more Term Coefficient value pairs Pulse Settings The instantaneous frequency versus time is calculated according to the equation f t s ag a t where e n 1 5 the multiplier s and the coefficients a are values within the range 108 to 106 Remote command ULSe MOP PCHirp ADD on page 279 ULSe MOP PCHirp COUNt on page 280 ULSe MOP PCHirp SELect on page 280 ULSe MOP PCHirp INSert on page 281 LSe MOP PCHirp TERM on page 346 ULSe MOP PCHirp COEFficient on page 346 ULSe MOP PCHirp CLEar on page 282 ULSe MOP PCHirp DELete on page 281 Fg FR of hg hg fg tg s 7 2 6 Phase Modulation Provided are the following phase modulation technics Bal KB eet tr t tier qe etr a rec eit Ege Eta ue aeq d Res o pare ee 89 maU 90 CUBOS A A et e ide ede diee ee ree 90 coc c Un 91 Barker Phase modulation with Barker codes results in signals with low autocorrelation proper ties Pulse Settings Fig 7 11 MOP Type gt Barker understanding the displayed information Barker codes are used for pulse compression and are defined by Barker Code A Barker code is a finite sequence of N values of 1 and 1 R13 for example is the 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 sequence Transition Sets th
140. New 2 Select the Append new item icon 3 Enter a name and add a comment 4 For each item select the data type the data mode and the data length in bits How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP 5 To view the data source content select the Preview icon Data is retrieved cyclically starting from the first list entry see example Data source processing on page 226 To assign the data source to a MOP 1 In the repository tree select Pulse gt PulseName e g My TestPulse gt MOP 2 Select MOP gt Settings and select a MOP that requires a data source e g MOP Type gt FSK 3 Select Data Source gt e g My_TestData 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles Custom modulation schemes and custom envelope shapes are defined by an external plugin Plugins are Microsoft Windows DDL modules that contain the maths that is required for the envelope shaping and the modulation on pulse Some example plugins are provided with the software as binary and source code These examples may serve as a starting point for own applications Once imported the software handles the plugins automatically Each plugin e have to provide a range of functions to identify itself and perform the calculations required for the modulation on pulse see chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 e may register a set of configuration parameters that may be used as variables inside of th
141. O HPBW Disc 11 36 Simulation Period 5 Duration for one scan simulation period The visualization is in slow motion if this value is laraer than the scan period Fig 11 2 3D Emitter Preview Understanding the displayed information 1 Selection of preview time span selected is one antenna turn 2 Interactive 3D view 2a Receiver with an isotropic antenna pattern no antenna scan and at a fixed location 2b Antenna pattern diagram of the emitter antenna pattern without back lobes 2c Circular antenna scan 3 Live plot of the normalized signal power level at the receiver 3a Antenna pattern main and side lobes compare with the pattern on figure 10 4 3b Antenna pattern without back lobes Use the following setting to adjust the display SA CT ED PEDIDOS 184 WISUENIZAUOMN RENTE ROREM 185 Scan Simulation Sets the time span visualized on the live plot as a start time and simulation period 11 3 Lists with Multiple Emitters The Period i e the total duration the antenna scan simulation determines the max value on the x axis The visualization is relative to the selected Start Time Use the Pause icon to stop the visualization Visualization Defines the way the scan is represented Scan Line The scan is visualized by a line the antenna pattern is disregarded Pattern The visualization corresponds to the current selected antenna pat tern HPBW The antenna is repr
142. OGalized ADD oia aia EE FEES 279 SCENAM LOCZ ALIAS omiso ETT 363 SGENario LOCalized CURRO eerte eve tp aa a AAA AAA 363 SCENAario LOCalized DELete 281 SGENanio LOGalized DIRE ction BEARING mostraran it 364 SCENario LOCalized DIRection BUEV ation tisccite cases tette reta eene tap 364 SCENanrio _LOGalized DIRection TRACK tania ai Pr 366 SGENario LOCAlZCd DISTANCE cocos 365 SGENario EOCalized EMIITIGE ooo tpe tete i ctp nte Porter ecc a deca ro SGENario EOCalized EMITTer MODE uo ic er ri e tI er Entre eec Ee cocci b c e EY IUe ied SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE BEAM SGCENario EOCalized lOCatlon zAL Titude eoe tdo ette rr pace c P tpe et Dover ago SCENanio LOGalized LOGation EAST tea rire aaa SCEN LOCalized LOGAN NORT e SCENAario LOCalized RECelIVerALTIUAS ccoo e A A A SGCENAario EOCalized REGeiver ANTONLHa sitas ar SGENario LOGalized RECelver DIRection BEARIDQ enano als cea SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection ELEVation SCENano LOGalized REGeiVver GAIN 2 urea co rea SGENario EOGalized REGCGIVer SCAN nan Puteo perpe Paus eu xo oa EEIE SGENario EOCalized SEl egt oerte titer A etr ges Urea SCENario LOCalized TYPE gt GENatio LOCAlZCd WAV dioit m SGCENario LOCalized WAVeftorm ANT enria cron rct NE nagd SGENAario EOCalized WAVeltorm EIRP iiec ia co ADR Gane wien SGENario LOGalized WAVeltorm
143. ORTN 606 cseserecesecnceevedectaseasceadapeasudt app R pus do nubes nee aped 366 SGENario LOCalized RECelVer AL Tit ltde oia a pindini E REA 366 SCENario LOCalized LOCation AL Titude a a esc inse ees do daa sess d Dane 366 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ANTenna eessssessssssseeese nennen nene sns nh snnt ssa sn sns a aas 366 SCENario LOGCalized WAVeform AN Tenga cei tradi Done toe seo ndn dan anidan cR dd Reb aaa 366 SGENaribiEOCalized RECelVerSQAN rr Ie diea i iode ee te past eese A eeu ER vd 367 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform SCAN oooocccccoccncnonnnnccnonononccnnnnnnnnconnnnnononnnnnnnnncnannnnnnonnnn 367 Scenario Commands ScENario LOCalized TYBE oi Ai ii earned 367 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver GAlN oooccccconcnccconnnocccnnnoncnnnconnnnnocnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnins 367 SGENarioEOCalizedWAMTOTIf A 255 2 cd usa aa orabat rana e teda a sn ronca iia iba adan 367 SCENario LOGCalizedAWAVeform EIRP iuter aa ane ded 367 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform FREQuengcy eeeeseeeeee eese enne nennen nnns nnn nans 368 SCENario SEQUE 1 oni tese doi 368 SCENario CSEQuence VARliable occccoocccccoonnccccnnnnonnnncononnnononnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 368 SCENatio OUTPUECLOCKMOD E oia 368 SGENario OUTPut CEOCK AUTO OVERsamplitig 5 2 inana a ette nenatis 369 SCENAario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO BORD T ococcccccconcononcononcononcanonianencarenconenconennon
144. OSecant T1 lt T1 gt ANTenna MODel COSecant T2 lt T2 gt Sets the Theta parameters Parameters lt T2 gt float Range 1 to 90 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Cosecant Squared Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW XY lt Xy gt ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW YZ lt Yz gt Sets the required HPBW of the custom antenna Parameters lt Yz gt float Range 1 to 90 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Custom Antenna Settings on page 161 Antenna Pattern Commands ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSTart Slstart Sets the power level of the first pairs of side lobes Parameters lt SIstart gt float Range 1 to 90 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Custom Antenna Settings on page 161 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLRolloff lt Slrolloff gt Sets the factor used to calculate the HPBW of the side lobes Parameters lt Slrolloff gt float Range 1 to 90 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Custom Antenna Settings on page 161 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSCale lt SIscale gt Sets the step size to calculate the power level of the side lobes Parameters lt SIscale gt float Range 0 01 to 10 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manu
145. P CHIRp DEViation Deviation Sets the modulation deviation Parameters Deviation float Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Linear Chirp on page 87 PULSe MOP CHIRp TYPE lt Type gt Selects the modulation type Parameters lt Type gt UP DOWN SINE TRlangular Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Pulse Commands Manual operation See Linear Chirp on page 87 PULSe MOP DATA CODing Coding Selects the data coding scheme Parameters Coding NONE DIFFerential GRAY DGRay Example see Using a plugin as a modulaiton source Manual operation See Coding on page 95 PULSe MOP DATA DSRC lt Dsrc gt Selects the data source for the modulation see DSRC CREate Parameters lt Dsrc gt string Example see Using a plugin as a modulaiton source Manual operation See Data Source on page 95 PULSe MOP ENABle lt Enable gt Defines whether a MOP is applied Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP on page 80 PULSe MOP EXCLude ENABle lt Enable gt Activates the restriction of the modulation Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example example Creating an unmodulated pulse on page 331 Manual operation See Restrict modulation to a ce
146. P COUNESTEP iooeeve reete eset re re a EVE Evae Eg Se HERE NERO Ne Fed e Reps 380 SEQuenceITEM REP TYPE cuina ai e cer PR EO EO rcu 381 SEQuence ITEM REP VARiable ooooooccncccincocococoncccooccooncnnnnconcccnn ccoo ccoo cnn Eran Eaa a nnn enne n nnne nre ins 381 SEQue nceATEM SELEGGL rmm ra A ia 280 SEQuUenco iz nice H 381 izle es lzi Bao 379 SEQuence NAME Eva secede tees ect c ed egg cio treno ghe tot dde gp alee ca qudd 278 SEQUENCE REMOVE me TR Ee 279 SEQUENCE d 277 SEQUENCO TMPE seri AA M 375 STATUS OPERAtion GON DION i c aiai ar E EE ERE ENa 382 SYSTem ERRor ALL 382 oSYolem iERBOCOOUNI cuicos tee ieu i croco teret Gini bea deat ees 383 SY STOm ERRON acne ate asec acces nena E r Orea SED sis sonic loli SEINE Ei T rivas 382 SYS L6m iPROGIESS sm 383 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS generateDirac retro rt entree paa 407 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS GEtAUNOT senene coner acaecidos ERNESTA 402 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getGomlm ht rtp rre rdi A AAA 401 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getError void PS PEUGINSEXPORTS getlNamie usce orient rre reta ir iO SEE NE sane void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS GetType ccrte nn e rere rne nre n rere dn env d rre void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS geltVersion n iret err di ist 401 void PS PEUGINEXPORTS TOSIQIL cr
147. PATH EMITter LIST oorr rara 303 ASSignment EMITters LIST Queries the alias names of the available emitters interfereres Return values List lt Emitter Inter 1 gt lt Emitter Inter 1 2 gt Example see example Performing signal to generator mapping on page 301 Usage Query only Manual operation See Emitters Interferers on page 251 ASSignment GENerator LIST Queries a list of the available generator profiles Return values lt List gt lt GenProfile 1 gt lt GenProfile 2 gt Example see example Performing signal to generator mapping on page 301 Usage Query only Manual operation See Generator Profiles on page 251 ASSignment GENerator CAPabilities Queries the capabilites of the selected generator profile Return values lt Capabilities gt lt RFA gt lt BWA gt lt MEMA gt lt SWA gt lt RFB gt lt BWB gt lt MEMB gt lt SWB gt String that lists the maximum RF and BW available memory size and installed options per path Example see example Performing signal to generator mapping on page 301 Usage Query only Manual operation See Generator Profiles on page 251 ASSignment GENerator PATH LIST Queries the available paths Emitter to Generator Mapping Commands Return values List lt Path 1 gt lt Path 2 gt list of available paths Example see example Performing signal to generator mapp
148. PULSI SEBTTIIOS ia 349 PULSE PREVIeWIMODE rana aaa Ie nat aea ne aan d Yan paa Y dpa ada na aa Ta Oda e paa a Ya Y aa Fav Odds 349 PULSeTPREVIBWIMOP 2 1 1 c echo a ia iba 350 PULSe CUSTom Custom Enables the use of a custom envelope function Parameters Custom ON OFF 1 0 Manual operation See Custom Envelope on page 70 PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM VALue Value Sets the value of the selected item Parameters Value float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Creating pulses with custom envelope on page 333 Manual operation See Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 PULSe ENVelope DATA LOAD Load Loads an envelope description form an ASCII file Parameters Load string file path file name and file extension Example see example Creating pulses with custom envelope on page 333 Manual operation See Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 PULSe ENVelope DATA UNIT Unit Sets the data format Parameters Unit VOLTage WATTs DB Pulse Commands Example see example Creating pulses with custom envelope on page 333 Manual operation See Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 PULSe ENVelope DATA MULTiplier lt Multiplier gt Sets a multiplier factor Parameters lt Multiplier gt float Range 100 to 100 Example see example Creating pulses with custom env
149. Period Sets the time it takes the animation to complete a scan Both Emitter only Receiver only Defines the signal strength of which signal is visualized See also To visualize the signal on a 3D scan on page 213 Lists with multiple emitters and interferers To access this dialog 1 In a Localized Emitters scenario select Emitters gt 2D 2 In the 2D map open the context menu of an Emitter and select Properties The Localized Emitters scenario comprises several emitters and interferers The available elements are described in a list form Related Settings k i Emitter Properties My_lestScenarios gt LocalizedEmitters us Available Emitters Interferers Properties of selected Emitter Interferer Alias Name E3 Properties Location Pointing Configuration Mode Surveillance Beam Beam 2 h Pattern My_PencilBeam Scan My RasterScan My 1 PT You can configure the following Emitter Interfere Properties List of Available Emitters Interferers sssseee nnns 207 Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer esssssssssese 207 So NO O Et 208 Poning DIa IOM nei 208 List of Available Emitters Interferers Displays a list of emitters interferers Use the standard functions in the context menu to add reorder or remove items See also To en
150. Ps lea M 73 Pulse Envelope shaping Custom 4 enero 70 Envelope shaping standard sssssss 11 Fall time show on graph ss Falling edge ui roe sd Falling Penas aaa Level si MOP modulation on pulse sessesss 102 Name Period is Repetition interval sorsien anain nentes 66 Rise time show on graph seseseessees 96 Rising edge 2 Rising Slope iios ria 1 MAP iaa iia 71 Shaping SHOW timilig rain ads WMG iaa do Timing visualizing S Visuali ZING ivi ura lala iio A tee tte teen cei bane enel odes Width show on grapli ea ccena tron oen en rnt 96 Pulse Train SCOMANO decern iiie elu ts Peg HN RR eed x RA EE US 54 R Radius AA cres edic itn 168 Helical SCAM Linn tecta dais 169 Raster SCAN iiie cni c iecore da des b raa xv race eds 167 Rate COMICAISGCAN e 168 Helical SCAM ici ii eene eR 169 Red lock Repository MEG irc alta 389 Ref level Pulse envelop cocinar 56 Reference level EE M 244 Remote control Programming examples sesseeeee 270 SCOPI 2 O 266 Remove PM din oe cios 143 Jitter 2 143 Remove Wawelroms arstin ernia di 58 Repetition HOM aie tutti o eio e Pao dete 110 Report Pl escrito aos 260 TEMPLE iuris cad 260 Reporting Custom template rernm 263 Enable ue 262 PDW 262 PIUJIN danei 263 Storage
151. Pulse Modulation MOP IPM Inter Pulse Modulation M MOP Modulation on Pulse MSW Multi segment waveform O OQPSK Offset QPSK P PDW Pulse Descriptor Word Format of the reported data Plugin A loadable Microsoft Windows DDL module that describes custom modulation schemes or envelope shapes Poly Phase polyphase polyphase Code used by pulse modulation and suitable for pulse compression PRF Pulse repetition frequency PRI Pulse repetition interval Defines the overall time of a pulse cycle PRT Pulse repetition time Pulse sequence Pulse train Pulse train A sequence of repetitive pulses Pulse to Pulse Modulation IPM PW Pulse width Q QPSK Quadrature phase shift keying modulation R RADAR Radio Detecting and Ranging Repository In the context of this software a repository is a file based database loca ted on the local hard drive or on a network storage drive S Scenario In the context of this software a scenario is the top level description of the signals to be generated Sequence In the context of this software a sequence describes how pulses are arranged to form a waveform Stagger PRI Pulse train composed of two or more pulse sub trains that use the same PRI V VSG Vector Signal Generator List of Commands AAA G 270 Ver M 271 ANT nna MODeARRay COSN isso a
152. Pulse Sequencer 1413 8757 102030 0 9 0 To find the SCPI command corresponding to a parameter on the user interface Perform one of the following 1 Right mouse click to open the context menu of the parameter 2 Press F1 to open the Help window You find a link to the description of the SCPI command right after the parameter description For a concise description of the available SCPI commands see chapter 22 Remote Control Commands on page 269 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions 22 Remote Control Commands The following commands are required to perform signal generation with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer option in a remote environment We assume that the R amp S Pulse Sequencer has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S Pulse Sequencer documentation A knowledge about the remote control oper ation and the SCPI command syntax are assumed 22 1 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions sess 269 Programming Examples 2 2 ceo respuere oa 270 Common Conmpmands narrada 270 Commands with Similar Syd euet regeret E ele eade e ee Lec aine 271 Antenna Patter Commands iia tere ciere eat eri vc 283 Antenna Scan Commands 0 cccccsiscsccscsssesscscctacsescscssccassacsacaecuseevaccacnansadanciaes 291 Data Source Commands eeesssseseseeeeeseeenene eene nnne eren nnn eren nennen eis 299 Emitter to Generator Mapping Command
153. R amp S Pulse Sequencer Pulse Signal Generation Software User Manual TEE ALT 1176 9512 02 03 rement Test amp Measu ROHDE amp SCHWARZ This document describes the following software options e R amp S SMW K300 K301 1413 8805 02 1413 9776 02 e R amp S SMBV K300 K301 1419 2744 02 1419 2789 02 e R amp S SGT K300 K301 1419 7652 02 1419 7700 02 O 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S SMW200A is abbreviated as R amp S SMW R amp S SMBV100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMBV R amp S Pulse Sequencer is abbreviated as R amp S Pulse Sequencer R amp S9WinIQSIM2 V is abbreviated as R amp S WinlQSIM2 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 2 1 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 3 6 5 3 6 6 3 6 7 3 6 8 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 8 Contents Preta 9 LGPRUSUCNICNUIEU 9 Documentation OverviQew eecececiee inse ueein nena cuan NE ENUAN NANNE R ANNENS ENERE 1
154. RI ETT TERT IDEE 131 nM 131 IPM Profiles Settings IPM Profile Name Enters the name of the profile Remote command IPM CREate on page 277 IPM NAME on page 278 IPM CATalog on page 276 IPM SELect on page 277 IPM REMove on page 278 IPM Profile Comment Adds a description Remote command IPM COMMent on page 278 Unit of Affected Parameter Sets the units of the IPM parameters Available are Time s Frequency Hz Level dB Phase deg Remote command IPM UNIT on page 313 Profile Sets the shape of the profile Steps Waveform Random List List Interpolated Shape Random Equation Further available parameters depend on the selected shape Remote command IPM TYPE on page 313 2D Opens a preview diagram of the selected profile Two views are available Time Series that is a visualization of the profile variation over time e Histogram that is a statistical representation of the relative frequency density calculated for the selected number of Histogram Bins The histogram plots the number of times data points appear in a particular bin The displayed characteristics on both views are defined by Values Sets the number of values to be displayed Duration Sets the displayed duration IPM Profiles Settings Histogram Bins Values 9 Duration 1 ms Histogram Bins 30 Relative Frequency Density 9 5 0 000755 Sets the number of hi
155. SE MOP ASK SRA TO iii A A At 339 PULSe MOP BARKer COBE tnr ainia a ta 339 PULSE MOR BARKON TIIME 340 PULSe MOP BPSK PHASe PULSe MOP BPSK SRATE irre ttr erret rtr rr Peer Erden n SK c er Ee E Ea ER EY eu d FPE RE ER E Rea iE 340 PULESe MOP BPSK SRATe AUTO sorna tortas coy CERE eS SES SO HAVE Ee EYL EE EUR EANES A PLH BER soe EC TEE 340 PULSe MOP BPSKS TTIMG ccrte oer as PULSe MOP BPSK TTYPe RUESC MOP BESK PYRE soto tc uri I e EPUM EU E Ee Ec isis PULSe MOP CHIRp DEVIallOf rre enr trn rn there AA a cit 341 PUESe MOP CHIRp TYPE cuicos tii e rez xe te E Etc Eee a eae 341 PRESS MOR COMIC MN 278 PULSe MOP DATA CODING uscar al tor 342 PUESS MOP DATAIDSRO A ostia iaa da 342 PULSe MOP ENABle 342 PUESe MOP EXCLude ENABIG t ripae eet terere RR Ere or E EHE D RE ER eec Per ean cs 342 PUESe MOP EXObude EEVOES DARE enorme emp ix eee Ehe ie pio EENE EEEE 342 PULSe MOP EXCLu de EEVGOL STOP rtt nete ett ett e rtp e eaae 342 PUESe MOP EXCLU de MOBDPBE ri rebote eer EE tatc er Eres a a ER raa eH vag 343 PUESe MOP EXOLude TIME S T ARE nri rco tmr cadet eee x USER EEE A oes arar 343 PULSe MOP EXCLude TIME S TOP at aereo cec ci dee t etch t Receta eei pd Eaa 343 PULSe MOP FILTer BT RUESE MOP RIT as adips E PULSe MOP FIETet EENGI orte toc eet ge tti e rte
156. SE TIME WDT e e a iaa ENORA PULSe TYPE FALL PULSS TYPE RISE iesirea AAA AAA e E FX ER D ed AAA REPManager CATalog f 353 REPManager DISC 354 REPManager EXPO isis A AA AAA AA AAA 355 REPManager LOAD cion Aids 354 REP Manager PAT ASAD D2 ssccaiesssscessaes cone nE E cunts ines ist conocio setas 355 REPManager PATH DELETE anihia AA AA 356 REPManager PATHLIS TP oi O occ 356 nisi xoci pose tE ria Ontaneda osito 351 REPOSItO AUT Oricon A A AA A AAA REPository CATalog nisi mio cilio Ree Da REPositoty COMPI6XILy rrt t rrr nee rh enn rer oc etn e v cu Peer pede e E DEIN 352 REPository CREAS e M 277 REPOSItO Pg ze l 352 REPositoty FIEenatne n rrt etre rrr etr c nr ne E Dr AA 352 Diss 353 REPository REMove REPOSItO s7 Sr REPositoty SECUTILy i rr rrr er recreo tr e e e EHE EE ERE S ER ecc 353 REPOSItoO y SELEG count 277 REPOSitory VERSIO Missen a a esas 353 je engl 276 SEAN GIRCular NELevalOM 297 SCAN CIRCular NODDing ES SCAN CIRGUlAaENRA TEO c
157. SELeCt scort ARA tere rn e AA PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM VALue PUESe ENVelope DATA BO D PULSe amp ENVelope DATA MUNL Tipliet encotte t ertet t rr eren neto rere PULSe ENVelope DATA OFFSel rre rr rrr trt rr erra e ER RE EE ERR IEEE AER EEr eaaet PUESEIENVelO pe DATA SAV c F TENS PULSe ENVelope DATA UN Tits Aa PULSe ENVelopse EQUlation o ida eii PULSe ENVelope MODE PULSe lEVSLl DROOD rtr rrt tr AAA A A id PULSS zie aaa aid PULSS mo p PULSe MARKer AUTO ccpit e eae eee XX pede AAA PULSS MARKer FA m FUESE MARKE GATE rusia rd rra PULSe MARKerERISE tror ai toa PULSe MARKer WIDAMNis PUESe MOR AMiFREQUENOY oscars cocina vato st ETC ERREUR PULSe MOP AM MDBEPH can ctore etre taedet a NETA PULSe MOP AM TYPE FRULSeE MOR AMS Tep DD PULSe MOP AMSTep GL Ear coto A A i Taia PULSe MOP AMSTep COUNIT ion a ta E Ere a 280 PUESe MOP AMS Tep DEL6el c cotto ertt N aS E ERE Fee Ste cone niemoans EN KONETTA senses OEE 281 PULSe MOP AMSTep DURGatioh ottenere rr tren pe ce n ete t ep E nee EXE Edu 338 PULSe MOP AMS Tep IINS6rtt rtr eet ro rentrer nere a ho a dr E aca 281 PULSe MOP AMSTep LEVel e PULSe MOP AMSTep SELecCt ici ai AA AAA 280 PUESS MOP ASKINMOLE rrt coit cet decay a oo NT 339 PUES MOR ASK MD ER se acess 339 PUL
158. SELect Select DSRC SELect Select EMITter SELect Select GENerator SELect Select IPM SELect Select PLUGin SELect Select PULSe SELect Select SCAN SELect Select SCENario SELect Select SEQuence SELect Select WAVeform SELect Select REPository SELect Select Selects the repository element to which the subsequent commands apply Parameters Select string Element name as defined with the CREate Or NAME command Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 ANTenna NAME Name DSRC NAME Name EMITter MODE NAME Name EMITter NAME Name GENerator NAME Name Commands with Similar Syntax IPM NAME lt Name gt IPM PLUGin NAME lt Name gt PLUGin MODule NAME PLUGin NAME lt Name gt PULSe MOP PLUGin NAME lt Name gt PULSe NAME lt Name gt SCAN NAME lt Name gt SCENario NAME lt Name gt SEQuence NAME lt Name gt WAVeform NAME lt Name gt Renames the selected repository element Parameters lt Name gt string Must be unique for the particular type of repository elements May contain empty spaces Example see example Handling repository elements on page 271 Manual operation See Waveform Name on page 193 ANTenna COMMent lt Comment gt DSRC COMMent lt Comment gt EMITter COMMent lt Comment gt GENerator COMMent lt Comment gt IPM COMMent lt Comment
159. SQUIhL occa nadaa 298 SCAN RASTO PSOV io ais 298 SCAN SECTGEPSCGNUIFIE asii A a rd RR AA 298 SCAN CIRCular ROTation lt Rotation gt SCAN CONical ROTation lt Rotation gt SCAN HELical ROTation Rotation SCAN LSW ROTation Rotation SCAN SPIRal ROTation Rotation Sets the rotation direction of the antenna Parameters Rotation CW CCW Example see example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Spiral Scan Settings on page 169 Antenna Scan Commands SCAN CIRCular RPM lt Rpm gt SCAN HELical RPM lt Rpm gt Sets the rotation speed of the antenna Parameters lt Rpm gt float Range 0 01 to 1000 Default unit degree s Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Helical Scan Settings on page 169 SCAN CONical RATE lt Rate gt SCAN SECTor RATE lt Rate gt SCAN RASTer RATE lt Rate gt Sets the turning speed Parameters lt Rate gt float Range 0 01 to 1000 Default unit degree s Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Raster Scan Settings on page 167 SCAN HELical ELEVation STEP Step Sets the step width the antenna is changing Parameters Step float Range 0 01 to 11 25 Default unit degree Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Helical Scan Settings on pag
160. Se MOP BPSK PHASe lt Phase gt Sets the phase Parameters lt Phase gt float Range 0 1 to 180 Default unit degree Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 PULSe MOP BPSK SRATe Srate Sets the symbol rate Parameters lt Srate gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 PULSe MOP BPSK SRATe AUTO Auto Enables automatic adjusting of the bits in the pulse width Parameters Auto ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 Pulse Commands PULSe MOP BPSK TTIMe lt Ttime gt Sets the transition time Parameters lt Ttime gt float Range O to 50 Default unit percent Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 PULSe MOP BPSK TTYPe lt Ttype gt Selects the transition type Parameters lt Ttype gt LiNear COSine Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 PULSe MOP BPSK TYPE Type Sets the modulation type Parameters Type STANdard CONStant Example see example Creating a BPSK pulse on page 333 Manual operation See BPSK on page 91 PULSe MO
161. Sequence ARB Sequences Collection ARB ARB Sequences Collection ARB Waveform Sequence ARB ARB Waveform Sequence Single Emitter ARB ARB Single Emitter Emitters Collection ARB ARB Emitters Collection Localized Emitters ARB ARB Localized Emitters Fig 14 4 Instrument Configuration understanding the displayed information 1a 1b Status messages Mapped gt Error indicates insufficient instrument s configuration for the cur rent profile 2 List of the retrieved instrument configuration 3 List of the profile capabilities see chapter 14 3 How to Create Generator Profiles and Config ure the Connected Instruments on page 221 5 Observe the status indication e Green LED Ok indicates a suitable instrument s configuration e Yellow LED N A indicates an unknown instrument or unsuccessful mapping e Red LED Error indicates that the requirements are not matched e g missing option insufficient amount of memory etc For description if the provided settings see chapter 14 2 Generator Profile Set tings on page 219 To retrieve the profile of the connected generator 1 Create a new Generator Profiles see To create a new custom generator profile on page 221 2 In the Generator Profiles dialog select Profile Type gt Connected 3 Select Generator and select the generator type How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments 4 In the list of the Availabl
162. Settings Per default table rows in the sequence description table are processed sequentially To process a subset of pulses or waveforms several times create a loop Fixed Value Randomly Selected 2 10 2 Loop Variables Prefix loop Index1 M prefix i Count N lt prefix gt n Start Time lt prefix gt t Absolute Time lt prefix gt ta For a step by step instruction see To define and apply a loop on page 119 Loop Repetition The loop repetition number is a fixed value or a randomly selected value within a value range defined with its minimum maximum and step values Remote command SEQuence ITEM LOOP TYPE on page 377 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MINimum on page 377 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MAXimum on page 377 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt STEP on page 377 Loop Variables You can define loop variables that will be used by the pulse calculation within the loop Prefix Indicates the loop to that the variable belongs If empty no loop varia bles are used Loop Index 1 N prefix i indicates the current repetition number and is a value in the range 1 N where N is the repetition number Sequence Settings Loop Count N lt prefix gt _n indicates the repetition number fixed or randomly selected as defined with Loop Repetition Start Time lt prefix gt _t indicates the start time of each subsequent loop Absolute lt prefix gt _ta in
163. TE 261 How to Create Test Reports eeeeeeeeeseseeeeeneee enne nnne nennen nnne nnns 263 Automation of R amp S Pulse Sequencer ss 266 How to Configure and Enable Remote Control of R amp S Pulse Sequencer 267 Remote Control Commands eeeeeneeeeenen 269 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions ssssss 269 Programming Exampl es cuire tieniti ennt aia s nent ii ra nane dns auem aa aas 270 Common Commands etre hn tnnc ti E erRerk ruraux sua ninia RARA RARE PR RUE ERR RR R PAR 270 User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 6 R amp S Pulse Sequencer Contents T 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 22 13 22 14 22 15 22 16 22 17 22 18 22 19 22 20 22 21 23 A 1 A 1 1 A 1 2 A 2 A 3 A 3 1 A 3 2 A 3 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 Commands with Similar Syntax eese nnne nnns 271 Antenna Pattern Commanods eese nennen nnne nennen 283 Antenna Scan Commanods 4 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nnnn nnne nnn nnne nnn nnn 291 Data Source Commands citeceeeienua eee eina eain innt rai anne iaa aepo a 299 Emitter to Generator Mapping Commands eese 301 Emitter Commands 2 niiiteeiieui inanes ut ick unas s RE iu NANEN P RR RRARRIP RANA RARRRR RR RR RRRRR Ra 304
164. TS getBilSNB6eded orti is tc 406 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getNextMSg ennt rrt nenne n tn ner ri eee x pd 402 int P5 PEUGIN EXPORTS getNextReportVariable 2 2 1 tr ertet nre tne rrr terti 408 inEPS PEUGINCEXPOIRTS getVariable erneieren toa ne oie id int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS initPl gih tror terret nemen en neon ren tenen int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS isDataNeeded int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS modulationCore int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setGlobalVariable centre erre pagan p tdo 408 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setVatiable ieri irre ran rrt e hr er erc PEE WEE Sn 404 parv Elbe 276 IPMECOMME rp orita ER ERE ORAR AAA E AREA AAA AAA IPM CRE Ate cucuta IPM EQUation m IPMELIST CUE SM D AAA A AAA AE EA AAA IPM LIST ITEM ADD IPM LISTITEM COUNE coo cea 280 IPMELISTTEM DELete oir aa RAR 281 IPM EIS FAITEM RE Pe llosa ina ea 314 A ETA o o a A rA EREA E ERER EOE EET EAEE orba EEEREN Rae IPM LIST ITEM VALue IPM HIST LOAD curia ii ceda IPI HB Supr IPMENAME m IPM PLUGin NAME IPM PLUGIN VARiable CATalog icasscs ssscszescencoatsacerssevers coaxeneeatnsactacesdeneencsadscsapsonvatn EYES ELE E ER SEEN MEE ERR e ege 329 IPM PLUGIN VARiable SELEC c cti eerte eer dae Ve eene AY PW ERE ERAT AAA 329 IPM PLUGIN VARiable WALUG ss 5 eir erret e er rarus e i
165. Value 4096 optional Sets the values of the variables before a pulse calculation is started Parameters Index Is the i Index value form the getVariable function szValue string Variable value the string is internally converted MOP Functions Mnt PS PLUGIN EXPORTS isDataNeedad 1 2 1 2 clip ip er 405 double PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getModulationClockHint eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee nnne 405 double PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getModulationSymbolRate esse 405 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setModulationParameter eene 405 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS gelBitsNeeded 2 oret terere ii 406 Void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS SBS i vro eee Fere ea OE Aaa 406 Plugin Programming API int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS modulation Ore 25x a terna ct rate tu edi t n co cen pt 406 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS generateDIFac eene ie ere eeu atina 407 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setGlobalVatrtable cerrada lada pnt 408 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getNextReportVariable eese 408 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS isDataNeeded void optional Queries whether this plugin requires data from a data source or not Return values isDataNeeded 1 the plugin requires a data source RST 0 double PS_PLUGIN_EXPORTS getModulationClockHint void optional Queries the minimum clock rate required by the plugin to calculate the and Q data The function is automatically called after the param
166. WAVeform PKPK 0 00014 IPM WAVeform BASE PULSe IPM WAVeform COUNt 30 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence SCPI SEQuence SELect Test Sequence SEQuence ITEM SELect 1 SEQuence ITEM IPM SOURce My PRI Stagger SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet TYPE PARameter SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet PARameter PRI SEQuence ITEM IPM A 1 SEQuence ITEM IPM B 0 SEQuence ITEM IPM MODE INDividual SEQuence ITEM IPM RESTart 0 SEQuence ITEM IPM RANDom RESet 0 Example Using the step IPM profile SCPI PM CREate FHOP PM COMMent Frequency Hops IPM UNIT HERTz PM TYPE STEPs PM STEP STARt 0 IPM STEP INCRement le 06 PM STEP STEPs 5 PM STEP BURSt 2 Example Using PRI pofiles of random type SCPI PM CREate My PRI Jitter PM UNIT SEConds IPM TYPE RANDom PM RANDom DISTribution UNIForm PM RANDom UNIForm MINimum 0 0011 IPM RANDom UNIForm MAXimum 0 00115 PM RANDom UNIForm STEP 2 5e 06 IPM CREate Test PM UNIT SEConds PM TYPE RSTEp IPM RSTep MINimum 0 0005 PM RSTep MAXimum 0 005 PM RSTep STEP MINimum 0 0001 IPM RSTep STEP MAXimum 0 0005 PM RSTep PERiod 10 IPM CREate Test2 PM UNIT HERTz PM TYPE RLISt create a List see the My PRI Stagger example PM RLISt BURSt 3 PM RLISt REUSe 0 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example Using the interpolated shape IPM profile SCPI PM CREate Custom IPM IPM UNIT DB PM TYPE SHAPe create a List see the My PRI Stagge
167. a x Delta cursors Delta markers To retrieve delta information use one of the following Temporary delta information Drag the mouse cursor on the diagram The delta information is displayed temporary above the line 12 218 Mitr Ou D mais Delta information upper value is the Ax in the selected Units lower value is the A y units depending on the selected View mode 2a 2b Start and end y values units depending on the selected View mode x Delta cursors Select the x icon and Drag amp Drop the cursors The delta cursors are indicated by brackets The delta information is displayed in the Delta section of the dialog Play Stop Starts and stops the graphical waveform playback The waveform section is shifted in time by one half of a display section every 100 ms Display Mode Sets the display mode 18 2 Spectrum Waveform Reference Level Settings The spectrum shows the FFT of the signal portion that is visible in the viewport The FFT algorithm processes the waveform data in sections of 512 points 800 kHz 800 kHz 2 4 MHz Waterfall diagram The waterfall shows the spectrum of a signal portion as a function of time Each line in the waterfall diagram represents one FFT with 512 points The waterfall diagram uses a color scale to represent the dynamic range Q constellation plot Depending on the number of samples visible in the viewport displays the individual I Q samples or
168. a assign one of the existing antenna patterns or create a new one b use the Location parameters to define the emitter s position more precisely c use the Pointing Direction parameters to change the orientation of the antenna To enable static emitters and place them on the 2D map 1 To add an emitter drag amp drop an emitter it into the 2D diagram 2 Configure the emitter s properties How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver l Le y Available Emitters Interferers Properties of selected Emitter Interferer Mame er 8m Frequency teveltdim Distance km we J Jl Alias Name 1423 6 934 2 11 7 636 Pattern My_PencilBeam Scan My RasterScan Sequence My S1 PT The 2D diagram displays the configuration on a map with North East coordinates Fig 13 4 2D view understanding the displayed information 1 7 Display options the Range Scale for example defines the radius of the displayed 2D map 2 Access the Assign Signal Source to Generator Profiles dialog and indicates the assignment status 3 Distance to the receiver and strength of the received signal 4 Point to Receiver On antenna is automatically turned in the direction of the receiver 5 Emitter or interferer indicated with its alias name EIRP and transmission frequency How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver To configure the receiver settings
169. a EES m La Time period between begining of rising edge and pulse start Os Time period between end of puise and end of faling edge os 94 X Sequence Repos 1 gt Sequence 1 fent Sequence 1 Comment Sequence Type Created by wizard putse ased w The sequence type can only be changed 5 mE in empty seque ta llas 22 Lea La No Nesting Type D fee Puse Block Diagram K O o wo sesmicrros 8 sa s iss 9 Fig 3 1 R amp S Pulse Sequencer default workspace understanding the displayed information Title bar Menu bar with standard functions e g save open file etc Toolbar Screens for individual scenarios Project tree repository tree Work area 5 6 Workspace 7 8 9 Task bar with indication on enabled remote control information on the required highest security level if enabled and access to active dialogs DUoOI0ORAO0N The user interface of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer offers an intuitive operating concept All menus and dialogs use known elements e g selection lists check boxes and entry fields Understanding the Displayed Information Menu bar Table 3 3 Content of the menu bar File Repository Configure Window Help e New Rep
170. a Sources Settings on page 228 e Coding on page 95 e Filter on page 95 Remote command ULSe MOP BPSK TYPE on page 341 ULSe MOP BPSK SRATe on page 340 ULSe MOP BPSK SRATe AUTO on page 340 ULSe MOP BPSK PHASe on page 340 ULSe MOP BPSK TTYPe on page 341 ULSe MOP BPSK TTIMe on page 341 ld eR ck tu uj tu 7 2 6 5 QPSK Modulation A quadrature phase shift keying QPSK modulation applies a phase shift at each con stellation point Comment MOP Type QPSK Type DQPSK Symbol Rate 100 kHz Pulse Settings QPSK Type Selects the QPSK modulation method like a regular QPSK an Offset QPSK OQPSK or a Differential QPSK DQPSK modulations Remote command PULSe MOP QPSK TYPE on page 347 Symbol Rate Symbol rate of the modulating signal Remote command PULSe MOP QPSK SRATe on page 347 7 2 6 6 Noise Generates an AWGN noise signal with selected Bandwidth The noise is superimposed during all pulse phases Comment Remote command PULSe MOP NOISe BWIDth on page 345 7 2 6 7 Plugins Custom modulation schemes are used in the same way as the internal modulation schemes See chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Pulse Settings Comment 16 QAM MOP Type Plugin A A 94 PUUQIA VAMADISS cios ad aaa 94 Data Source COMORES iii A AAA 94 Plugin Selects and loads a user
171. a enne a Dist ioc cus ck die tende t e cuente sue cus dde e 281 ANT nna MODeEUSER GSV FORMatl 5 c erac iem eere ED ond e t esa Du elena eds 289 ANT nmna MODGEUSER LORAD cores eine ct Haeo ented Sage n linen ea ets 289 nante a 277 AN Tenna REMOVG ciuda A a a a AA aio 278 ANTenna iSELbGCGL ote te Recien Od eed cucine sva Net ev M T a eee 277 ASSignment EMITters EIS T2 iacit th ton ha e cie tcp ss 302 ASSignment EMITters SELect as ASSignment GENerator GAPablilities 1 erret t tert ete rre rene d dE 302 ASSighmentGENerator lS T5 aao tie oc ead aire cin NU tesi be dud cs VERE TEE IT che PROPRE ened 302 ASSigniment GENerator PATH EMITter ADD naeh tht rr nbn rrr n o nas 279 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter BDELete iioio tr tette terne roten ri rende Een nena 281 ASSignment GENerator PATHEEMITterdiIS TL 303 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter SE Lect ettet peer tee rincones avia 280 ASSignment GENerator PATH LIST 902 ASSigniment GENerator PATEESEbLect irte terere rra t e e aiT a aeri vues 280 ASSignment GENGaOr SELES e oe M 280 double PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getModulationClockHilt ooooonnnninnnnnnnnnnnonnocononccanncnnncnono non c cnn cnn conocia nn 405 double PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getModulationSymbolRate sess 405 DDSI GCP Eo
172. a lines in the report is indicated with the keyword HDR Usually the reported data is formatted in table form where the column names are defined with the information right after the HDR line Supported File Types and File Formats Each report template must have a HDR line and subsequent second line defining the individual columns information and following the syntax HDR lt Col 1 gt lt Col 2 gt See table 1 3 for an overview of the available tokens Table 1 3 List of available HDR tokens Token name Description Values related to the generated pulse data Global variables from IPM profiles or loops etc lt TOA gt Time of arrival lt PRI gt PRI of current pulse 0 0 lt PRF gt PRF of current pulse 1 PRI or 0 PW Pulse width 096 096 RT Rise time FT Fall time RE Center frequency of pulse absolute BW RF bandwidth FMOP incl BB filter PA Pulse amplitude at pulse start MF MOP flag where 1 indicates that MOP is active MOP MOP type AMOP PMOD FMOP DF Frequency offset from carrier lt lt VarName gt gt Variable from the internal variable pool Automatically generated values related to the sequencing lt ITEM gt Sequence Line Item 1 N lt REP gt Repetition 1 M lt COLL gt Collection Line Item 1 L lt RFC gt Center Frequency of Emitter Sequence Definin
173. able static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 Remote command SCENario LOCalized ADD on page 279 SCENario LOCalized SELect on page 280 SCENario LOCalized CURRent on page 363 SCENario LOCalized DELete on page 281 Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer Each emitter interferer is described with the following parameters Type Defines whether an emitter or an interferer is configured Alias Name Enters an alias name Emitter Interferer Name Selects an emitter interferer EIRP Sets the EIRP of the interferer Frequency Sets the frequency of the interferer Mode Selects the mode the emitter is working in Beam Sets the number of current used beam Antenna Pattern Scan Sequence Displays the current selected antenna pattern antenna scan and sequence To change any of them select the corresponding icon Remote command SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario SCENario Location LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized LOCalized Related Settings TYPE on page 367 AL las on page 363 EMITter on page 364 EMITter MODE on page 365 EMITter MODE BEAM on page 365 WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform WAVeform on page 367 EIRP on page 367 FREQuency on page 368 ANTenna on page 366 SCAN on page 367 The emitters and interferes on the
174. age 272 Usage Setting only Manual operation See New Insert Append Remove Clear Items on page 109 INSTrument CLEar ANTenna MODel USER CLEar DSRC CLEar EMITter MODE ANTenna CLEar EMITter MODE BEAM CLEar Commands with Similar Syntax EMITter MODE CLEar EMITter MODE SCAN CLEar IPM LIST CLEar PULSe ENVelope DATA CLEar PULSe MOP AMSTep CLEar PULSe MOP FMSTep CLEar PULSe MOP PCHirp CLEar PULSe MOP PLISt CLEar SCENario EMITter CLEar SCENario CSEQuence CLEar SEQuence ITEM CLEar Deletes all items from the list or the table Example see example Handling items on page 272 Usage Event Manual operation See New Insert Append Remove Clear Items on page 109 Antenna Pattern Commands 22 5 Antenna Pattern Commands Example Configuring antenna patterns SCPI ANTenna CREate My PlanarAntenna ANTenna COMMent planar phased antenna with parabolic aperture distribution ANTenna MODel TYPE ARRay ANTenna MODel FREQuency let 10 ANTenna MODel BANDwidth le 9 ANTenna MODel ARRay DISTribution PARabolic ANTenna MODel ARRay NX 12 ANTenna MODel ARRay NZ 12 ANTenna MODel ARRay XDIStance 0 6 ANTenna MODel ARRay ZDIStance 0 3 ANTenna MODel ARRay PEDestal 0 1 ANTenna CREate Test ANTenna MODel TYPE HORN ANTenna MODel ROTation Z 0 ANTenna MODel ROTation X 0 ANTenna MODel FREQuency let 10 ANTenna MODel HORN LX 0 076 ANTenna MODel HORN LZ 0 05 ANTenna CREate My PencilBeam ANTenna MODel TYPE SINC ANTenna MODel ROTa
175. age 297 SCAN SECTor NELevation on page 297 SCAN SECTor NRATe on page 298 SCAN SECTor PALMer on page 298 SCAN SECTor PRATe on page 298 SCAN SECTor PSQuint on page 298 Raster Scan Settings The raster antenna scans a sector with defined Sector Width but performs several scans with different elevations See figure 10 6 Antenna Scans Settings Raster Width deg Sets the width of the scanned sector Scanned is an angle of Raster Width 2 degrees starting from the Y axis Scan Rate deg s Defines how fast the antenna is turning Bar Count Bar Width Sets the number of bars and the distance between two consecutive scanned bars sectors Retrace Time Defines how fast the antenna returns to its initial orientation after completing the last bar Direction Switches between a horizontal and a vertical scanning direction Unidirectional The antenna uses an unidirectional scan mode i e the scan is not a continuous but the antenna turns in one direction only counterclock wise CCW and jumps to the next bar within the selected Flyback Time Palmer Scan If enabled superimposes a conical scan on the circular scan see fig ure 10 3 Remote command SCAN RASTer WIDTh on page 296 SCAN RASTer RATE on page 293 SCAN RASTer BARWidth on page 295 SCAN RASTer BARS on page 294 SCAN RASTer RETRace on page 295 SCAN RASTer DIRection on page 296 SCAN RASTer UNIDirection on page 295 SCAN RASTer FLYBack
176. ain EMITter Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 REPository DATE lt Date gt Queries the creation data Parameters lt Date gt string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 REPository FlLename Queries the file name of the repository archive Return values lt Filename gt string file path incl file name and extension Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Manual operation See Storage on page 44 Repository Commands REPository PATH Queries the directory in that the repository archive is stored Return values Path string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Manual operation See Storage on page 44 REPository SAVE Stores the repository archive To query the storage location use the command REPository PATH Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Event Manual operation See Storage on page 44 REPository SECurity Security Sets the security level Parameters Security LEVO LEV1 LEV2 LEV3 LEV4 Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 REPository VERSion Version Sets the repository version Paramete
177. al of 500 us are selected to be longer than the processing time of the slave instrument An internal procedure guarantees that the period from generating the marker signal M2 in the master instrument until start of the ARB in the slave instrument is exactly 500 us Thus the ARBs of all signal generators in the setup start synchronously Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator To create transfer and play the waveforms of 2D scenario manually During the initial tests it is useful to create test waveforms and store them on a local or network drive These waveforms can be latter transferred to and played with a signal generator 1 Open a test scenario with Scenario Type gt Localized Emitters e g LocalizedE mitters see chapter 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver on page 209 2 Select Upload to VSG gt Target gt File 3 Select Local ARB File Set Path and select the storage location for the gener ated waveform 4 Select Repository On 5 Select Start Name LocalizedEmitters Localized Emitters 2D plane 3xEmitter 1xinterferer 1xreceiver Reparting is turned off Data output is in waveform Format Comment O Busy Current Task Generator Setup Perform manual trigger configuration as described in Setup Info txt Emitters Waveform Local ARBFile Generation La x The software calculates the waveform and stores it in the Volat
178. al operation See Custom Antenna Settings on page 161 ANTenna MODel BANDwidth lt Bandwidth gt Sets the antenna bandwidth Parameters lt Bandwidth gt float Range 1e 06 to 1e 11 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Frequency Bandwidth on page 157 ANTenna MODel FREQuency lt Frequency gt Sets the fregeuncy Antenna Pattern Commands Parameters lt Frequency gt float Range 1e 06 to 1e 11 Default unit Hz Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Frequency Bandwidth on page 157 ANTenna MODel GAUSsian HPBW lt Hpbw gt ANTenna MODel COSecant HPBW lt Hpbw gt ANTenna MODel SINC HPBW lt Hpbw gt Sets the Half Power Beam Width for the Gaussian Sin x x and Cosecant Squared antennas Parameters lt Hpbw gt float Range 0 1 to 30 Default unit degree Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Sin x x Antenna Settings on page 159 ANTenna MODel HORN LX Lx ANTenna MODel HORN LZ lt Lz gt Sets the length of the rectangular sides of the Pyramidal Horn antenna Parameters lt Lz gt float Range 0 01 to 100 Default unit m Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Pyramidal Horn Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel PARabolic DIAMeter lt Diameter gt Sets the diameter of the parabolic dish antenna
179. al operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario EMITter MODE BEAM Beam SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE BEAM Beam Sets the used beam of the current mode Parameters Beam float Range 1 to 32 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE BEAM Beam Parameters Beam float Range 1 to 32 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter on page 186 SCENario LOCalized DISTance Sets the distance to the receiver Return values Distance float Range O to 1e 09 Default unit m Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Usage Query only Manual operation See Location on page 208 Scenario Commands SCENario LOCalized DIRection TRACk Track Turns the antenna in the direction of the receiver Parameters Track ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Pointing Direction on page 208 SCENario LOCalized LOCation EAST lt East gt SCENario LOCalized LOCation NORTh lt North gt Sets the location of the antenna Parameters lt North gt float Range 1e 06 to 1e 06 Default unit m Example see ex
180. allation You can find detailed installation instructions in the delivery of the option or in chap ter 3 2 Installing the Software on page 16 2 1 Accessing the Pulse Sequencer To open the application gt On your PC select Start gt All Programs gt R amp S Pulse Sequencer gt R amp S Pulse Sequencer The software opens and per default displays the last opened workspace Required Options 3 Getting Started 3 1 This section describes the basic steps to be taken when starting up the R8S Pulse Sequencer for the first time e REQUIFEO OPINE ano aiii 15 Installing the SOMWALC m 16 e Starting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time eeeeeesessss 18 e Understanding the Displayed Information sseenn 19 e Moans of Users Interaclion ccce ett rettet e ctt edie tag vens 22 e Trying Out the SOfWWaFTe usce cei aee iaa 25 CUSTOMIZING the SO Wa Sica ex e RED ee ree Exe 35 e Getting Information and Help sseeeeeeeeenee eene 38 Required Options The R amp S Pulse Sequencer software is a stand alone PC based application that cre ates waveform files This software is available for free download on the R amp S website Waveforms generated with the software can be played by a subset of instruments that must fulfill the minimum requirements listed below R amp S SMW200A R amp S SMW200A base unit equipped with e option Baseband Ge
181. ally created one from the repository Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM ADD on page 279 SEQuence ITEM IPM COUNt on page 280 SEQuence ITEM IPM SELect on page 280 SEQuence ITEM IPM DELete on page 281 IPM Graph Graphical representation of the configured variations and the elements they are applied on Source Profile Lists the available Jitter and IPM profiles in the repository To create a new profile or to edit an existing one select the New Select icon Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM SOURce on page 322 Assign to Profiles can be assigned to an existing pulse parameter or to a variable e To select a parameter use the New Select icon e To select a variable enter the variable name This variable will be available within the current sequence segment table row Parameter variations can be applied on the pulse parameters listed in table 9 1 Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet TYPE on page 313 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet PARameter on page 313 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet VARiable on page 314 Transformation Enables an optional mathematically defined transformation The transformation is defined by the equation y a x b where e the multiplier a and the offset b are user defined xisthe raw value from the IPM profile yisthe output value of the IPM Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM A on page 321 SEQuence ITEM IPM B on page 321 Repetition Defines the way
182. ample Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Location on page 208 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ALTitude lt Altitude gt SCENario LOCalized LOCation ALTitude lt Altitude gt Sets the altitude of the antenna Parameters lt Altitude gt float Range 1e 06 to 1e 06 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Location on page 208 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ANTenna lt Antenna gt SCENario LOCalized WAVeform ANTenna lt Antenna gt Assignes an existing antenna pattern see ANTenna CATalog on page 276 Parameters lt Antenna gt string Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 Scenario Commands SCENario LOCalized RECeiver SCAN Scan SCENario LOCalized WAVeform SCAN Scan Assignes an existing antenna scan see SCAN CATalog on page 276 Parameters Scan string Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario LOCalized TYPE Type Defines whether an emitter or an interferer is configured Parameters Type EMITter WAVeform Example see example Cr
183. amples of the ANSYS HFSS file in csv file format The first file describes the electromagnetic fields whereas the second one the gain in dBi Phi deg Theta deg re rEPhi mV im rEPhi mV 0 0 610 829 1376 04 10 0 1127 58 1978 99 Phi deg Theta deg dB GainTotal 0 0 2 79687 10 0 2 79687 Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary antenna pattern ant pat file format The table 1 5 describes the used tags and parameters Table 1 5 Format of ant pat file Element Description antenna pattern Root element of the antenna pattern file az res Resolution of the columns in the data section value in degrees integer divider of 360 elev res Resolution of the rows in the data section value in degrees integer divider of 180 data The file has to contain up to e 1 360 az res columns e 1 180 lt elev_res gt rows If the column resolution exceeds the resolution specified with the lt az_res gt element an interpo lation is applied You may also define a subset of values for example to define a beam antenna pattern Missing values are internally set to zero see example Beam antenna pattern on page 396 The following are two examples of the file format the description of a beam like antenna pattern and the description of an antenna pattern with back lobes and medium resolution Supported File Types and File Formats Example Beam antenna pattern This example sh
184. an Gain 5 dB Pointing Elevation Bearing Altitude Antenna Pattern and Scan Selects an antenna pattern and antenna scan type Related Settings See also To configure the receiver settings on page 213 Remote command SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ANTenna on page 366 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver SCAN on page 367 Gain Sets the antenna Gain Remote command SCENario LOCalized RECeiver GAIN on page 367 Pointing Direction Defines the orientation of the antenna as Elevation Bearing and Altitude Remote command SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection ELEVation on page 364 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection BEARing on page 364 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver ALTitude on page 366 13 1 3 3D Scan Pair View Settings To access this dialog 1 In a Localized Emitters scenario select Emitters 2D 2 In the 2D map open the context menu of an Emitter and select 3D view with Receiver Emitter Name My EmitterGuidance Mode Beam Surveillance 1 Emitter Antenna My PencilBeam Emitter Scan My RasterScan 46 6677 s Receiver Antenna My Planar ntenna Receiver Scan My Circular 4 s Scan Simulation Start Time Period 0 j e jJ Visualization O Scan Line Pattern 2 Show Line of Sight C HPBW Disc Minimum displayed level Duration for one scan simulation period The visualization is in slow motion if this value is larger than the
185. an omnidirectional antenna pattern 4 Compare the displayed signal with the signal received by a static receiver in a Sin gle Emitter scenario with the same emitter E2 See figure 11 3 For description of the provided settings see chapter 13 1 3 3D Scan Pair View Settings on page 205 To map the generated signals to the signal generator In a Scenario Type gt Localized Emitters you have to select the signal of which emit ter interferer is currently transmitted to which signal generator You can assign more then one signals to each of the instrument paths 1 In the Scenario dialog perform one of the following a select Upload to VSG gt Assign Emitters b select Emitters gt 2D gt Assign Emitters The Assign Signal Source to Generator Profiles dialog opens 2 Drag amp Drop an Emitter Interferer to assign its signal to a generator profiles J 11 Le 06 GHz Emitters Interferers A A e eaten ced 9 My RS SMW SMW20A Dy Path A 6 GHz 99 amp 5692 Path B 6 GHz CI E2 6 GHz Q My RS SMBV Unknown Path A 3 2 GHz Rs sMw SMW200A 0 Path A 6 GHz Path B 6 GHz e 6 692 ra ee o EE NL Re 9 o swa O rra mo 8 RS SMW M ar 1 Master instrument 2 Generator profile see chapter 14 2 Generator Profile Settings on page 219 3 Physical instrument and serial number 3 Enable Connection diagram gt On How to Create Scenar
186. and INSTrument CAPabilities on page 308 14 2 Generator Profile Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Generator Profiles gt New or open the automatically cre ated default profile My_RS_SMw Comment 1XRF 20 GHz 1xBW 160 MHz 1xARB with 1GSample Profile Type Custom Profile M coco uaman Path A Pathol RF Frequency Range Bandwidth Memory Software Opt K300 Pulse Sequencer K301 Enhanced PS Path A Path B 100 kHzto 20 GHz 100 kHzto 6 GHz 160 MHz ARB or Realtime ARB or Realtime Waveform Sequence ARB or Realtime Single Emitter ARB or Realtime Emitters Collection ARB or Realtime Localized Emitters ARB or Realtime Fig 14 2 Generator Profiles understanding the displayed information 1 2 Available options and their features The following settings are available Mc LL M 220 COMMON Eon ia 220 A A te ses 220 Gomera inicia itinie inn iio sires 220 List of Available R amp S Signal Generators cceccccecsceeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeessaeensenees 220 RF Frequency RANYE ARD 220 A NO 221 Generator Profile Settings DOTA OPIONS 1ta anpa A A os 221 Installed OPINAS escitas 221 COPAS 0 raid 221 Name Enter the name of the generator s profile Remote command GENerator NAME on page 277 GENerator CREate on page 277 GENerator CATalog on page 276 GENerat
187. andom pattern Each hop frequency is used three times To create and assign a PRI Jitter There is a dedicated function for creating PRI Jitters the PRI Jitter in the Configure IPM dialog see also To create and apply an F Hop frequency hopping pattern on page 149 In this example however we create manually a randomly varying IPM profile with 20 different values Within 20 ms the PRI should vary in the range between 1 1 ms and 1 15 ms 1 Create a new IPM Profile that uses Profile gt Random and for example a Distribu tion gt Uniform Distribution See also To access the IPM profile dialog on page 144 User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 151 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters My_PRI Jitter Comment random 1 1 1 15 ms Unit of Affected parameter melo v Profile Random v E Distribution Uniform Distribution M 1 1 ms 1 15 ms 2 5us 2 Select 2D to visualize the function 3 Open the required sequence and assign the IPM profile to a pulse train See To create and apply an F Hop frequency hopping pattern on page 149 To vary pulse parameters simultaneously We assume that a PRI Jitter has been configured and applied to a pulse train as described in To create and assign a PRI Jitter on page 151 To apply a second variation for example a PW Jitter perform the following 1 Create a new IPM Profile for example as shown on the
188. are defined with the param eters Elevation Angle and Elevation Rate see figure 10 2 Palmer Scan If enabled superimposes a conical scan on the circular scan see fig ure 10 3 Remote command SCAN CIRCular RPM on page 293 SCAN CIRCular ROTation on page 292 SCAN CIRCular NODDing on page 297 SCAN CIRCular NRATe on page 298 SCAN CIRCular NELevation on page 297 SCAN CIRCular PALMer on page 298 SCAN CIRCular PRATe on page 298 SCAN CIRCular PSQuint on page 298 Sector Scan Settings A Sector antenna scans only a sector with defined Sector Width Antenna Scans Settings Fig 10 3 Sector scan with enabled Palmer scan understanding the displayed information Sector Width deg Sets the width of the scanned sector Scan Rate deg s Defines how fast the antenna is turning Unidirectional The antenna uses an unidirectional scan mode i e the antenna turns in one direction only and jumps back within the selected Flyback Time Nodding If enabled superimposes a horizontal nodding on the circular scan The height of the nods and their rise time are defined with the param eters Elevation Angle and Elevation Rate see figure 10 2 Palmer Scan If enabled superimposes a conical scan on the circular scan see fig ure 10 3 Remote command SCAN SECTor WIDTh on page 296 SCAN SECTor RATE on page 293 SCAN SECTor UNIDirection on page 295 SCAN SECTor FLYBack on page 295 SCAN SECTor NODDing on p
189. are superimposed 2a 3b 3c Marker traces M1 M2 M3 All indicate the pulse On time of each of the pulse To include a sub sequence in an existing overlay 1 Open the sequence you have created with To define and enable overlaying seg ments on page 122 2 In the Sequence Description table insert a new item after the second one and select Type Sub Sequence 3 To build a parallel branch with the items 4 and 5 use the Indent icon Sequence Description 8 Les LJ t Nos ES nd PuseWeveform RepCnt mm Marker AFreq Alevel Phase PRI Delay oO ES O alti O pa ult O me Pulse ber p aol 1234 om od o 1 sms 0s O ia Pulse A amak Eas 1234 a one ods os 25ms Os a x 6 Pulse a ce 2 5 ms PRI How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements The block diagram confirms that the items are overlaid where the second parallel branch consists of two subsequently processed pulses the fourth item will be pro cessed after elapsing of the overlay duration To create a scenario with several pulse train sequences If you test situation requires to test the receiver s ability to correctly detect different pulse sequences you can use Sequences Collection scenario In this dedicated scenario you can configure several pulse train sequences and switch
190. as a complex emitter emulates a radar system The emitters are characterized with parame ters like operating mode beam waveform antenna pattern and antenna scan The available emitter settings depend on the complexity of the simulated system e Simple emitters are described only by a sequence of pulses Antenna beam pat terns and antenna scans are not required e Complex emitters are described by the combination of a operating mode antenna pattern antenna scan and a sequence as well as elevation and azimuth Emitter Settings 11 1 Emitter Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Emitter gt New My_EmitterGuidance Comment guidance amp survaillance eme 90 dBW Frequency 6 GHz Emitter Modes 00000 DPS Ant Pattern p Type Gaussian Model Frequency N A Inr 5 a Type Raster Scan i A Seance i T mE Freq Offset Beam Offsets Elevation Azimuth An emitter is described as a combination of a operating mode an antenna pattern an antenna scan and a sequence Emiter NaMe iia TORT RTI TE 181 COMMEN ecrit tede tede eod e ct d ree dc e deat Mans bd n en vr a E 181 EIRP 181 uisu Em 181 Emiter MOodSS ete eter revo caida 181 EImiter Beg S osado diia 182 Emitter Settings Emitter Name Enter the emitter s name Remote command EMITter NAME on page 277 EMITter CREate on page 27
191. asacuanceearansera 278 PLUSIN NAME oa iia sansdamsdeesdeaneieeassaceudeansiegnadeesvaude 278 PULSSMOP PLUGM NAME sicrie einiaid dass 278 MEI BE 278 SCAN NAME ia it ar D UI EIE e OAM TE AT RENE 278 SOENSHOTIAME nib rire rne id 278 SEQuenceiNAME 1 2 taedet in dida 278 AWWA TORTIE caeco tates so aceto aot ai a aia 278 AN Tenma COMMODI tette e ege er a enl ee n a EA b bua e ances 278 DSRC COMMENT iin ripere dvor aat ea S pa Cau Eds AE TURF QE pe c TET NP TQ VETT ETIS 278 EMITE r COMMER cniri namina aia 278 GENerator COMME iiie dide ce da a a aaa 278 IPNECONNMIBEnL occ er asse a eeu EE CC aaa 278 PLUGIDOCONMMIeRE rii dada 278 PULSE COM Met crece aera edv pareti ea pEre ode dades 278 PULSE MOPICOM ip CRIT 278 SGAN COMMO M MEUM 278 eo A 278 icai m E 278 WAVeftammiONIMNI iori oH e tede A P de io eoi ii 278 REPOSO eem 278 ANNE a EMO scio etnia ceo E E casa 278 DSRC REMOVE E 278 EMINE REMO ennn ci 278 GENerator REMOVE iiri aana olaaa ladito AR aS 278 IPM REMOVE NETT TET 278 PLIGINREMOVeE cornisa 278 PULSE idu e 278 SCAN REMOVE coito T ecu a eR Ud Yi dia 279 SCENO REMOVE T 279 SEQUENCA RENOVS ei iiie n A reddis 279 WAVefotm REMONe ertet terat a A T NER CRDI SU EER 279 REPOSO REMOVE 2 ttr ra rodea e Dee obe e e bap ag veas Cad ka ee a goo gu
192. asis roto t rr ced ee to Feet adeb venen ve dus laa YE OPE SHEER ER 279 PUESSMOPPEISECBESEC or ceteri met Hmmm SUCI once ELK 282 PULSe MOP PEISEGOUN ccit rer ttc eet Eo e e event tne coetu pte t Pe cnr ce ved 280 PUESSe MOP PEISEDEL6lte ierit P Ei EE i ao creari era xri atico 281 RUESE MOP PESE Sol PULSe MOP PLISt SELect e PULSe MOP PLISEVALU ui delta PUES MOP PELUGINNAME concomitantes 278 PULSe MOP PLUGIN VARIable CATaloD c omar AAA 329 PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable SELect R PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALuUue eneee ennaa nne trennen sene enns SE EAEE PULSe MOP POLY BENGti i corte tte ntt ice epe ete eun ot t pa p c a C PUESS MOP POLY SPYPE inti tei dest ee ere aa PUESe MOR OPSKSRA TO c ica PULSe MOP QPSK TYBE cct cert n AA coe d t a Pd p Rev PUES MORT YVPE cocoa 347 PULSe NAME PULSe OVERshoot PULSe OVERshoot DECay PULSe PREVIiew MODBDBE 1 etn rne rrr A nt tr Ce ede EX EE ee eR EY PULSE PREVIEW MOP M co c A O PULSE RIP P lO PULSe RIPPle FREQuency sas PULSE SE LECU m PULSE SETTINGS e in a AAA AAA AAA PULSE TIME FAU E ainurin O a T den acids ERE EX Eva ds PUESE TIME REE CINCO morenn in rin A E E EESE PULSe TIME RISE nat ta PUL
193. ata gt 0 1 0 data source is not required 1 data source is required RST 0 Example see example Laoding plugins in the repository on page 326 Usage Query only Plugin and Reporting Commands SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable CATalog IPM PLUGin VARiable CATalog PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable CATalog Queries the variables used in the plugin Return values Catalog string Example see Using a plugin as a modulaiton source Usage Query only Manual operation See Plugin Variables on page 94 SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable SELect Select IPM PLUGin VARiable SELect Select PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable SELect Select Selects a plugin variable Parameters Select string Example see Using a plugin as a modulaiton source Manual operation See Plugin Variables on page 94 SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable VALue Value IPM PLUGin VARiable VALue Value PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALue Value Sets the values of the selected variable Parameters Value string Example see Using a plugin as a modulaiton source Manual operation See Plugin Variables on page 94 SCENario PDW ENABle Enable Enabels generation of Pulse Descripter Word PDW reports Parameters Enable ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Generating reports on page 327 Manual operation See Reporting Enable on page 262 SCENario PDW PATH Path Sets the target directory in that the generated report files are stored P
194. ated waveform file See Global markers on page 238 You can also enable an additional marker that is held high from the scenario start until a selected duration This marker signal is output as marker 1 If other marker signals are defined all markers are sum med Threshold Enters the threshold Pulses at levels below this threshold are omit ted Remote command SCENario OUTPut MARKer ENABle on page 325 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario ENABle on page 325 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURation on page 325 SCENario OUTPut THReshold on page 372 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings Reporting Enables and configures the report files generation see chapter 20 Creating Reports and Documenting Measurement Results on page 260 19 2 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings In a Scenario Type gt Localized Emitters you have to select the signal of which emit ter interferer is currently transmitted to and processed by the connected instrument You can assign more then one signal to each of the instrument paths See for example e chapter 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver on page 209 e To map the generated signals to the signal generator on page 214 To access these settings gt Inthe 2D map of a Scenario Type Localized Emitters select Assign Emitters Emitters Interferers f naeescna ON Emitters Interferers A e My RS SMW SMW200A 0 o 9 Path A
195. ation is assigned to If you assign more than one variations to an element these variations are superimposed see chapter 9 1 4 Configure Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Settings on page 142 Each jitter and IPM effect affects one of the parameters listed in table 9 1 and can use the following profiles e Steps e Waveform e Random List List e Interpolated Shape e Random e Equation Source profiles are jitter and IPM profiles You can use the same profiles for more than one variation the R amp S Pulse Sequencer calculates the profile values independent from each other 9 1 9 1 1 IPM Profiles Settings IPM Profiles Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt IPM gt New Stagger PRI Comment sine Length 30 340 us 470 us Period 12 ms Unit of Affected Parameter Time s Type Sine DC Offset 400 us Pkto Pk 140 us rtd mne Pulse Count 30 Pulse variations are defined by e Common IPM Settiligs oia 130 e IPM Profiles SONS di rne pec tte eae tee idas 132 e JEditList Sette ea entr toner e etre data lacer epe tdt x qd rea 140 e Configure Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Settings 142 Common IPM Settings IPM Proe NM siii ed i ete teret ete aote de ttd rt cet vex re n eos 131 IPM Profile Comment soii 131 Unit of Affected Parameter ccccccssssscccecctsssecececeneesseeeseceuseeeeeeceauesseseeeeeenseseeeeeaees 131 EARS IL REPE
196. ator profile Profile Path 0 Q My_RS SMW SMW200A 0 Path A 6 GHz Ek Add Path B 6 GHz My_RS_SMBV Unknown 9 amp 5692 CI E2 6 GHz Path A 3 2 GHz OQ RS_SMW SMW200A 0 Path A 6 GHz Path B 6 GHz e 66H 1 Master instrument 2 Generator profile see chapter 14 2 Generator Profile Settings on page 219 3 Physical instrument and serial number 5 Enable Connection diagram gt On The diagram visualizes the required connections The sign indicates the signal generator that acts as a master device 6 In Generator Profile section change the master device according to your particu lar setup 7 Provide all other instruments with the reference frequency and the trigger signal of the master signal generator The R amp S Pulse Sequencer sends the required SCPI commands to the instruments All required signal generator settings are configured automatically In this example for instance the direction and the mapped signal to USER 4 and USER 5 connectors of both signal generators are configured automatically 8 In the scenario dialog select Start Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator The software calculates the waveforms Progress information indicates the calcula tion progress The waveforms are stored in the volatile memory transferred to the instruments and loaded in the ARB s The output frequency and level of the signal ge
197. ats on page 393 XALL Plugin e g with user modulation IPM profile ini Initialization file Contains information on default location for temporary files Waveform file in a Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary file format Refer to the user manual of the signal generator for description of this file for mat Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary l Q data file format used by the R amp S9PR100 porta ble receiver wav Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary audio like file format that contains l Q samples instead of the usual FM stereo signal Although the file extension suggest that this is a standard auto file this file will not be recognized by an stereo player 1g tar mat Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary l Q data file format used by some signal and spec trum analyzers e g R amp S9FSW The iq tar file contains l Q data in binary format together with meta infor mation that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate MATLAB file that contain complex 1xN or Mx1 vectors MERE du Standard ASCII files with comma separated values The txt files are used to describe settings that are based on lists like for example the custom pulse envelope shapes the list for IPM profiles data lists etc A 1 1 File Format of the Reporting Template The template uses an ASCII text Text that is not a token or an option OPT descrip tion is directly transferred to the final rep
198. aveform format i set IV Start with Reset Q BUSY Current Task Frequency 3 MHz Poth a y D start Ide Ref Level O dBm continuous M B Stop S gt wie S ee E for an example of a single sequence scenario see figure 6 1 These scenarios generate an ARB signal form a selected sequence or a waveform Use the context menu in the Sequence Waveform block to select and configure the transmitted sequence or waveform See chapter 8 Building Pulse Sequences on page 106 chapter 12 Working with Waveforms and Generating Interfering Signals on page 192 chapter 19 4 1 How to Create Transfer and Play the Waveforms of Simple Sce narios on page 253 e chapter 6 2 1 Common Scenario Settings on page 55 Remote command SCENario SEQuence on page 363 SCENario SEQuence CLEar on page 363 Scenario Settings Sequence Collection Scenario Settings Name My PT Collection Sequences Collection Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format A scenario with multiple sequences requires a list of sequences You can switch between these sequences and select the one to be transmitted The Current Sequence indicates the alias name of the currently selected one See chapter 8 2 6 Lists with Multiple Sequences on page 116 chapter 6 2 1 Common Scenario Settings on page 55 Remote command SCENario CSEQuence on page 368 Si
199. carnal aaeain E rar P iea 295 SCAN RASTSEFEYBAGK ada 295 SOCANSSECTOFFEYBACK ina EE A ENS a 295 SCAN HELiCaERETRAGe enne ehe ote ena ee a AEA REEE EAE RAG 295 SCAN RASTer RETRACe Leeieede iie esacadese nha ansa anke sad aa n S RAN Ro sara ERPA eda RR a DDR RR Ra aa don aNA 295 SOANISSPIRAERETRSIC iia 295 SGAN RASTer UNIDIFeGLOD 2 2 corteo ace ia f edad ERR da 295 SCANESSECTOCUNIDIFSGEOFi cocida tide erated ides tae a au sre tentato e ta ad ete borea ecd Yatego 295 SCAN RAS VERMA Ui ctc etta ex vada a qaka paca adi 296 SCAN SEG TOV DTe iienaa di 296 SCAN RASTerDIROGHOL iore E a ocean eat n dde APE aE E eR ER RR EE Ea 296 SCAN SPIRI ROUNE cmd las 296 SCAN SPIRILRTIM O 00d a Ai 296 SCAN SPIRIS TEP di 297 SCAN TIPE e one a aia 297 SCAN CIRCular NOD DING maire ii A A i eee ARA a 297 SCAN SEC Tom DIM Ge irnn a ana aaa ope ee A Er A EAEra 297 SCAN CIRGOular NELewvaliOrn 222 3c nat annaia a aa aa a a ania aia rA 297 SCAN SECTOr NEL6VAtlOR 2 caci n caida innein dpi iriad ia inaaianei chagdecdees 297 SEANICIRCUISANRA TO TU 298 SCAN SEGTONRAT ccann a dadas 298 SCAN CIRCular PALMED ccccccccccescecssescecescceceaceesseseceenececeagecesseseceeaeeecegeeesseeeesneees 298 SCAN RAS TEP PAL Mer acorta di AA ema d RN AE 298 SCANISEGTOEUPALEMSG 1 22 cuti A odere odes einn 298 SCAN CIRGUulan P RAT citing coner ia dia 298 SCANRASTENPRATE ou ri 298 SCAN SECTO PRA TO cocida a ies 298 SCAN CIRGular3P
200. case the software calculates a waveform most suitable for the current signal generator e g an ARB file or a multi segment waveform You can change the settings influencing the waveform generation see chapter 19 1 Waveform Generation Settings on page 247 Volatile Repository Represents the volatile temporary memory and the repository Depending on your user rights you have read only or a full access to the repository Users granted with full access rights are allowed to perform Volatile View Visualizes the generated waveform file from the volatile memory See chapter 18 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms on page 240 Remote command SCENario VOLatile VIEW on page 372 Repository On Enables file storage in the repository Scenario Settings Volatile gt Release to Repository Exports and stores the waveform files in the repository i e the wave form is archived in the repository You can access archived waveforms any time latter e g after soft ware restart Volatile gt Load from Repository Loads and play files from this storage stored waveform files are played back without being recalculated Volatile Repository Clear Deletes files from the volatile memory and the repository Remote command SCENario CACHe VOLatile VALid on page 362 SCENario CACHe VOLatile CLEar on page 362 SCENario OUTPut REPository ENABle on page 371 Upload to VSG Vector Signal Generator Select
201. certain pulse area No Restriction A Pulse Width Automatic Exclude Time Level Threshold Rising Edge 50 w Falling Edge w Use the following common parameters to define and enable modulation on the pulses Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP eicere tta a e ener ere eet 80 ST TEES LL S LLL SLE 80 Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse ssssssssssssssese 80 Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP Enables disables that the pulse signal is modulated If the MOP is disabled the soft ware generates a envelope signal based on the pulse level and timing parameters Remote command PULSe MOP ENABle on page 342 Settings Access the dialog with modulation settings see Built In Modulation Types and their Settings Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse Customizes restricts the pulse area on that the MOP will be applied With its default settings Configure gt Colors gt Preset gt Classic the software indi cates highlights the pulse area on that the MOP is applied See figure 7 9 and com pare the colors used to indicate the pulse lilac and the pulse area on that MOP is applied pastel orange See also chapter 3 7 2 Changing Colors and Default Configuration on page 36 Pulse Settings Fig 7 9 Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse understanding the displayed information Timing Profile gt Voltage 10 50 90
202. characterizes the radiation pattern of the emitter Typical radar antennas er als like the phase array antennas can adapt their radiation pattern dynamically depending Di Piai a on the operating mode the radar is working in For example a antenna can use a cose neos cant beam in scan mode and pencil beam in track mode For more information see chapter 10 Defining Antenna Patterns and Antenna Scans on page 154 Pulse E My TestScenarios b Scenarios b W Emitters b T Ant Patterns b 0 Ant Scans D 2 Sequences v Pulses Inter Pulse Mods 9 My_PRI Stagger Waveforms 9 My Waveform O WV Matlab O cw wil Data Sources PRBS test _ O My TestData gt Plugins My_QAM_Plugln lt Generator Profiles 9 My RS SMW My RS SMBV In the R amp S Pulse Sequencer pulses are the fundamental building block of any signal Pulses are described mathematically with their amplitude envelope the applied mod ulation on pulse MOP and the enabled marker signals One single pulse description is however not sufficient to calculate and process a signal pulses have to be organ ized in a sequence and assigned to an emitter For more information see chapter 7 Creating a Pulse Library on page 66 IPM Inter Pulse Modulation Inter Pulse Modulation IPM profiles modify a pulse parameter like level pulse repeti tion interval frequency offset etc from one pulse to another one The IPM prof
203. characters Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi ces The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands E D E HM 270 poi eme 271 ICH 271 IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification 22 4 Commands with Similar Syntax Return values ID Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver sion Example Rohde amp Schwarz K300 1407 6004k02 000000 3 1 17 1 03 01 158 Usage Query only OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Return values Options The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed Usage Query only RST Reset Sets the software to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands Unsaved setting are lost Usage Setting only Commands with Similar Syntax This section describes command that follow similar syntax and are common to the command
204. coding is defined as b a b modulo 4 Depending on the state of a preceding modulation symbol b_ the coded modulation symbol b is obtained for example from modulation symbol a 2 as follows b 4 0 1 2 3 b 2 3 0 la By means of differential coding the assignment of modulation symbols a binary indi cation MSB LSB to the phase differences shown in the following table is generated Table 1 11 Phase difference for QPSK Modulation symbol a 00 01 10 11 Phase difference 0 90 180 270 A 5 Supported Filter and Impact of the Filter Parameters The table 1 12 shows the filters that are available together with their associated parameters The filter characteristic is displayed in graphical form Supported Filter and Impact of the Filter Parameters Table 1 12 Overview of the supported filters Cosine Root Cosine Roll Off Factor Roll Off Factor Bandwidth Cosine r 0 5 Root Cosine r 0 5 Filter impulse response Filter impulse response symbol Gauss FSK Rectangular BxT Gauss BT 0 5 Rectangular Filter impulse response Filter impulse response Momo The following is a simple description of the filter parameters and the way they affect the main filter characteristics Changing filter parameters is an effective way to ensure that the entire bandwidth of the desired signal is allowed to pass and adjust the filter form to
205. context menu and select Tim ing PRI Pulse Source Profile PRI Stagget E e Jia Variable Name ho Transformation y ax b LL Ho y Repetition Individual Values Each pulse from a set of repetitions uses a new IPM value Identical Values All pulses from a set of repetitions use the same value Restart Restart IPM for this line item O Reset random generator For description of the provided settings see chapter 9 1 4 Configure Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Settings on page 142 4 In the Sequence dialog a set Repetition Count 12 b set Delay 230 us to enable a stagger start delay see figure 9 2 My_PT_PRI Stagger Comment 12 pulses with 3 steps PRI stagger Pulse Based M Sequence Description k laz Ls be ie La A ee A f te NET SD a e JL Pulse we How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters The Sequence dialog confirms that a parameter variation varying the PRI is applied IPM IPM and PRI var To visualize the impact of the IPM profiles We assume that a PRI Stagger has been configured and applied to a pulse train as described in To assign the staggered PRI profile to the PRI parameter of a pulse on page 146 We also assume that a Pulse Train or a Pulse Train Collection scenario is config ured a signal generator is selected and the sequence is assigned to this sc
206. cscececesceceseseecesceeeeegeeseeeeeeeaneeesaes 305 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSetFREQUBNCY cccccccccccccccnccononcnnonononanannananannnnnnnnnnnanannnanenenonos 305 EMITterMODE BEAM SEQUENCE8 ccccocccnnccccnccoonnnononnnnoncnnnnnnnnnconnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnannnnannninnns 305 EMITIeCMODEIBEAM STATS ooo dla 306 EMITHERMODE SCAN aai 306 EMITter EIRP lt Eirp gt Sets the EIRP of the emitter Parameters lt Eirp gt float Range 100 to 200 Default unit dBW Example see example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See EIRP on page 181 Emitter Commands EMITter FREQuency Frequency Sets the operating frequency Parameters Frequency float Range 1000 to 4 4e 10 Default unit Hz Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Frequency on page 181 EMITter MODE ANTenna Antenna Assigns an existing antenna pattern see ANTenna CREate Parameters Antenna string Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Modes on page 181 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet AZIMuth lt Azimuth gt EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet ELEVation Elevation Offsets the position of the beam in both the azimuth or elevation Parameters Elevation float Range 90 to 90 Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Beams on page 182 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet FREQuency Frequency Offset
207. ct the sum sig nal from different static emitters and interferers you can use Localized Emitter sce nario In this dedicated scenario you configure the signal of one ore more emitters and optional one or more interferers that would be received by a receiver with defined char acteristics You can also configure the receiver and change its position in the scanning beam of the emitters To explain the principle the following examples create a complex scenario with two emitters and one interferer that are located at a given distance to the receiver the receiver characteristics can also be configured e Open a suitable scenario on page 210 To add an existing waveform as an interferer to the scenario on page 210 e To enable static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 To configure the receiver settings on page 213 To visualize the signal on a 3D scan on page 213 e To map the generated signals to the signal generator on page 214 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver Open a suitable scenario 1 Create a new Scenario gt Localized Emitters O EEI Localized Emitters 2D plane 3xEmitter 1xinterferer 1xreceiver Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format Perform manual trigger configuration as described in Setup Info txt 2 In the block diagram select Emitter gt 2D The 2D Localized Emitters dialog opens and displays a 2
208. d 279 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter ADD esses enne rennes 279 EMIiTrer MODE ADD E 279 EMITte MODE BEAM ADD cima rc ia 279 PULSE MOF AMS TED ADD uu eit E A a a eld nat 279 PULSE MOP FMS Tep ADD ncnian eanna ai 279 PULSEMOP POMP ADD cana bid 279 PULSE MOF PHUSTADD edanen ee a a A dias 279 SCENano MOC Alize GAD Di oia 279 Commands with Similar Syntax SoENaro OE QUENCE ADD oue ne qaa En tad eet teen de etd ad eau eg a 279 SCENarie CEMIEADD derrota Loth A FER ET e E TY S EVER e kr a YER XERR ER e RESUME 279 BS RG SEI pip a 279 IPM EIS TT EAA PIED 279 PULSe ENVelope DATA TEM ADD iii iiec iuda ea ci secun caia 279 SEQuence TEM PMEADD cicl n 279 SEQuenceil RENTADO ii it dad dit iii data 279 INSTruimentCOUN ana ds IU E D aE 280 EMI Tier MODE BEANEGOUNIE 2 1 idee trit ecce a 280 vues mem 280 PULSE ENVelope DATAT EM COUN cacao Reo sott tea tte end ti ente ede 280 PULESSMOPIAMSTSpIGOUNE n ceu i ouod reise trie acte id ada 280 PULSEMOP FMSTep COUNT or a one torem xy oen en exea Dea xD raa EA 280 PULSE MOP PCH COUNT iirrainn otn aee Deoa pur eua oa eg E edu rece rase tue appe nre Eada 280 FPUESCGMOPIPLEISECOL N dieron ted poca ia eere ao odas 280 IPMS TITEN COUNT coa cana pde dnce ind wn xy Ro Su ex ae radon Rene ERR Alda 280 SEQuenced TEMI PM COUNT countries 280 SEQuence l TEM COUN a AA A E a 280 INS Tromeni SELOG oia a A a TEE 280 ASSignmeMt EMI Tters SELEG ia 280 ASSignme
209. d in a list The list items are pro cessed sequentially and cyclically when the list end is reached the list is processed from the beginning Fig 9 4 IPM with shape Profile List 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e The increments are repeated different number of times Count 1 1 Count 2 2 Count 3 1 etc 2 List Count 3 List Start IPM Profiles Settings 4 List Increment 5 Import Data from File icon 6 Populate list icon List Accesses the standard list editor to define a list in table form see Edit List on page 140 e To create a list manually use the standard icons and functions in the context menu see Standard function in the context menus on page 24 Enter the list values manually e To import a list in ASCII format select the Import Data from File icon e To create a list automatically and fill it in with values select the Populate list icon Enter the Start and Increment values and the number of list elements Count and select Populate Remote command IPM LIST ITEM ADD on page 279 IPM LIST ITEM COUNt on page 280 IPM LIST ITEM SELect on page 280 IPM LIST ITEM VALue on page 314 IPM LIST ITE EPetition on page 314 IPM LIST ITEM DELete on page 281 E lt z Jj Waveform Sets an IPM shape that follows a ramp sine or triangular waveform function The waveform amplitude is defined by the
210. d item in bits Parameters Bits float Range O to 4096 Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Data Source Table on page 229 DSRC ITEM DATA Data Parameters Data string Manual operation See Data Source Table on page 229 Data Source Commands DSRC ITEM PATTern Pattern Sets the data pattern of the selected item Parameters Pattern ZERO ONE ALT R3 R4A R4B R5 R7 R11 R13 ZERO ONE Binary 0 and 1 ALT Variable bit strings 1010 with alternating O and 1 and a maxi mum length of 999 bits R3 RAA RA4B R5 R7 R11 R 13 Barker codes Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Data Source Table on page 229 DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT Init Enables disables initialization of the shift register with a user defined value Parameters Init ON OFF Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Shift register on page 229 DSRC ITEM PRBS INIT VALue Value Set a new initialization value Parameters Value float Range 1 to 511 Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Shift register on page 229 DSRC ITEM PRBS TYPE Type Sets the PRBS type for the selected item Parameters Type P9 P11 P15 P16 P20 P21 P23 P7 Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Data Source Tab
211. defined modulation from a file The modulation must exist in the Plugin library Use the standard context menu functions to e reset the plugin variables e access the load Plugin settings see chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Remote command PULSe MOP PLUGin NAME on page 278 Plugin Variables Resets all variables to the preset values defined in the plugin Remote command PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable CATalog on page 329 PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable SELect on page 329 PULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable VALue on page 329 Data Source Coding Filter See chapter 15 1 Data Sources Settings on page 228 Pulse Settings e Coding on page 95 e Filter on page 95 7 2 6 8 Data Source Coding Filter Data Source PRBS test y Coding Differential M Filler Rectangular M Length 128 The following setting are available for a subset of the provided MOP types ME EESE AAEE AE EAEE EE EA E T 95 COON e EUM 95 Fa Gea eR A E a aa ara 95 Data Source Selects the data source for the custom modulation The data source has to be created first See chapter 15 Defining the Data Source on page 226 for description of the provided settings Remote command PULSe MOP DATA DSRC on page 342 Coding Coding is a technique used to improve the signal properties and signal reception In general the coding schemes are applied prior to modulation i e the
212. dicates the absolute time Time Remote command SEQuence ITEM LOOP VARiable on page 378 8 2 4 Overlay Settings An overlay processes rows in parallel The row processing starts at the same time and lasts up to the overlay duration is Longer items are truncated 1 Overlay Duration sets the length of the resulting sum item For a step by step instruction see To define and enable overlaying segments on page 122 Duration Sets the duration of the sum item Remote command SEQuence ITEM OVL WTIMe on page 378 Overlay Variables You can define overlay variables that will be used by the pulse calculation Prefix Indicates the overlay to that the variable belongs If empty no overlay variables are used Duration lt prefix gt _t indicates the overlay duration Remote command SEQuence ITEM OVL VARiable on page 378 8 2 5 Fillers Settings You can enable and add fillers Sequence Settings iS Duration A Time Synchronization SJ Fixed Sms Equation Variables amp 9 For a step by step instruction see To create and add a CW segment on page 122 Signal Selects the type of signal to be generated for filling in the dummy segment Blank A blank segment with the selected duration is appended to the sequence CW A segment containing a continuous wave CW i e unmodulated sig nal is used Hold Holds the last available pulse sample
213. do next v Create a new scenario Create a new emitter Create a new antenna pattern Create a new antenna scan Create a new sequence Create a new pulse Create a new inter pulse modulation ims 3 6 5 Using the Wizard to Create a Complex Scenario The main application field of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer is the generation of pulsed sig nals This example uses the Wizard to introduce the way you can create and define antenna patterns antenna scans emitters etc and interact with the software To create a new emitter based scenario 1 Start the Wizard see chapter 3 6 4 Launching the Built In Wizard on page 29 2 In the assistant dialog select Create New Scenario and confirm with Next 3 Select Complex Scenarios with emitters modes and antennas 4 Follow the instructions and select a Emitter with EIRP 120 dBW Frequency 3 GHz Antenna Pattern gt On Antenna Scan ON b Antenna Pattern Gaussian C Scan Pattern gt Raster d Pulse with Rising Edge Falling Edge 10 us Width 100 us and enable Modulation On e Linear Chirp gt On with Deviation 2 MHz f PRI 7 1 ms and Repetition 5 Trying Out the Software 5 Confirm with Finish The software creates the new scenario automatically with all required elements e g one new emitter Emitter 1 one new sequence Sequence 2 new pulse Pulse 2 etc You recogni
214. ds Parameters lt Period gt float Range O to 4096 Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random Steps on page 137 IPM WAVeform TYPE Type Sets the profile shape Parameters Type RAMP SINE TRlangular Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 ORE IPM WAVeform BASE Base Defines how the waveform period is defined as a time duration or as a number of pul Ses Parameters Base PULSe TIME Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 IPM WAVeform COUNt Count Sets the waveform period as number of pulses Parameters Count integer Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 IPM WAVeform OFFSet lt Offset gt Shifts the profile by the selected offset Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands IPM WAVeform PHASe lt Phase gt Enables a phase offset to change the start phase of the sine wave Parameters lt Phase gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Default unit sec Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Wavefor
215. e Pulse Waveform Rep Cnt IM Marker AFreq Alevel Phase PRI Delay O x as apta wede Aes sec azsa o od oe 25ms os O x Pulse ivi MIRRE IIA one od o Sms Qs 06 besa we O sil Pulse we vj Esel static rza soo e 10d o 25ms 2ms T T n DO ls Pulse LE h ls laa ll static lazos soke 1008 o Sms 0s 12 Block Diagram P2 y 3x 5 0 ms PRI The sequence graph in the Sequence Description confirms that the two items are included in the loop The loop is repeated random number of times 2 To enable a different PRI for the looped items select the first pulse in the loop and set Delay 2 ms i e PRIa PRlIag 2 ms 22 ms 3 For the pulses in the loop set the A Freq 500 KHz and A Level 10 dB 4 Assign the sequence My S2 S1 F1 S1 F2 to a pulse train scenario start the waveform calculation and select Volatile View The Data View confirms that the waveform comprises of two sub sequences with different PRI where the second one is repeated four times B Des Views My TestScenarioa SimplePulreTiin Wid E Lo b DJ See E iQ Fig 8 6 Data View Example of a sequence Select View Mode gt Frequency and View Mode gt Average Power to observe the frequency and level values For more information see figure 18 1 E User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 12
216. e beginning of a pulse In the vector signal generator generated marker signals can be routed to the corresponding output connectors For details see description R amp S SMW200A User Manual In the R amp S Pulse Sequencer you define markers on three levels on pulse basis in the sequence or define global conditions like the start of a scenario Pulse markers With the provided settings you can assign up to 4 markers to the different pulse pha ses e g rise and fall time pulse width A restart marker indicates the first 10 of the entire PRI Marker information is directly added to the resulting waveform and the marker signal output is therefore synchronous with the waveform playback To access the pules marker settings 1 Select Repository Tree Pulse Marker 2 Enable Marker 1 M1 for Rise Width and Fall Time Timing Level MOP Marker General Mi M2 M3 M4 Rise Time A A O width ARA O FallTime A O A O Restart O J J ste O OB Some signal generators support less than 4 markers These marker signals will be A omitted during signal generation Marker signals are related to 0 to 100 timing except for gate marker 50 pulse width The Marker 1 is active for the entire number of samples i e the marker is held high for the whole time from beginning of the rising edge to end of the falling edge 3 Enable M2 gt Width M3 gt Rise and Fall Time and M4
217. e gt New PRBS test Comment rrr mm cr ti Provides are the following settings Data SOURCE NAME ai ai ii accio del 228 COMME c sed cr bn tw v C e d 228 Data Source Table ii etti dd diia 229 Shift regstel eter dtes eterna hee niedissa anotan 229 MPSS DIE MM CI E 230 Preview Data SOURCE iii iia 230 Data Source Name Enter a name for the data source Remote command DSRC NAME on page 277 DSRC CREate on page 276 DSRC CATalog on page 276 DSRC SELect on page 277 DSRC REMove on page 278 DSRC CLEar on page 281 Comment Enter a short description Remote command DSRC COMMent on page 278 Data Sources Settings Data Source Table A table with one or more item that described the content of the data source Item Select Selects an item for performing standard tasks like inserting an item above the current one deleting an item etc Remote command DSRC ITEM SELect on page 280 DSRC ITEM ADD on page 279 DSRC ITEM DELete on page 281 Data Source Type Data Source Mode Sets the type of the data and the data content for the current item see Supported types of data source on page 226 See also e chapter 15 2 How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP on page 230 example Data source processing on page 226 Remote command DSRC ITEM TYPE on page 301 DSRC ITEM DATA on page 299 DSRC ITEM PATTern on page 300 DSRC ITEM
218. e 133 IPM LIST ITEM REPetition lt Repetition gt Sets the number of times a list item is repeated Parameters lt Repetition gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See List on page 133 IPM LIST LOAD lt Load gt Loads an IPM profile form an ASCII file Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Parameters lt Load gt string file path file name and file sxtension Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Edit List on page 140 IPM LIST SAVE Save Stores the IPM profile as a file Parameters Save string File path incl file name and extension Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Edit List on page 140 IPM RANDom DISTribution Distribution Sets the distribution function Parameters Distribution UNIForm NORMal U Example see example Using PRI pofiles of random type on page 311 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom NORMal LIMit Limit Sets the limit parameter of the normal distribution function Parameters Limit float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see IPM RANDom NORMal MEAN on page 315 Manual operation See Random on page 138 IPM RANDom NORMal MEAN Mean Sets the mean parameter of the normal distribution function Parameters Mean float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09
219. e 169 SCAN HELical TURNs Turns Sets the number of turns Parameters Turns float Range 1 to 30 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Helical Scan Settings on page 169 Antenna Scan Commands SCAN LSW DIRection Direction Sets the horizontal or vertical switching direction Parameters Direction H V Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Lobe Switching Scan Settings on page 170 SCAN LSW DWELI lt Dwell gt Sets the speed the antenna switches between the lobes Parameters lt Dwell gt float Range 1e 06 to 1 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Lobe Switching Scan Settings on page 170 SCAN LSW LOBes lt Lobes gt Set the number of lobes Parameters lt Lobes gt 2 4 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Lobe Switching Scan Settings on page 170 SCAN CONical SQUint lt Squint gt SCAN LSW SQuint lt Squint gt Sets the offset angle of the antenna beam that means for the conical antenna the parameter sets the radius of the scanned circle Parameters lt Squint gt float Range 0 05 to 15 Default unit degree Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Lobe Switching Scan Settings on page 170 SCAN RAST
220. e Signal Generators select an instrument and select Create Profile The created profile match the capabilities of the connected instrument 5 In the Instrument Configuration dialog assign this profile to the connected signal generator See To find connected instruments and assign the generator profiles to them on page 222 To assign a connected instrument to a scenario 1 Open an existing scenario e g SimplePulseTrain 2 Select Upload to VSG gt context menu and select a Target Generator b Select and select a generator s profile e g R amp S SMW The displayed information confirms the selected profile 3 Observe the status indication e Green LED indicates that the selected profile is suitable for the current sce nario If all other prerequisites are fulfilled the Start function is active e Yellow LED indicates insufficient capabilities e RedLED indicates that no profile is assigned See chapter 19 Playing the Generated Waveform Files on page 247 15 Defining the Data Source The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a wide range of internally defined data sources such as patterns or PRBS generators Data sources are available globally within the project Once created they can be used in all pulses Each pulse retrieves its data indi vidually Data is retrieved cyclically starting from the first list entry Once all bits are used the data is retrieved form the second one When the lis
221. e complete VISA resource string of the connected instrument and select Ok Please add a complete VISA resource string an IP address or a host name See description R amp ES SMW200A Getting Started b Select Scan LAN The LAN is scanned for connected instruments If suitable instruments are found the dialog shows them together with information on the their capabilities 4 Select Profile and select a generator profile from the list The instrument capabilities are compared to the profile requirements in regard of processing the current configured scenario and pulse sequence Note The connected instrument requires at least one option R amp S SMW SMBV SGT K300 to play ARB files generated with R amp S Pulse Sequencer How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments Current Repository My_TestScenarios Delete Delete All amp GPIB Y use amp LAN Any M m Add Refresh rumen Pate Sequencer Profle Mapped Y 2 de SMW200A 0 ok RSS w Q OK Manually Added VISA Resource TCPIP 10 113 10 91 INSTR Serial No Firmware Instrument SMW200A 0 2 Generator profile RS_SMW 3 RF Path A Path B RF Path A Path B Range 100 kHzto 6 GHz 100kHzto 6 GHz Range 100kHzto 6 GHz 100kHzto 6 GHz Baseband Baseband Bandwidth 160 MHz 160 MHz Bandwidth 160 MHz 160 MHz Memory 1024 MS 1024 MS Memory 1024 MS 1024 MS Scenario Types Scenario Types Single Sequence ARB ARB Single
222. e e EY E FREE PERSE 329 IPM RANDOM DIS TADUUO escort ose r Coran epre recon eio 18 neu plo ano usina ex EIL S ende 315 IPMERANDoOITNORMAI IMILE 5 ee erret ta eet oett en E eec pee ve EE ER Ee ETIN 315 IPMERANDORENORMAEMEABN is rai eric ett rien ile en aeu ein eie 315 IPM RANDom NORMal STD IPM RANDOM U CENT Eiee lived daa IDA A Dia PMERANDOM U SAIN Ga actos ironia tontos IDE Dress EID MEIST S eie IPM RANDom UNIFonm MAXIMUM s s croco is Mig veces puedes 316 IPM RANDom UNIFonm MINiIMUM is ics iur cocoa tte e ro acre ta E Rer idee seedings 316 IPM RANDOREUNIEOfmESTEBB ctt tiri orto SEE esi aee sexu ap sS ER PUE 317 disi IPM RLISt BURSt Id A e IPMER STEP MAXIMUM ci A A att 319 IPM RS Tep MINIMUM icio iria caida ra dee 319 IPMERSTep RERIOd rasa cents cna acco tet ans secre sets oir 319 IPM ERS Tep STEP MAXIMUM cuota a epa gc ev nen eerie Le rude aa 319 IPM RS Tep STEP MINIMUM seisne Ea AN EAE ARENE A a ADNET ARSENE EANET 319 IPM SELect IPM SHAPS BAS Escasa ld A A ate nade dpt 317 IPM SHAPE GOUNE sastre tia e ds ean 317 IPMESHAPe NN TEMO rsss E tr tortas ne ER CO eire Aa 318 IPMESEIAPO PERIOG rre enu deeper tt 318 IPMESTEBRIBURSE iu rte eiie da ere odi e ee pea Ped ts A eae ea 318 IPM STEP INC Rement rre dioere reir etian reete Corse ataca tonto incita conri eel trea E EDU Ix ues eade 318 IPMESTER STA Aticos
223. e example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Load on page 47 REPManager DISCard lt RepName gt lt Path gt lt Username gt lt Passwd gt Discards the entire repository from the permanent mass storage Repository Commands Setting parameters lt RepName gt string Repository name as configured in the workspace If more than one repositories with the same name exist the lt Path gt must be specified lt Path gt string Compete file path as queried with the command REPManager PATH LIST The Path must be specified if the RepName is not unique and if Username and Passwd are used Username string required if the repository is password protected lt Passwd gt string required if the repository is password protected Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Discard on page 47 REPManager EXPort lt RepName gt lt Path gt lt PSArchiveFile gt Exports the selected repository file to an archive file Setting parameters lt RepName gt string Repository name as configured in the workspace lt Path gt string Compete file path as queried with the command REPManager PATH LIST lt PSArchiveFile gt complete file path incl file name and extension psarch Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting o
224. e first user had closed the repository or removed it from its workspace You can request an exclusive write permission only on a repository that is currently not opened by another user with write permission See also e Discovered Repositories on the Mass Storage on page 47 e To obtain write permission on a repository on page 50 Remove Write Lock The R amp S Pulse Sequencer locks an improperly or unexpectedly closed repository and indicates this situation with a red lock symbol 8 in the Repository Tree A locked repository can be unlocked only from the same PC and by the same user with write permission that had opened the repository before See To remove write lock that results from a previously crashed ses sion on page 389 5 2 Repository Manager Settings Reveal in Explorer You can open the repository file structure in the Windows Explorer Note Do not change the repository content by changing the file structure in the windows Explorer To move or share repositories with other users always use the Export Import Repository Archive function See e To create and export a repository archive on page 50 e To import a repository archive on page 50 Remote command REPository FILename on page 352 REPository SAVE on page 353 Repository Manager Settings The Repository Manager comprises the setting for managing the repository files and archives on the mass storage To access the Repository Manager gt
225. e following examples explain the principle and use R amp S SMW to play the wave forms 19 4 1 How to Create Transfer and Play the Waveforms of Simple Scenar ios This examples uses the test setup as shown on figure 4 1 1 Open a suitable scenario e g SimplePulseTrain See To create a single pulse train scenario on page 64 2 Configure the settings as follows Name SimplePulseTrain Single Sequence Template based report is written to C My Report Files aries Data output is in MSW or waveform format I Start with Reset BUSY Current Task 2 Frequency 6 GHz path m gt start J Ide Ref Level L10d8m Continuous Sequence Waveform Upload to VSG gt O My 52 SERI SLFZO Generation RS SMW 9 My ala 9 See e chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements on page 117 e chapter 14 3 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments on page 221 3 Use the default Waveform Generator settings See also chapter 19 1 Waveform Generation Settings on page 247 All prerequisites are fulfilled The Start button is enabled 4 Select Start e The software calculates the waveform and stores it in the Volatile memory e Progress information indicates the calculation progress e The waveform is automatically transferred to the instrument and loaded in the ARB e The output frequency and level of the signal g
226. e peak change in the RF amplitude from its unmodulated value to the amplitude of the unmodulated carrier Remote command PULSe MOP AM TYPE on page 338 PULSe MOP AM FREQuency on page 337 PULSe MOP AM MDEPth on page 337 ASK Enables an ASK where the amplitude of the RF carrier is attenuated for a symbol value of zero and remains at full level for symbol values of one The level of attenuation is specified as depth in percent Pulse Settings Comment MOP Type Mod Depth Symbol Rate Modulation Depth Depth of the modulation signal in percent m Amplitude ax Amplitude pin Amplitude a Amplitude pin Inverted Inverts the amplitude shift keying ASK modulation Symbol Rate Symbol rate of the modulating signal Data Source Coding Filter See e chapter 15 1 Data Sources Settings on page 228 e Coding on page 95 e Filter on page 95 Remote command PULSe MOP ASK MDEPth on page 339 PULSe MOP ASK INVert on page 339 PULSe MOP ASK SRATe on page 339 AM Step Defines a modulation as a number of discrete states table rows each described with its Duration and Level Use the standard Append Remove Last or Delete All functions to add or remove a row The provided settings are self explanatory No 1 1 100 us 1048 O 0 0 200us se Da 8 100 us 10 8 Fig 7 10 MOP Type gt AM Step understanding the
227. e plugin e can be used to report generation during the waveform creation process How to import and assign user defined plugins See e To import a plugin on page 232 e To assign the user defined modulation scheme to a pulse on page 233 e To assign the user defined IPM profile on page 234 To import a plugin 1 In the repository tree select Plugins gt New 2 In the Plugin dialog enter name and a description 3 Select Load navigate to the d11 file and select it List and loaded are only files containing modulation data The software loads the d11 file retrieves information form it and displays it in the Plugin dialog My QAM PlugIn Comment QAM flavours 100 kHz Load Name QAM Type MOP Version 2 0 0 Author Rohde amp Schwarz You can use the plugins as sources of custom modulation schemes see To assign the user defined modulation scheme to a pulse on page 233 See also chapter 7 2 6 7 Plugins on page 93 Remote Commands PLUGin CREate on page 277 PLUGin CATalog on page 276 PLUGin NAME on page 278 PLUGin COMMent on page 278 PLUGin LOAD on page 328 PLUGin SELect on page 277 PLUGin REMove on page 278 PLUGin MODule NAME on page 278 PLUGin MODule TYPE on page 328 PLUGin MODule VERSion on page 328 PLUGin MODule AUTHor on page 328 PLUGin MODule COMMent on page 328 PLUGin MODule DATA on page 328 To assign the user defined modu
228. e string Value of the variable Usage Setting only int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getNextReportVariable int ilndex const char szName 256 const char szValue 256 optional Queries the report variables after a successful calculation and sends them to the report generator Parameters ilndex 0 Initial index 20 Function is called as long as false 0 is returned Return values szName string Variable names without the dollar sign szValue string Variable value Plugin Programming API A 3 3 IPM Functions void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS ssthhdFriPlr cocotero at 409 VOIGIPS PLUGIN EXPORPSTesball ecce otto re ia 409 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS calculateNextlpmValue eese eene 409 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setRndFnPtr void pRndFn void pThis optional Sets a pointer to a random function pRndFn and the pThis pointer which must be specified when using the Random function Plugins have to use the random generator provided by the application This generator produces a random sequence with a defined start seed If necessary the application can reproduce a particular calculation with exactly the same values The prototype of the callback function is defined as follows typedef int RndFnCallback void int To call it int iRnd pRndFn pThis iMaxVal The random generator returns a 32 bit random integer value in the range 0 iMaxVal void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS restart
229. e transition duration for constant envelope operation A Transition 0 is the border case where the change for 1 to 1 or vise versa is performed immediately Observe the effect of a Transition gt 0 on the displayed spectrum and on the I Q constellation diagram Remote command PULSe MOP BARKer CODE on page 339 PULSe MOP BARKer TTIMe on page 340 Poly Phase A polyphase code modulation is suitable for pulse compression and is mainly used in Low Probability of Intercept LPI radars Type Selection of polyphase compression codes the default Frank code and four modified versions of the Frank code the P1 P2 P3 and P4 codes Length M Sets the code order i e the number of elements Remote command PULSe MOP POLY TYPE on page 346 PULSe MOP POLY LENGth on page 346 Custom Phase Defines a sequence of phase values The phase changes are distributed evenly Pulse Settings Use the standard Append Remove Last or Delete All functions to add or remove a row The provided settings are self explanatory 135 deg 135 deg 0 deg 135 deg 135 deg Remote command ULSe MOP PLISt ADD on page 279 ULSe MOP PLISt COUNt on page 280 ULSe MOP PLISt SELect on page 280 ULSe MOP PLISt INSert on page 281 ULSe MOP PLISt VALue on page 346 ULSe MOP PLISt CLEar on page 282 ULSe MOP PLISt DELete on page 281 T Fr Cr Fg fup uy duc dus fu
230. ear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Ripple on page 75 PULSe RIPPle FREQuency lt Frequency gt Sets the ripple frequency Parameters lt Frequency gt float Range O to 3e 08 Default unit Hz Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Ripple on page 75 PULSe TIME FALL lt Fall gt PULSe TIME RISE lt Rise gt Sets the transition time of the rising and falling edges Parameters lt Rise gt float Range O to 3600 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Rising Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope on page 71 PULSe TIME REFerence Reference Selects a predefined envelope profile Parameters Reference VOLTage POWer FULL Pulse Commands Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Standard Timing Profile on page 71 PULSe TIME WIDTh Width Sets the time the pulse is on top power Parameters Width float Range O to 3600 Default unit s Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Rising Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope on page 71 PULSe TYPE FALL Fall PULSe TYPE RISE Rise Sets the slope type for the rising and falling edges Parameters Rise LINear COSine RCOSine SQRT Example example Creating an unmodulated pulse on page 331 Manual ope
231. eating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver GAIN Gain Sets the antenna Gain Parameters Gain float Range 120 to 120 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Gain on page 205 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform lt Waveform gt Assigns an existing emitter or an existing waveform see WAVeform CATalog on page 276 and EMITter CATalog on page 276 Parameters lt Waveform gt string Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform EIRP lt Eirp gt Sets the EIRP of the interferer Scenario Commands Parameters lt Eirp gt float Range 200 to 200 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario LOCalized WAVeform FREQuency Frequency Sets the frequency of the interferer Parameters Frequency float Range 1000 to 4 4e 10 Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual
232. ect a repository file e g My TestScenarios 4 Select Export The repository archive is stored in a file with extension psarch To import a repository archive 1 In the menu bar select File Import Repository 2 Navigate to the network directory and select a psarch file The Load and Manage Repository dialog opens 3 Select the a repository file and confirm with Load The repository is opened and displayed in the project tree To share a repository with other users To move or share repositories use the Export Import Repository Archive function Do not access the repositories from your Windows Explorer 1 See To create and export a repository archive on page 50 2 See To import a repository archive on page 50 To obtain write permission on a repository Repositories can be opened with executive write permission by one user at a time How to Manage the Project Data If you have sufficient user rights you can request an exclusive write permission on a repository that is currently not opened by another user with write permission 1 In the project tree double click on the repository name 2 In the Repository dialog select Storage 3 Select Obtain Write Permission To protect a repository from accidental changes 1 In the project tree double click on the repository name 2 In the Repository dialog select Users 3 To protect the repository with a password a Select Users
233. ed 2 Enabled is a liner chirp modulation the diagram confirms the frequency variation 3 Type gt Up i e the frequency is increasing linearly How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings 4 Frequency diagram 5 Spectrum 6 Constellation diagram For a description of the provided settings see chapter 7 2 5 Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings on page 79 4 Select Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP On 5 Use the Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse settings to determine the exact pulse part the modulation is applied to e g a Select Level Threshold gt On b Select Rising Edge Falling Edge 25 Use the Waveform View dialog to observe the effect of the enabled modulation see chapter 18 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms on page 240 To generate a pulse with raised cosine envelope shape 1 Select Pulse gt Timing 2 Select More to customize the envelope 3 Select Use Equation Envelope is described by an equation as selected with the parameter Preset 4 Select Preset Raised Cosine A S ret paco lv Equation e Raised Cosine Pulse Value of PI T Tr Tw Tf defines total pulse time Rise Time Pulse Width 0 5 1 cos 2 PI t T Fall Time Tr Tw TF Time 0 T Press Shift Enter for new line The dialog displays the used equation For overview of the available envelope shapes see Equations and parameters used to define custom p
234. ede 248 Write lock REMOVE ius aaa e ee 389 Z Zooming With mouse in 3D graphs osrin 22
235. eeds the pulse s Top Power Pulse Settings Fig 7 6 Illustration of the effect of the overshoot parameters Profile 0 100 1 Overshoot 20 value in percentage related to Volts Level The height of the local maximum Max Power after a rising edge divided by the pulse amplitude see figure 7 1 Decay Sets the normalized decay constant It influences the time it takes the overshoot to decay Decay 1 is the aperiodic border case The bigger the value the longer the decay time Remote command PULSe OVERshoot on page 347 PULSe OVERshoot DECay on page 347 Ripple Simulates the unwanted ringing effect i e that the signal oscillates around the power level This oscillation is defined with a frequency and level Fig 7 7 Illustration of the effect of the ripple parameters Profile 0 100 1 Level 20 value in percentage related to Volts 2 Frequency 10 kHz i e the oscillation period is 100 us Pulse Settings Level The ripple is calculated as the difference between the maximum and minimum deviation from the pulse top reference within a user speci fied interval The percentage ratio values are calculated in 96W if the Pulse Enve lope is defined in W otherwise in V Frequency Sets with which frequency the ripple oscillates Remote command PULSe RIPPle on page 348 PULSe RIPPle FREQuency on page 348 7 2 4 Pulse Envelope Settings Instead of defining a pulse by
236. eel itte ec rv et prete et d PULSe MOP FIL Ter ROLLOff ice aid E Er E oe EE PUESSMOP FIETSESDYBE rara riores PULSe MOP FMIDEMIAtION coco E ER PRO E cae ecc EXE ren Een pa n PULSe MOP FM EREQU UGTIC trt rrr nnt rer tin rhet ehe en rere aa NASATE EI PULSe MOP FMSTep ADD PULSe MOP EMS Tep GLEAr ci tnr tort eerte ren taa PUESS MOP EMST6ep COUNIE conta ai Ea ror o PL Ez 280 PULESe MOBP EMSTep DEPSete custodian rp Fr SEEE EES EANES AAT NENE 281 PULSE MOP FMS Tep DURA O wc AI Ate 338 PULSE MOP FMS Tep FREQUENCY isso ira acc 338 PULSE MOPR FMSTEp INSSE oeni A Ea testes S EE RENES 281 PULSE MOP FMS Tepi SELGE piris Aa ed EAs 280 PUESS MOP ESK DEVIAtiOnD oi tri e e er tren eir D Pe a 345 RUESE MOP SIS RAMS eroe oriente tons 345 PULSe MOP NEGElirp EGUaltlon prre teint tecto t ette itcm ee tote teres nds 345 PULSe MOP NOISe BWIDth PULSE MOR PC ADD PULSe MOP PGHirp CLE8r ueterem rrr rh ertet te tn er n t n EET exe it PUESe MOP PGEirp GOEFfiGierit itin e terree t Erg ee c DERE FE Erie EE EE UE 346 PULSE MOR PCH COUN tenes 280 PULSe MOP PGkirp DELe te terrere rrt rr tren ere c een ner regc t n e re EXT 281 PUESe MOP PGhliirp INSOfE iode certet a eicere OR o neath E ree LA eo RR HERE T 281 PUESE MOR PEIN SELEG aise ss MF 280 PULSe MOP PCHirp FERME did rara IRE tue ede eade etel demas 346 PUESS MOPPLISTADD o
237. een nennen enne nnne nennen 219 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments 221 Defining the Data SOURCG usina 226 Data Sources Sattihngs iii a laicas 228 How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP eene 230 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles 232 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals eees 236 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms eene 240 Waveform and Data View Settings eeeeeeeeeeeenennenenen nnne 240 Waveform Reference Level Settings 243 How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with I Q Data 245 Playing the Generated Waveform Files eess 247 Waveform Generation Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneennnn nennen nnn 247 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings eeeeeeeeeeennnnnn 250 Signal Generator Remote Control Settings eene 252 Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator eene 253 How to Create Transfer and Play the Waveforms of Simple Scenarios 253 How to Play the Waveforms of Emitter Based 2D Scenarios ssuuss 255 Creating Reports and Documenting Measurement Results 260 Reporting Settings siiis aai aans nike e nonsi aer cei rra RARA RARA RAN
238. efault unit Hz Manual operation See FSK on page 85 PULSe MOP FSK SRATe lt Srate gt Sets the symbol rate of the modulated signal Parameters lt Srate gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Manual operation See FSK on page 85 ee Determines the chirp mathematically Parameters lt Equation gt string Manual operation See Equation on page 88 PULSe MOP NOISe BWIDth lt Bwidth gt Sets the bandwidth Pulse Commands Parameters lt Bwidth gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Default unit Hz Manual operation see chapter 7 2 6 6 Noise on page 93 PULSe MOP PCHirp COEFficient Coefficient Sets the coefficient of the chirp polynom Parameters Coefficient float Range 1e 22 to 1e 22 Manual operation See Polynomial Chirp on page 88 PULSe MOP PCHirp TERM lt Term gt Sets the term of the chirp polynom Parameters lt Term gt float Range 0 to 32 Manual operation See Polynomial Chirp on page 88 PULSe MOP PLISt VALue Value Sets the phase Parameters Value float Range 180 to 180 Default unit degree Manual operation See Custom Phase on page 90 PULSe MOP POLY LENGth Length Sets the polyphase length code order Parameters Length integer Range 1 to 100 Manual operation See Poly Phase on page 90 PULSe MOP POLY TYPE Type Selects the modulation type Pulse Commands Parameters lt Type gt FRANk P
239. elope on page 333 Manual operation See Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 PULSe ENVelope DATA OFFSet lt Offset gt Sets an offset for the envelope Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 100 to 100 Example see example Creating pulses with custom envelope on page 333 Manual operation See Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 PULSe ENVelope DATA SAVE lt Save gt Stores the custom envelpe into file Parameters lt Save gt string file path file name and file extension Example PULSe ENVelope DATA LOAD C V PS filesimop shape csv PULSe ENVelope EQUation Equation Determines the envelope mathematically Parameters Equation string Manual operation See Envelope Definition as an Equation on page 76 Pulse Commands PULSe ENVelope MODE lt Mode gt Selects the type of the custom envelope function Parameters lt Mode gt DATA EQUation Example see example Creating pulses with custom envelope on page 333 Manual operation See Custom Envelope on page 70 PULSe LEVel DROop lt Droop gt Sets the amplitude droop Parameters lt Droop gt float Range O to 50 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Attenuation on page 73 PULSe LEVel OFF lt Off gt PULSe LEVel ON lt On gt Sets the power during the pulse on time or the pulse off time Parameters lt
240. em to the ARBs and configures the signal generator s For more information see chapter 6 Selecting a Suitable Scenario and Creating Sce narios on page 53 Emitter Name Emitters emulate radar systems The emitter combines a sequence an antenna scan d Ya and an antenna pattern to one logical unit gt Emitters My EmitterGuidanee An emitter can work in more than one operating mode and switch between them The operating mode is a description of the radar purpose such as scanning searching or tracking For example an airport surveillance radar can switch between different scan types to observe its airspace Each mode can have individual antenna and signal configuration Multiple beams are possible within a mode For more information see chapter 13 Creating Complex 2D Scenarios with Receivers and Interferers on page 201 Sequence A sequence describes how pulses are arranged to form a waveform The most simple Y amp My TestScenarios b Q Scenarios sequence comprises one pulse that is repeated with a constant PRI pulse repetition po naf interval Typical sequences however are rather complex they may contain pulse defi P ESE nitions waveforms and sequencing elements such as repetitions and loops The sequence is a logical description It cannot directly be represented as an l Q wave form For more information see chapter 8 Building Pulse Sequences on page 106 Antenna Name l The antenna
241. ements of any sequence How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings See e To create a new pulse on page 99 e To define the timing parameters of a pulse on page 99 e To define the level parameters of a pulse on page 100 e To define and apply modulation on the pulses MOP on page 102 e To generate a pulse with raised cosine envelope shape on page 103 e To define your custom envelope shape with an equation on page 104 To visualize the pulse characteristics on page 105 To create a new pulse 1 Perform one of the following a Select Repository Tree gt Pulse gt New b In the Sequence dialog press the pulse icon A new pulse with default settings is created and added to the repository tree New pulses are named Pulse n where n is a number starting at one You can add information to describe and identify the pulse like a name or a com ment 2 Change the pulse name e g P1 A pulse is described by its timing and level parameters applied modulation on pulse MOP and enabled marker signals For background information on the pulse parameters see chapter 7 1 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation on page 66 For description of the required settings see e chapter 7 2 2 Pulse Timing Settings on page 70 chapter 7 2 3 Pulse Level Settings on page 73 chapter 7 2 5 Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings on page 79 chapter 7 2 4 Pulse Envelope Settings on page 76 chap
242. enario see chapter 6 3 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario on page 63 To visualize the resulting sequence 1 In the Scenario dialog select Start The software calculates the waveform Green LEDs indicate that the processing is completed Name SimplePulseTrain Single Sequence Template based report is written to C My Report Files Data output is in MSW or waveform Format Comment A A Start with Reset O BUSY Current Task Frequency 6 GHz eT gt start Idle unes Laas EXE C Waveform Upbadtovss My_PT PREStagger y a RS SMW i 9 2 Select Volatile View The Waveform Viewer confirms the configured pulse sequence with enabled PRI Stagger R amp S Pulse Sequencer Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modulation Effects Waveform View SimplePulseTrain Mj u ld obj Wy Wt O 3 MP PRI Fig 9 13 Waveform Viewer Example of a pulse train PW 200 us PRI stagger 1 2 3 Three unmodulated pulses also observed on the Waterfall diagram 4 Delay 230 ms PRI 600 us PRI 750 us PRI 910 us 5 PRI 2260 us For detailed description of the provided settings see chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 To create and apply an F Hop frequency hopping pattern 1 In the Sequence dialog select IPM to open the Configure Inter Pulse Modula tion dialog 2 Select Add F Hops
243. ence Settings i eciiieieeiieeneeee ri 108 Sequence Description Settings taba 109 R amp S Pulse Sequencer Contents TE 8 2 2 8 2 3 8 2 4 8 2 5 8 2 6 8 3 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 1 3 9 1 4 9 2 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 12 12 1 12 2 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 1 3 13 1 4 Pulse Repetition Settings idee tier rei it ll ds 112 Eoste cnin lt HQ 113 SEE e circa E 114 Fillers Settings iio a ie 114 Lists with Multiple Sequences ooooccoccononcoconcconccncconcnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnnn aeania aaa EEEN 116 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements 117 Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modulation Effects 127 IPM Profiles Settings cernerent netu nuire 130 Common IPM Settings sssssene eee eene nemen nennen nnn 130 IPM Profiles Settihgs eller epa nne Ire ERR n ned Edna nce Rma aUe ERR a uad 132 Edit List SOUS O 140 Configure Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Settings se 142 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters 144 Defining Antenna Patterns and Antenna Scans 154 Overview of the Main Antenna Parameters esee 154 Antenna Pattern Settings erre iaa 155 Antenna Scans Settings eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeen eene nnn 164 How
244. encer Repositories REPository SAVE REPository SELect Repository for tests REPository AUTHor My Company Name REPository DATE REPository SECurity LEV1 REPository VERSion 1 1 REPository COMPlexity EMITter REPository SAVE REPository PATH C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories 20140722 113521 REPository FILename C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories 120140722 1135211Config ps rep REPository ACCess RW Login no Pass no Uname testuser REPository REMove Rep Repository Commands REPManager PATH LIST C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories REPManager PATH ADD C N ps files REPManager PATH LIST C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories C ps files REPManager CATalog Repository for tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories K300 and K301 Tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories My Tests C N ps files REPManager LOAD K300 and K301 Tests REPManager EXPort K300 and K301 Tests c X_ps filesimy psarch REPManager DISCard My Tests REPManager CATalog Repository for tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories K300 and K301 Tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz PulseSequencer Repositories REPOSO CAUS
245. ency Sets the step frequency Pulse Commands Parameters lt Frequency gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see example Creating a FM step pulse on page 332 Manual operation See FM Step on page 86 PULSe MOP ASK INVert Invert Inverts the modulation Parameters Invert ON OFF 1 0 Example PULSe MOP TYPE ASK PULSe MOP ASK MDEPth 100 PULSe MOP ASK INVert 1 PULSe MOP ASK SRATe le 06 Manual operation See ASK on page 83 PULSe MOP ASK MDEPth lt Mdepth gt Sets the modulation depth Parameters lt Mdepth gt float Range 0 to 100 Default unit percent Example see PULSe MOP ASK INVert on page 339 Manual operation See ASK on page 83 PULSe MOP ASK SRATe lt Srate gt Sets the symbol rate Parameters lt Srate gt float Range 1 to 1e 09 Example see PULSe MOP ASK INVert on page 339 Manual operation See ASK on page 83 PULSe MOP BARKer CODE lt Code gt Selects the code sequence Parameters lt Code gt R3 R4A R4B R5 R7 R11 R13 Pulse Commands Example PULSe MOP TYPE BARKer PULSe MOP BARKer CODE R13 PULSe MOP BARKer TTIMe 1 Manual operation See Barker on page 89 PULSe MOP BARKer TTIMe lt Ttime gt Sets the transistion time Parameters lt Ttime gt float Range O to 50 Default unit percent Example See PULSe MOP BARKer CODE on page 339 Manual operation See Barker on page 89 PUL
246. enerator are set accordingly Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator e Signal generation is started and the signal is output at the RF A connector 600000000099 s 7 000 000 000 000 185 In the signal generator perform further configurations e g e Select Baseband gt ARB gt General gt Waveform Info to confirm that the wave form generated with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer You retrieve also information on the waveform file name used clock rate stor age location etc var user RS PulseSequencer 3012b039 89b5 45e1 82e2 d8390712bc7a 1 Date 2014 07 29 11 19 06 File size 6401092 Bytes Comment SimplePulseTrain Clock 1 6e 07 Hz Marker 1 Available Marker 2 Available Marker 3 Available Peak Level 0 000 dBFS level 0 000 dBFS Samples 1600000 e The generated signal contains marker signals Use the default routing or change the mapping of the marker signals to the out put connectors Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator For details see description R amp S amp 9SMW200A User Manual In the R amp S Pulse Sequencer e Select Volatile gt View to visualize the generated waveform The display should resemble the one on figure 8 6 Playing the waveforms of 2D scenarios If your current scenario type is Localized Emitters you have to additionally e select the signal of which emitter interferer is transmitted to the connected signal generator inatest setup with two or more signa
247. ennonanananono 369 SCENAaMO OB TPUuEGbOCIE USER aria ia 369 SGENatmo OUTPutDLHEallon MODE coil a Ai 369 SCENa o OUTPUEDURaton TIME 0 iii dandoles 370 ScENaArG OUT PUPFOR MSE cocina a lia 370 SGENaHo OH TPUEEOOPIDOMEBINS ire oreet a aa 370 SCENano OUTPub P REQUEGM eite dx neueste ror nip dada 370 S GE Nani OUT PUR EN t oco aoa a tico iaa a eode esto eee sa Ai 370 SOENario OBTPut ATP aat dt Pe e c oce b ee uae eret b oda 371 SGENarig OUTPutiREPository ENABle 9 erre cko e e LEE EE a inicia 371 SCENario OUTPut RESetENABle 2 Linn r irren nani nn ean adn acd Ra igna irn ARA banana 371 SCENatio OUTPUERFE ENBABIB cia ii iia 371 SCENano DUTPUEREINIVOB 1 2 12 0 ia 371 SGENario OUT Put TAR Gets 2 2 tene dida ines 372 SCENatio OUTP t THReshOld 12 222 innein rnnt rrr i ken done a dis 372 ScENarnoVoOLatle VIEW ete ette eot er eb tad eet ose tee cest daa 372 SCENario TYPE Type Sets the scenario type Parameters Type SEQuence CSEQuence EMITter CEMitter LOCalized WAVeform Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Scenario Type on page 55 SCENario STOP SCENario STARt Starts stops the signal calculation Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Usage Event Manual operation See Start Stop Busy on page 57 SCENario STATe Queries the cu
248. ent A knowledge about the remote control operation and the SCPI command syntax are assumed e We assume that the controller and the signal generator have already been set up for Supported interfaces and protocols R amp S Pulse Sequencer support remote control over the LAN interface and with socket protocol only The socket controller is sufficient a VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture library is not required Socket communication requires the specification of the port commonly referred to as port number the registered port is 5025 Socket communication Socket communication is a simple network communication and is also referred to as Raw Ethernet communication It is available by default on all operating systems How to Configure and Enable Remote Control of R amp S Pulse Sequencer The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built in Telnet pro gram The Telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communi cation with the software on a command by command basis For more convenience and to enable automation by means of programs user defined sockets can be program med 21 1 How to Configure and Enable Remote Control of R amp S Pulse Sequencer See e To access the required settings on page 267 e To use the console to test SCPI commands on page 268 e To find the SCPI command corresponding to a parameter on the user interface on page 268 To access the required set
249. ent date and time respectively 2 In the project tree double click on the repository name The Repository dialog opens How to Manage the Project Data General Comment l Users Storage Name My_TestScenarios Author Created Version 25 aun 2014 15 27 04 20 Complexity Level O Basic K300 without emitters A Advanced K301 with emitters antennas interferers The complexity level cannot be changed back once advanced features are used in the repository LEVEL 2 3 Change the settings e g change the automatically assigned Name or add a Comment 4 Set the Complexity Level gt Advanced K301 5 Close the dialog To delete a repository You can delete repositories that you no longer need if this repository is not opened by another user with write permission 1 Use a user with write access rights e g Admin or Creator see table 5 1 2 Inthe menu bar select File gt Load and Manage Repository 3 From the listed files select a repository file e g My TestScenarios 4 Select Discard To remove a repository from the workspace P In the project tree select the repository e g My TestScenarios open the context menu and select Remove from Workspace The repository is removed form the workspace but not deleted You can open it again see To load a repository on page 49 To load a repository 1 In the menu bar select File Load
250. ently loaded repositories Repository elements are indicated with the assigned icons their names and the first comment line Understanding the Displayed Information Name Comment SR My TestScenarios Sample of test sceanrios r e Scenarios IE My_SimplePulseTrain Simple scenario to demonstrate a simple pulse train D VP Emitters b I Ant Patterns D 0 Ant Scans Y Sequences My_PulseTrain_Se Simple pulse train sequence o9 w J Pulses E My_AM Test_Pulse Standard AM Pulse T My_FSK Test_Pulse b F Waveforms D ail Inter Pulse Mods b Data Sources b amp Generator Profiles b D Plugins 1 Name see Name and comment on page 21 2 First comment line 3 Indicates unsaved changes in the repository Name and comment Each repository element is identified with its unique name and optional description entered in the comment field The description may contain several lines new line are added by pressing SHIFT ENTER See also Dialog names on page 22 IMy PulseTrain Seq Q Comment Simple pulse train sequence For visualizing the impact of the different paramters o9 1 An unique name to indicate the element in the repository 2 Description the first line is displayed in the repository tree Context sensitive menus All user interface controls provide a context sensitive menu Context sensitive menus are accessed with a right mouse click on the control Select All o Clear Al
251. enu and select View Jasa Cima mek elle e TI Ld Marker SEE SEE 9 MHz 7 MHE 5 MHz 3 MHz 1 MHz iz 3MHZ 5 MH 7 MHz Fig 3 3 Data View Sequence composed of 10 unmodulated pulses first 5 pulses shown In its default view mode the Data View dialog displays the and Q data as a function of time the spectrum of the generated signal and l Q the constellation dia gram The displayed setting confirm that e generated is a sequence of 10 pulses but the view port shows only the first 5 pulses e each pulse has a PRI 1 ms e the waveform is 10 ms long that is 10 PRI e each pulse has a pulse width of 100 us For information on the provided settings see chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 3 6 4 Launching the Built In Wizard To help you get familiar with the software the R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a built in startup assistant the Wizard You may access this Wizard e Onan application start this is each time you start the software e On demand Trying Out the Software this is any time during operation when you need a fast configuration of just few set tings To start the built in wizard gt In the tool bar select Help gt Wizard The Startup Assistant opens Introduction Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer Please choose what you want to
252. enu bar select Window Message Log a 9 15 07 19 Saving repository Def TestScenanos D 15 07 19 The repository Def_TestScenarios has not changed No saving required 15 07 19 Saving repository My TestScenarios Ay 15 07 19 Overwriting existing file 15 07 19 Repository My_TestScenarios saved A 15 07 19 Overwriting existing file la 1 Info message 2 Warning The displayed information is read only but you can mark and copy it To open the Message Log dialog in debug mode 1 In the tool bar select the Console Window icon 2 In the Command Console window type help The dialog lists all available commands 3 Enter set debug 1 to enable the debug messages to be output in the Message Log view gt help Commands help list commands pud print current directory ls lt filter gt print entries from current directory ed lt dir gt change current directory run lt scpi script gt run a SCPI script file set lt option gt lt value gt set an option debug lt 1 0 gt debugfile lt file gt lt gt test pp run polar math self test scpi toggle SCPI mode gt set debug 1 Tracer Debug output enabled ER 9 18 34 02 Setting windows profile 1 EN 18 34 02 Startup complete 18 34 10 Reading information from file C Users Public Documents Rohde Sc O 18 34 10 Waveform type SMU Waveform File O 18 34 10 Loading complete f 18 40 39 Error
253. er BARS lt Bars gt Sets the number of scanned bars sectors Antenna Scan Commands Parameters lt Bars gt float Range 1 to 30 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Raster Scan Settings on page 167 SCAN RASTer BARWidth lt Barwidth gt Sets the distance between two consecutive scanned bars sectors Parameters lt Barwidth gt float Range 0 1 to 9 Default unit m Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Raster Scan Settings on page 167 SCAN RASTer FLYBack lt Flyback gt SCAN SECTor FLYBack lt Flyback gt Sets the Flyback time for the antenna working in unidirectional mode Parameters lt Flyback gt float Range 0 to 1 Default unit s Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 SCAN HELical RETRace lt Retrace gt SCAN RASTer RETRace Retrace SCAN SPIRal RETRace lt Retrace gt Sets the speed for the antenna to return to the initial orientation Parameters lt Retrace gt float Range 0 to 1 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Spiral Scan Settings on page 169 SCAN RASTer UNIDirection lt Unidirection gt SCAN SECTor UNIDirection lt Unidirection gt Enables an unidirectional scan mode Antenna Scan Commands Parameters lt Unidirection gt ON OFF 1 0 Example example Defining antenna scans on
254. er GATE 4 SEQuence SELect Test Sequence SEQuence ITEM SELect 1 SEQuence ITEM MARKer FIRSt 2 SEQuence ITEM MARKer LAST 4 SEQuence ITEM MARKer ALL 1 SCENario OUTPut MARKer ENABle 1 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario ENABle 0 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURation 0 01 PULSE MARKerRISE ocaso dida 324 PULSEIMARKGRWIDTiscacsccccsansvevcsteveansstsiaeacsesssasmesecvataadased sa cawaaseussaaudsdenstaeaetedeatatweudeds 324 PULSE MARKET FALL oroesi A A eee eiut deus 324 PULSE MARKer AUTO cocina 324 PULSE MARKeSRGATE ciiin ria aaa ainia 324 SEQuenced TEMMARKe FRE cuicos daa 324 sSEQuencelTEMMARKerLAS Tico 324 SEQuence ITEM MARKer ALL eese eere a enne nn se rannnan ona rare nanenana os 324 SCENario OUTPut MARKer ENABIE ccccessecceescceceesecesssseceeecceseeeseaseeeeeeaeesseeeeesanees 325 SCENario OBU TPut MARKer SCENario ENABle 2 2 oia tan oo ette nta aa poder spRs 325 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURatiON ooccccocnncccccnnncccnoncnonnnccconnnnoncnononanononins 325 Marker Commands PULSe MARKer RISE lt Rise gt PULSe MARKer WIDTh lt Width gt PULSe MARKer FALL lt Fall gt Enables up to four markers of the corresponding type Parameters lt Fall gt float see table 22 1 Range O to 65535 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Pulse markers on page 236 PULSe
255. er of samples that the waveform contains A warning symbol indicates that the waveform contains less than 512 samples The waveform length might violate the minimum required ARB file size e Clock Indicates the used clock rate How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms e Duration Indicates the waveform duration e Peak to Average Shows the estimated reference level of the evaluated wave form section See also To retrieve more information on an imported waveform on page 199 To retrieve more information on an imported waveform 1 Select Repository Tree Waveform e g WV Matlab 2 Select View to display for example the I Q diagram or the spectrum of the signal 45 MHz 35MHz 25 MHz 15 MHz 5MH 5MHz 15 MHz 25 MHz 35 MHz 45 MHz 3 Select Level to display information concerning the level for example to measure the reference level How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms Signal Duration 560 us 56000 samples Sample Rate 100 MHz AMAS persere Jo im fe oe GE 5 Measure Reference Start Jia JAJA cmm Time 34 72 us 357 52 us l 13 91 dBFs Sample 3473 35753 For description of the provided settings see e chapter 18 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms on page 240 e chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 e chapter 18 2 Waveform Reference Level Settings on page 243 To si
256. erator gt R amp S SMW200A How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments 5 Configure the instruments settings like max RF baseband Bandwidth installed or required features etc My_RS_SMw Comment 1XRF 20 GHz 1xBW 160 MHz 1xARB with 1GSample Profile Type Custom Profile Generator R amp S SMW 200A Path a Path B RF Frequency Range Bandwidth Memory Software Opt K300 Pulse Sequencer K301 Enhanced PS Path A PathB 100 kHzto 20 GHz 100kHzto 6 GHz 160 MHz ARB or Realtime ARB or Realtime Waveform Sequence ARB or Realtime Single Emitter ARB or Realtime Emitters Collection ARB or Realtime Localized Emitters ARB or Realtime Fig 14 3 Generator Profiles understanding the displayed information 1 2 Available options and their features The list of Installed Options and the Capabilities are updated For description if the provided settings see chapter 14 2 Generator Profile Set tings on page 219 To find connected instruments and assign the generator profiles to them 1 Connect a signal generator and the PC the R amp S Pulse Sequencer software is run ning on to the LAN see figure 4 1 2 Select Menu bar gt Configure gt Instruments 3 To add an instrument perform one of the following How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments a Select Add and enter the IP address the computer name or th
257. erers on page 201 To create and verify the generated ARB waveform 1 In the Scenario dialog define the storage location for the ARB files see chap ter 3 6 2 Generating an ARB Waveform File on page 27 Name Scenario 2 Single Emitter Complex scenario auto created by wizard Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format _ Start with Reset Current Emitter BUSY Current Task E GHz Path A Emitter 1 M gt Start e fabio Camas ow E Select Start to start signal generation Select Volatile View In the Waveform View dialog select View Mode Frequency o A Q N Use the Zoom In button to change the scale on the y axis Trying Out the Software eee e esa e 8 58 Eom E Jie ma el be En 2 499 995 us div Time aoa Sample 19922 H ov Q ov Log Mag 240 0 de Phase TE Delta gt Time ra Samples v9 119 963 us is Waveform a Clock 20 MHz E Samples 99999 Time 5ms I MI n 3 1 1 1 ipe i M3 M4 1 div 9 MHz 7 MHz 5 MHz 3 MHz 1 MHz 1 MHz 3 MHz 5 MHz 7 MHz 9 MHz The Data View dialog confirms that the generated sequence consists of 5 chir ped pulses each with a PRI 1 ms The frequency variation of each pulse has the typical linear chirp shape 6 Compare the signal spectrum with the spectrum on figure 3 3 You can retrieve more information about the waveform for
258. erpolated Unit of Affected Parameter Fig 9 6 IPM with shape Profile Interpolated Shape Interpolation None S H 1 Each increment is repeated two times Pulse Count List Count 2 List Count 3 List Start 0 4 List Increment 5 Pulse Count Period Time Pulse Count 10 Sets the period of time over that the list items are equally distributed Sets the number of pulses for that the data from the list is used Remote command IPM SHAPe BAS IPM E on page 317 SHAPe PERiod on page 318 IPM SHAPe COUNt on page 317 IPM SHAPe INTerpol on page 318 Equation Defines the IPM shape as a function of IPM Profiles Settings t 0 T is the absolute time i 0 N 1 is a pulse counter where N is the maximum number of pulses Example i lt 10 5 i 0 5 Unit of Affected Parameter Profile E ic10 5 1 0 5 PI t i Equation Press Shift Enter For new line Value of Time 0 Pulse 0 dll IPM Preview Test IPM Time Series Histogram Values Bs See chapter A 2 Formula Syntax on page 398 Remote command IPM EQUation on page 314 Random List The IPM shape is a sequence of discrete values that are randomly selected from a list with user defined values dll Inter Pulse Modulation My TestScenf c amp 2 PSR_FHops Comment F1
259. esented by its HPBW See also To visualize the signal received by a static receiver on page 188 Minimum displayed level Defines the minimum displayed side lobes level Simulation Period Sets the time it takes the animation to complete a scan Lists with Multiple Emitters The Emitter Collection scenario comprises several emitters The available elements are described in a list form List of Available Emitters Properties of Selected Emitter ka Lee Las Le le lu Surveillance My EmitterGuidance My_PencilBeam My RasterScan My S1 PT Emitter Alias Name Surveillance Guidance Mode My_EmitterGuidance My_Cosecant My_Circular My_S1_PT ae Elevation te TestEmitter My_PlanarAntenna Test Antenna Scan My_TestSequence Azimuth Pattern My_PencilBeam Scan My_RasterScan Sequence My_S1_PT You can configure the following Emitter Properties List of Available Emitters cinta ali elie 185 Properties of the selected Emitter cete tt teni 186 List of Available Emitters Displays a list of emitters How to Create and Configure Emitters Use the standard functions in the context menu to add reorder or remove items See also To configure complex scenarios with several emitters on page 189 Remote command SCENario CEMit ADD on page 279 SCENario CEMit SELect on page 280 SCENario CEMit DELete on page 281 Properties of the selected Emitter Each emit
260. etrization Return values getModClock integer The default value is used automatically if this function is not implemented or the supplied value is outside the limits Range 0 to 10 GHz RST 100 MHz double PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getModulationSymbolRate void optional Queries the symbol rate The symbol rate is necessary if data is requested from the data source e g if a digital modulation is implemented or if a baseband filter is used Return values getModSymRate integer The default value is used automatically if this function is not implemented or the supplied value is outside the limits Range 0 to 10 GHz RST 0 Hz void PS_PLUGIN_EXPORTS setModulationParameter const char szType const char szValue 1024 mandatory Plugin Programming API Sets various parameters before a MOP calculation starts Parameters szType string identifies the MOP parameter mtime MOP duration Srat Sample rate used to calculate the MOP done Dummy Indicates the last MOP parameter szValue string MOP parameter value the string has to be converted int PS_PLUGIN_EXPORTS getBitsNeeded double dTime long pcStart int pcCount optional Requests a number of bits from the data source The function is called automatically by the main application before a sample is calcula ted Setting parameters dTime Time stamp of the following sample Return values pcStart Index of the first bit from t
261. example observe the Waterfall diagram display a part of the signal in greater details enable and dis play marker traces etc You find details in the following e chapter 18 1 Waveform and Data View Settings on page 240 e chapter 17 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals on page 236 3 6 6 Transferring the Waveform to and Playing it with a Connected Instrument The example configurations are theoretical cases because you will not use the soft ware alone Usually the PC with the installed software would be connected via LAN to a vector signal generator Transferring of waveforms and playing them by a signal generator is beyond the scope of these first steps For description see chapter 19 Playing the Generated Waveform Files on page 247 Trying Out the Software 3 6 7 Saving and Recalling Settings Repositories are automatically saved when you exist the application In order to clearly identify new repositories it is advisable to set a meaningful repository name before closing the application To rename the repository Your workspace shows one automatically created repository Repos 1 1 In the repository tree select Repository gt Repos 1 2 Change the name and optionally enter a comment E g enter General gt Name gt K300 and K301 Tests or a Comment gt Repository with test files To enter a new line in the comment field press SHIFT ENTER 3 Close the dialog To save the repository A
262. following figure aill IPM Mi 5 gt My a all Edit List My PW Jitter Comment e Jer ng SEERE Repetitions 1 100 101 u 1 Parameter lesa E 1 ponie ust M E 100 099u 1 L PRECII Configured is a pulse width PW pattern with 5 values 2 Open the required sequence and assign the IPM profile to the same pulse train as the PRI Jitter How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters Inter Pulse Modulation C Variable Name o Transformation y ax b Individual Values Each pulse from a set of repetitions uses a new IPM value Identical Values All pulses from a set of repetitions use the same value Restart IPM for this line item C Reset random generator Tip You can vary one pulse parameter with more than one profiles see fig ure 9 11 Configured is a pulse train consisting of 20 pulses each with different PRI value the PW pattern is applied on 5 consequent pulses and is repeated 4 times In this example the PRI varies in the range 1 1 ms to 1 15 ms the PW between 100 101 us and 100 099 us Overview of the Main Antenna Parameters 10 Defining Antenna Patterns and Antenna 10 1 Scans This section informs you about the provided antenna pattern types and antenna scan types lt also helps you select and configure a subset of antenna characteristics as basis for the emitte
263. g option with the OPT keyword This keyword defines one or multiple options that further control the output of the PDW report generator Each option line must begin with OPT and follow the syntax OPT lt Token Format Exponent gt The OPT keyword formats the numeric data output see table 1 4 A 1 2 Supported File Types and File Formats Table 1 4 Option keyword syntax description Parameter Description Token Name of the token Format The format of the numeric data is compared to a regular expression 0 9 0 9 diufFeExX To prevent e g application crash data that does not match this expression is ignored Exponent Sets an exponent to convert the numeric value e g 9 converts the reported data into nano See figure 1 1 Antenna Pattern File Formats R amp S Pulse Sequencer supports e FEKO far field file format ffe on page 393 Antenna Magus file format tsv on page 393 e ANSYS HFSS file format ffd on page 394 Antenna patterns in csv file format on page 394 e Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary antenna pattern ant pat file format on page 395 FEKO far field file format ffe FEKO is an electromagnetic simulation software tool distributed by the EM Software amp Systems S A Pty Ltd The R amp S Pulse Sequencer supports the f fe files with version V1 V2 and V3 For information on the file format see the official product page http www feko info
264. ge 6a Time period between beginning of the rising edge and pulse start 62 5 us i e the time it takes the voltage to rise from 096 to 5096 of the top level 6b Time period between end of pulse and the end of falling edge 7 62 5 us i e the time it takes the voltage to fall from 5096 to 096 of the top level You can also import a custom shape or l Q data see e To generate a pulse with raised cosine envelope shape on page 103 e To define your custom envelope shape with an equation on page 104 Per default the pulses within a pulse sequence that is built by repeating the same pulse have constant on time and PRI You can define IPM profiles to vary the pulse parameters on a pulse to pulse basis See chapter 9 2 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parame ters on page 144 To define the level parameters of a pulse Pulse level settings control the RF output power level during all pulse phases The level is determined by two main settings the Top Power and the Base Power How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings To access the level settings 1 In the repository tree select Pulse gt PulseName gt Level The tab comprises the pulse level settings required to simulate a non ideal pulse The major reasons for non ideal pulse shapes are the overshoot and ripple 2 Change the Level settings and use the Envelope Graph to visualize the pulse characteristics The Envelope
265. ge 119 To define and enable pulse repetition This examples explains how to repeat pulses several time for example to configure a pulse sequence as illustrated on figure 8 4 Fig 8 4 Example of pulse sequence composed of 2xP1 and 3xP2 where the pulses use different PRIs PRIp 2 5 ms PRIp2 5ms We assume that a sequence with two items has been created see To create a simple sequence on page 117 1 Open this sequence How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements 2 In the Sequence Description table for the first pulse select Rep Count 2 3 For the second item set Rep Count 3 We Tess Type Tarta repce M mate Atrea atea mx PR Des oq arre lle Toe Je Te o gt 7 Oz lt gt pire Im a lle D Em ode os Sms os The pulse sequence S1 consists of 5 pulses and has a PRls 20ms Use the Waveform View display to visualize the resulting waveform see chapter 18 Visualizing and Analyzing Waveforms on page 240 To define and apply a loop This examples explains how to create a loop with pulses and to repeat it several times for example to configure a pulse sequence as illustrated on figure 8 5 I PRboe PROPRE PRh2 PR JM HUE TUNE MN INN t delay A A E Fig 8 5 Example of pulse sequence composed of two sub sequences S1 and S2 S1 S2 Both sequence follow the same pulse pattern 2xP1 and 3xP2
266. ge 232 Remote command SCENario PDW PLUGin NAME on page 330 SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable CATalog on page 329 SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable SELect on page 329 SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable VALue on page 329 How to Create Test Reports This section shows how to Toenable or disable report file generation on page 264 e To set the storage location for the generated report files on page 264 e To change the report type on page 264 How to Create Test Reports To enable or disable report file generation The Scenario dialog provides information on the report logging status The related information is displayed to the right of the Comment field Sequences Collection Plugin based report is written to C My Report Files Data output is in MSW or waveform Format To enable or disable the report file generation proceed as following 1 In the Scenario dialog select Waveform Generation Config 2 In the Waveform Generation Settings dialog select Reporting gt Reporting gt Enable Disable To set the storage location for the generated report files Per default report files are stored in the user home directory of the current user that is the HOMEPATHS directory 1 Open the Scenario dialog to retrieve information on the current storage location Information is displayed to the right of the Comment field 2 Select Waveform Generation gt Config gt Reporting The parameter Target Path indicates t
267. getVariable int ilndex char szConfig 4096 optional Queries the variables to be registered Plugins can register variable sets Variables are initialized with a default value but can be changed subsequently If changed variables are sent back to the plugin before cal culation That is a plugin can be used with different configurations The function is called automatically multiple times the i Index is increased each time A 3 2 Plugin Programming API Query parameters szConfig The string of variables to be registered is composed as follows DBL lt name gt lt unit gt lt default gt lt min gt lt max gt lt dec digits gt Real Number INT lt name gt lt unit gt lt default gt lt min gt lt max gt Integer BOOL lt name gt lt default gt Boolean STR lt name gt lt default gt lt validator regexp gt String SEL lt name gt lt opt gt lt opt gt lt default index Selection Value Range of lt default index gt 0 to number of lt opt gt 1 Return values ilndex 0 Initial index When returned latter 0 indicates that there are no more varia bles to be registered gt 0 Indicates a valid variable configuration string that has to be reg istered Range 0 to 128 Example SEL Type 16 QAM 32 QAM 64 QAM 256 QAM 2 This field is named Type and lists the options 16 QAM 32 QAM 64 QAM and 128 QAM The default value is 64 QAM int PS_PLUGIN_EXPORTS setVariable int ilndex const char sz
268. gle Emitter The Emitter scenario combines a pulse train with an antenna pattern and a particu lar antenna scan type An emitter comprises several modes Each mode is defined by an antenna pattern and an antenna scan as well as multiple beams that contain the pulse train Emitters Collection The Emitter Collection scenario provides a choice of multiple emitters that can be selected manually An emitter comprises several modes Each mode is defined by an antenna pattern and an antenna scan as well as multiple beams that contain the pulse train Localized Emitters The Localized Emitters scenario combines multiple emitters and one receiver on a 2D map An emitter comprises several modes Each mode is defined by an antenna pattern and an antenna scan as well as multiple beams that contain the pulse train The receiver is defined by a single antenna pattern and scan Scenario Settings 6 2 Scenario Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Scenario The Scenario dialog provides the settings necessary to configure the signal pro cessing that is to select the signal source to create the ARB waveform to select the generator profile and to transfer the waveform The dialog provides also basic instrument control functions that are required for waveform playback and signal routing The dialog also shows an interactive block diagram of the main processing blocks together with their current settings and state
269. gt PLUGin COMMent lt Comment gt PULSe COMMent lt Comment gt PULSe MOP COMMent lt Comment gt SCAN COMMent lt Comment gt SCENario COMMent lt Comment gt SEQuence COMMent lt Comment gt WAVeform COMMent lt Comment gt REPository COMMent lt Comment gt Adds a description to the selected repository element Parameters lt Comment gt string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See Comment on page 43 ANTenna REMove lt Remove gt DSRC REMove lt Remove gt EMITter REMove lt Remove gt GENerator REMove lt Remove gt IPM REMove lt Remove gt PLUGin REMove lt Remove gt PULSe REMove lt Remove gt Commands with Similar Syntax SCAN REMove lt Remove gt SCENario REMove Remove SEQuence REMove Remove WAVeform REMove Remove REPository REMove lt File gt lt Username gt lt Passwd gt Removes the selected element from the workspace The element must not reference any child elements Remove the referenced elements first Setting parameters File string Element name as defined with the CREate Or NAME command Username string required if the repository is password protected lt Passwd gt string required if the repository is password protected Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting only Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 ASSignment GENerator PATH EM
270. gurations see e chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements on page 117 e chapter 14 Creating Generator Profiles and Configuring the Instruments on page 216 e chapter 18 3 How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with 1 Q Data on page 245 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation 7 Creating a Pulse Library 7 1 This section provides background information on pulse generation and pulse charac teristics explains the provided settings and how to use them to create a pulse library e Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse GeneratiON ooocccninnnnnnonocccnccnnccnccnnnnnnnnannncnnnon 66 e Pulse SOMOS id A ieu e Ex A REGE 68 e How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings seseeeessssss 98 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in pulse generation is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings The pulse parameters to be configured are based primarily on the IEEE 181 Standard 181 2003 For detailed descriptions refer to the standard documentation IEEE Stand ard on Transitions Pulses and Related Waveforms from the IEEE Instrumentation and Measurement I amp M Society 7 July 2003 Basic terms The definition of the pulse parameters depends on the used timing profile see Stand ard Timing Profile and distinguishes between e Power 10 50 90 e Vol
271. he selected value see figure 10 5 Antenna Pattern Settings e Omnidirectional the back lobe pattern is a hemisphere attenuated with the selected value Remote command ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ENABle on page 285 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe TYPE on page 286 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ATTenuation on page 286 2D and 3D diagrams You can visualize the antenna characteristics as 2D and 3D interactive diagrams 2D This diagram is a plot of the radiated energy measured at different angles and at a constant distance from the antenna The 2D diagram indicates the calculated HPBW and the 3 dB line The 2D diagram display the antenna pattern as a XY or XZ graph with polar or with Cartesian coordinates The polar diagram shows the main side and back lobes see fig ure 10 4 e The Cartesian diagram is useful to determine the main lobe to back lobe and main lobe to side lobes ratio Remote command PLOT POLar TYPE on page 290 PLOT POLar CUT on page 290 PLOT POLar LOG MIN on page 290 SD This diagram displays the radiated energy as a 3D model Minimum Displayed Level Defines the minimum displayed side lobes level Dipole Antenna Settings A dipole antenna is a simple antenna with a radiation pattern shaped like a toroid doughnut symmetrical about the axis of the dipole Ea V 3D Antenna View My TestScenarias gt Dipole dy eJ Z Rotation 0 Rotat
272. he current storage location Output clock Duration Features Reporting PDW Reporting Enable Target Path C My Report Files Type Plugin Plugin Report PDW M variables No Variable Value pdw_out txt 0 E 3 To change this location select the Set Path icon navigate to the directory and confirm with ok To change the report type You may prefer to store the test reports in text form if for example Microsoft Excel is not installed on your PC How to Create Test Reports To change the type of the generated reports proceed as following 1 In the Scenario dialog select Waveform Generation gt Config gt Report 2 Select Type Template 3 Select Edit to display the current template ES al 2 3 Date lt ISODATE gt 4 Repository lt REPOSITORY gt 5 Scenario lt SCENARIO gt i 6 T TOA RF PW PA MF MOP BW 8 ns GHz us dBm kHz 9 AAA mmm mm 10 HDR li lt TOA gt RF lt PW gt lt PA gt lt MF gt lt MOP gt BW 12 END OF REPORT 13 OPT lt TOA 12 0f 9 gt 14 OPT lt RF 9 6f 9 gt 15 OPT lt PW 9 3 6 gt 16 OPT lt PA 6 1f 0 gt 17 OPT lt BW 6 0f 3 gt 18 If required you can also change the used templates or create and load your plugin See e chapter A 1 1 File Format of the Reporting Template on page 390
273. he data source pcCount Number of required bits void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setBits long IStart int iCount const char cBuffer optional Answers the function getBitsNeeded and transmits the requested number bits to the plugin Return values IStart Start index of the first bit should match the pcStart value iCount Number of transmitted bits cBuffer Indicates the buffer the bits are transferred to int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS modulationCore double dTime double pdAmplitude double pdPhase short puiMkr mandatory Plugin Programming API Transforms samples into I Q data Parameters puiMkr 32 bit unsigned integer bit field marker flags Bit 0 Marker 1 Bit 12 Marker 2 Bit 3 Marker 3 Bit 4 Marker 4 Setting parameters dTime Time stamp of the sample to be calculated pdAmplitude Predefined amplitude of the last samples pdPhase Predefined phase of the last samples Default unit rad Return values pdAmplitude Amplitude calculated as sqrt i q Range 0 1 1 0 pdPhase Phase Default unit rad void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS generateDirac int pcGenl int pcGenQ optional Generates a dirac impulse in the main application for the last sample If the function is implemented it gets called after every call to modulationCore The functionality provided by this function is used if the sample returned by modulationCore is to be folded with a baseband filter This for example is required if the modulation
274. he signal type Parameters Signal BLANK CW HOLD Example see example Creating a CW segment on page 373 Manual operation See Signal on page 115 SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME Time Defiens the way the duration is defined Parameters Time FIXed EQUation Example see example Creating a CW segment on page 373 Manual operation See Time on page 115 SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME EQUation Equation Sets the filler duration as an equation Parameters Equation string Example SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME EQUation Manual operation See Time on page 115 Sequence Commands SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME FIXed Fixed Sets the duration of the filler Parameters Fixed float Range O to 3600 Default unit sec Example see example Creating a CW segment on page 373 Manual operation See Time on page 115 SEQuence ITEM FREQuency OFFSet Offset Enables a frequency offset Parameters Offset float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Default unit Hz Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See A Freq on page 111 SEQuence ITEM INDent Indent Indents theselected item rows in order to include it e g in a loop Parameters Indent float Range 0 to 5 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea
275. held high from the scenario start until the dura tion selected with the command SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURation Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Features on page 249 SCENario OUTPut MARKer SCENario DURation lt Duration gt Sets the duration of the scenario marker Parameters lt Duration gt float Range 0 to 1 Increment 1 ms Default unit sec Example see example Defining pulse and sequence markers and ena bling the global markers on page 323 Manual operation See Features on page 249 Plugin and Reporting Commands 22 13 Plugin and Reporting Commands Example Laoding plugins in the repository E UGin CREate My QAM PlugIn UGin LOAD C V PS files NQAM dll LUGin MODule AUTHor E Rohde amp Schwarz Ss LUGin MODule NAME QAM LUGin MODule TYPE MOP LUGin MODule VERSion 2 0 0 PLUGin MODule COMMent w oH CO dH ow dus 7 kgs dus hj n in SN This plugin creates a QAM modulation Parameters Rate Hz symbol rate PLUGin MODule DATA 0 Example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source SCPI ULSe CREate Custom QAM ULSe MOP ENABle 1 ULSe MOP TYPE PLUGin LUGin CATalog My QAM PlugIn CustomIPM ULSe MOP PLUGin NAME My QAM PlugIn Rate Type ULSe MOP PLUGin VARiable SELect
276. her level element provides standard func tions to e assign existing elements e create new elements e edit the existing assigned element You can access these function from the context sensitive menus of the icons listed in table 3 4 Table 3 4 Overview of the used icons and their functions Icon Name Function Description E Function Menu Smart menu with several options the name changes depending on depending on the current element the situation and situation New Item Append item Prepend item Insert Item Insert Item Before After Delete Item Clear Selection Edit Select Rename More Select Edit New de 7 Pulse Waveform Creates new repository element Antenna Pattern Antenna Scan Accesses a dialog with detailed set Y e x Sequence tings q y e Emitter interferer receiver Trying Out the Software Icon Name Function Description 3D 2D diagram 3D 2D E Xx Append item Remove item Delete Appends or removes item deletes all E Q items m Left Right Up Down Reorders items lt RA Select Selects a table row or an item for editing Enable Disable Activates or deactivates settings E per Hardcopy Print Copies current screen or dialog to au the clipboard Prints out current diagram Standard functions for elements handling Supported are the following standard direct interaction functions e
277. hots gt On e g for ink saving printing Brighter colors are used for all graphical screens instead of the ones set in the cur rent color scheme Getting Information and Help 3 Select Use custom size for screen shots instead of 800x600 gt On and set the Width and Height in number of pixel 4 Confirm with Ok The Program Settings dialog has two more tabs The settings provided on these tabs are explained in e To change the default user used to access repositories on page 52 e chapter 19 3 Signal Generator Remote Control Settings on page 252 3 8 Getting Information and Help If any questions or problems concerning the R amp S Pulse Sequencer arise an extensive online help system is provided in the software and can be consulted at any time The integrated help system provides the description of all functions The help system is context sensitive and provides information specifically for the current operation or set ting to be performed In addition general topics provide an overview on complete tasks or function groups as well as background information Calling Up Help gt To display the Help dialog for the currently focused screen element e g a setting in an opened dialog select the Help icon on the toolbar or press F1 The Help dialog is displayed A topic containing information about the focused element is displayed If no context specific help topic is available a more general topic or the
278. ibrary with Antenna Patterns and Scans More antenna elements result in a smaller beamwidth and side lobes with lower level 7 Select Antenna Pattern gt 3D to display the 3D antenna pattern Pattern Visualization The 3D view is interactive Use the mouse cursor to turn it around any of the axis and the mouse wheel to zoom in the view 8 Select Antenna Pattern gt Simulate Back Lobe gt On and Attenuation O dB 9 In the 2D view select Polar coordinates The displays confirms the antenna pattern with a back lobe where the back lobe is simulated as the mirrored pattern of the main lobe Type Mirror See figure 10 5 10 Select Antenna Pattern gt Back Lobe Attenuation 40 dB MY 20 Antenna Pattern My TestScenarios gt My PlanarAntenna S S 3 Fig 10 5 Simulate Back Lobe understanding the displayed information 1 Attenuation O dB 2 Attenuation 40 dB 1a 2a Main lobe 1b 7 Unattenuated back lobe i e the mirrored pattern of the main lobe 2b 7 Attenuated back lobe For description of the provided settings see chapter 10 2 Antenna Pattern Set tings on page 155 How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans To create an antenna scan 1 Select Repository Tree gt Antenna Scans gt New 2 Enter a name and a comment 3 Select Scan Type e g Raster Scan My RasterScan Comment raster scan Scan Type 5 20 Para
279. ier p tuer ete e ee rpg pes eta erred tn XE Cpu dei eere 375 SEQuUerice dTEM FIELer TIME EGQUIatiori s east screen teer err een erre yr tea a rrr eren E eene 375 SEQuence ITEM FIlLLerTIME FlXed ooooocococcciocccoocccocccooccoonnconcnonnncnnncconnconn nono cnn EEEE eA ETEA rere nnns nnn nin 376 SEQuericeJTEM FREQUenCcy OFFSelt teer hte te dees ne eee ee EO AAA GE 376 SEQUENCE ITEMIN DG Mt e 376 AP e e EOE EA EAE E EiS EEEE 321 SEQuencedTEM IPM ADD seo eter ex aid ra ta eee EY ox ee E ESE aer EAE 279 SEQuencaITEMAPM B irr tibia da ral E AA 321 SEQuence liTEM IPM CODUNI iore tier concesuenanesevseetusaesnesats fodeatevetacanees Lek ra EE EAE EEEE En 280 SEQuence Jd TEM IPM DEBL le iret remp e rene ot e E BEY XE Ra 281 SEQuetnice TFEM IPM MODDE rr diras 322 SEQuence ITEM IPM RANDom RESet sss enne tenen ennt EEEE EUEN ESERSE RNE 322 SEQuence ITEM IPM RESTart SEQuence lTEM UPNMESELGGE ios rrr ence im te ean e e Er erae Rain SEQuence ITEM IPM SOURce SEQuence lTEM IPM TARGeOEPARAmleler cuicos tada eed eade 313 SEQuetnce TEM IPM TARGOGUTYPE citet eedem ta bcr ba e Ern 313 SEQuence TEM IPM TARGet VARiable ooooocociccccocccooccconccooccoonccononcnn ccoo ncconcnnnnn enne nennen ennt nnne nnn ins 314 SEQuericeJiTEM LEVSel OFFSet err hr penne ter ERR VERE EP EVER KEEN KEEPER RAR 376 SEQUericedTEM EOOP COUNEPFIXed iii adicta ee erae rere Fee EE Ee inca 377 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNEtMAXimum
280. ile memory Pro gress information indicates the calculation progress The waveforms are created automatically named and stored in the selected direc tory 6 If your user rights are sufficient you can store the generated file also in the reposi tory Select Volatile gt Release to Repository 7 Select Generator Setup gt Open In this example the directory contains the Setup Info txt file and three wave froms My RS SMW PathA 1 El wv My RS SMW PathB 3 E2 wv and RS SMW PathA 4 E3 wv one for each mapped emitter Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator 8 Open the Setup Info txt file Repository My Testscenarios Scenario Localizedemitters Creator RES Date Mi 21 Jan 11 24 25 2015 Setup table Generator Path waveform File Frequency Level Trigger offset My_RS_SMw Path A My Rs sMw PathA 1 El wv 6 GHz 1 1 dem 11 082 us My_RS_sMwC Path B My_RS_SMw_PathB_3_E2 ww 6 GHz 3 54 dem 0 s RS SMW Path A RS sMw PathA 4 E3 wv 6 GHZ 46 64 mdem 7 769 us Master Emitter Interferer in table marked with asterisk should trigger all other Emitters Interferers Connect the trigger signals according to the block diagram and configure the trigger modes of the individual basebands manually Ensure that the reference clock of the signal generator with the master Emitter Interferer is distributed to all other generators 9 Follow the instructions listed in the file 10 To di
281. iles are applied whitin a sequence For more information see chapter 9 Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modulation Effects on page 127 Waveforms and Interferers Additionally to creating pulse signals you can also load waveform files and create waveform scenarios with them or even use them as interferes An interferer contains complete waveforms that can be user defined or created with the signal generation software R amp S WinlQSIM2 Interferes can be mixed with the sig nal For more information see chapter 12 Working with Waveforms and Generating Inter fering Signals on page 192 Data Source Data source defines a numerical source for the symbols used in the modulations applied on the pulse MOP For more information see chapter 15 Defining the Data Source on page 226 Plugins A plugin is an extension to the standard functions of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer For example a plugin can be a user defined MOP or IPM profile For even more flexibility plugins may contain variables If different values are assigned the same variable in the different pulses the applied MOP varies For more information see How to import and assign user defined plugins on page 232 Instruments and Generator Profiles The generator profile is a logical placeholder for a physical instrument It describes the minimum requirements that must be fulfilled so that the signal can be generated Gen erator profiles are assigned to physical
282. ing on page 301 Usage Query only Manual operation See Generator Profiles on page 251 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter LIST Queries the list of currently assigned emitters interferes to the selected path Return values lt List gt string Example see example Performing signal to generator mapping on page 301 Usage Query only Manual operation See Generator Profiles on page 251 Emitter Commands 22 9 Emitter Commands Example Creating emitters EMITter CREate My EmitterGuidance EMITter COMMent guidance amp survaillance EMITter EIRP 120 EMITter FREQuency 3e 09 EMITter MODE ADD EMITter MODE SELect 1 EMITter MODE NAME Guidance ANTenna CATalog Isotropic My PencilBeam Test CSC My PlanarAntenna Test Custom EMITter MODE ANTenna My PencilBeam SCAN CATalog Test Antenna Scan My RasterScan EMITter MODE SCAN My RasterScan EMITter MODE BEAM ADD EMITter MODE BEAM SELect 1 EMITter MODE BEAM STATe 1 SEQuence CATalog Test Sequence My S2 S1 F1_S1 F2 PT EMITter MODE BEAM SEQuence My S2 S1 F1 S1 F2 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet FREQuency 0 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet ELEVation 0 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet AZIMuth 0 Nili ec 304 EMEEIEEREQUOEIG oli 305 EMITtGEMODE AN TFI circa eoc e cota etae rape nr eR dali traida 305 EMITterr MODE BEAM OFFSeEAZIMUIP iciatis adan Ponce abo End erede 305 EMITter MODE BEAM OFFSet ELEVation ccccccssce
283. ing Edge 100 us Width 9c 500 us see Standard Timing Profile 10 Reference value used by the calculation of the pulse level parameters Ref 0 dB 1 Watt the value is set with the parameter Ref Level Use the following parameters to define the power amplitude pulse parameters AMENA aida 73 OO NETTE RIDERS SEE 74 xls m O 75 Attenuation Simulates changes in the pulse amplitude Pulse Settings Top Power The pulse top power is used as a reference 100 to determine other parameter values such as the rising falling thresholds Typically the Top Power uses a little or no attenuation such as 0 dB See also figure 7 1 Base Power The pulse base power is used as a reference 096 to determine other parameter values such as the rising falling thresholds Typically the Base Power uses a high attenuation such as 100 dB You can change this value if you use a 0 100 profile The difference between the Top Power and the Base Power is the pulse amplitude Droop Droop is a measure for the amplitude change from the beginning to the end of the pulse The percentage ratio values are calculated in W A positive value decreases the amplitude Fig 7 5 Illustration of the effect of the amplitude droop Profile 0 100 1 Droop 10 W Remote command PULSe LEVel 0ON on page 337 PULSe LEVel OFF on page 337 PULSe LEVel DROop on page 337 Overshoot Simulates that the signal exc
284. ing a Suitable Scenario and Creating Scenarios This section explains the provided scenario types and helps you select the scenario most fitting to your current task 6 1 Overview of the Available Scenarios and Their Com plexity The R amp S Pulse Sequencer supports six scenarios with different complexity Select the scenario most fitting your test case Single Sequence The Single Sequence scenario is used to create sequences from individual pulses Pulse parameters include the pulse envelope modulation on pulse MOP carrier frequency and level The sequence editor defines the order in which the pulses are generated and also adds control elements such as loops and fillers Inter pulse modulation profiles can be applied to vary pulse parameters Sequences Collection The Sequences Collection scenario is used to create multiple sequences which can be selected in arbitrary order Pulse parameters include the pulse envelope modulation on pulse MOP carrier frequency and level The sequence editor defines the order in which the pulses are generated and also adds control elements such as loops and fillers Inter pulse modulation profiles can be applied to vary pulse parameters Waveform Sequence The Waveform Sequence combines individual waveforms to one joint waveform or to one multi segment waveform The sequence editor defines the order of the indi vidual waveforms and adds control structures such as loops and fillers Sin
285. ing the Wizard to Create a Complex Scenario sss 30 e Transferring the Waveform to and Playing it with a Connected Instrument 33 e Saving and Recalling Settings ssssssssssessseseeeneeeen nnn 34 e Advanced Features and Examples 3 per a ira esee aai 34 3 6 1 Completing the Scenario that was Automatically Created upon Start Up We assume that you have started the software as described in chapter 3 3 Starting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time on page 18 Your workspace should resemble the one shown on figure 3 1 see section chapter 3 4 Understanding the Displayed Information on page 19 Your repository contains e Pulse 1 an unmodulated pulse with pulse width of 100 us and rise and fall times set to zero e Sequence 1 a sequence containing one single pulse Pulse 1 This pulse is processed once Rep Count 1 and has a pulse repetition interval PRI 3 ms To create a sequence with 10 pulses each having a PRI of 1 ms 1 In the repository tree select Scenario Sequence 1 2 In the Sequence Description table select a Rep Count 10 b PRI 2 1 ms Sequence 1 Comment Sequence Type Created by wizard Pulce Based The sequence type can only be changed empty sequences Sequence Description SAHHA No Nesting Type Puer RepCrt PM Maker Atrea Aie Prase Pri Dery dar Sakea de
286. instruments For more information see chapter 14 Creating Generator Profiles and Configuring the Instruments on page 216 See also chapter 19 Playing the Generated Waveform Files on page 247 Repository Settings 9 Organizing the Project Data in Repositories 5 1 This section explains the basic repository concept and informs you briefly how the soft ware data base is built An introduction to the concept of elements handling is provided in Creating elements on page 23 Repository Settings The repository tree shows the content of the currently loaded repositories To access the repository settings gt In the project tree double click on the repository name Available are the following settings General Repository Settings cedet dido 42 COMMON ccce eee rete preter Pete edet A 43 Mi CAE SD 43 ep M N 44 General Repository Settings The General Settings tab provides general information like the name of the author and the date of creation General comment Users storage Name My_TestScenarios Author Created Version 25 aun 2014 15 27 04 2 0 Security Level Complexity Level O Basic K300 without emitters A Advanced K301 with emitters antennas interferers The complexity level cannot be changed back once advanced features are used in the repository Name When a new repository is created it is named automatically but y
287. ion esee ene nnne nhe 305 EMI Tt r MODE BEAM OFF Set FREQUTIC coe t errant trennt n Eater n nda 305 EMITter MODE BEAM SELGGl irri re Ecc Ha Ere Ee OE deca i Dae VR ose p YA 280 EMIMEeERMODE BEAM SEQUENCE eorr ten ttr rte reta inlet RE cos repo etc 305 EMITter MODE BEAM STATe EMITter MODE GLEBr uii nu dani nr Pere cer D rear i ea e Pe ang EA FIETSE EMITTED COU INGE seo sete toa 280 EMITter MODE DELete EMITter MODE NAME EMITter MODE SCAN EMITte MODE SCAN CUE comcel 282 EMITter MODE SEL6CL ide ret reor tei age e e ei ea t ern o Eon eu DE EA 280 elytris rt 277 EMITIERREMOVE sio a ata 278 PP voteescs GENerator CAPabilities GENE raton CA alg ss icon 276 ISG E Ne rato OMIM Gases T 278 GEN rator CRE AtC viril daa rA eth eae p uer ul E pide tet di 277 GENeraton LOCK occiso aabt 308 O 277 GENGratorOP p AA id advance Ia 308 GENerator REMove elei R feiz cidcm INSTRUMe NUADD ME CERE INS Tr ment CAP AUS 2st See ccs socorrer 308 INSTrument CUE AM eicere rtr vteon eared 281 int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS calculateNextlpMValUeC eee eee eee cence eee cece nono nan c cnn a nana nc cnn rennen 409 IntPS PEUGINCEXPOR
288. ion 0 EJ simulate Backlobe Attenuation 30 de Parameters No settings for Hertz dipole required Parabolic Antenna Settings A parabolic antenna has a curved surface with the cross sectional shape of a parabola with a user defined Diameter Typically a parabolic antenna radiates the power in a narrow main lobe along the antenna s Y axis Antenna Pattern Settings Parabol ic Remote command ANTenna MODel PARabolic DIAMeter on page 288 Gaussian Antenna Settings An antenna with radiation pattern that follows the Gaussian distribution The main parameter is the HPBW that specifies the angular width within which the antenna is most sensitive inna View My TestScenarios gt My PencilBesm cs My_PencilBeam Comment z Remote command ANTenna MODel GAUSsian HPBW on page 288 Sin x x Antenna Settings An antenna with radiation pattern that follows the Sin x x distribution The antenna is characterized by the HPBW Remote command ANTenna MODel SINC HPBW on page 288 Antenna Pattern Settings Pyramidal Horn Antenna Settings A pyramidal horn antenna has a horn shape in the form of a four sided pyramid and a rectangular cross section The length of the rectangular sides Length X Length Z are user definable 7 3D Antenna View My_TestScenarios gt Isotropic
289. ion scenario or open an existing one e g Multi pleEmitters See for example To create a single pulse train scenario on page 64 How to Create and Configure Emitters name MultipleEmitters Emitters Collection Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform Format Upload to VSG gt oO R5 5MW 9 o me La 9 2 In the block diagram select Emitters gt Edit The Multiple Emitter dialog opens 3 Use the standard New function and insert the first emitter in the list You can select from the list of available emitters or create a new one See also To create and configure a new emitter on page 186 4 Configure the emitter settings like for example enter an alias name 5 In the list of emitters select a Emitter and use the standard New Append Remove and Up Down functions to add emitters to the list and reorder them List of Available Emitters Properties of Selected Emitter arcas Surveillance My EmitterGuidance My PencilBeam My RasterScan My S1 PT Emitter My EmitterGuidan v Guidance Mode Geeks v My EmitterGuidance My Cosecant My Circular My S1 PT Beam Beam2 Jy Elevation te TestEmitter My_PlanarAntenna Test Antenna Scan My_TestSequence Azimuth Pattern My PencilBeam Scan My RasterScan Sequence My S1 PT 6 In the Scenario dialog select the emitter that is currently transmitting e g Sur
290. ion Antenna The antenna characterizes the radiation pattern of the Emitter ARB Arbitrary Waveform Generator An I Q modulation source forming an integral part of the supported signal generators The ARB allows the playback and output of any externally calculated modulation signal in the form of waveform file as well as the generation of multi carrier or multi segment signals from waveform files ASK Amplitude shift keying modulation ASR Airport Surveillance Radar AWGN Additive white gaussian noise Barker Special sequences codes that assures phase modulated signals with low autocorrelation properties Boresight Antenna boresight is the direction to which an antenna shows the maxi mum gain BPSK Binary phase shift keying modulation BW Bandwidth C BPSK BPSK modulation with a constant envelope Chirp Signal in which the frequency varies over the time CW Continuous wave signal that is an unmodulated signal DQPSK Differential QPSK DUT Device under test EIRP Equivalent isotopically radiated power Emitter In the context of this software emitters emulate radar systems EW Electronic warfare F FFT Fast Fourier transform FM Frequency modulation FSK Frequency shift keying modulation G Gain Antenna gain is a measure of the antenna s ability to concentrate electromag netic energy in a narrow beam GUI Graphical User Interface H HPBW Half Power Beam Width l Inter Pulse Modulation IPM Intra
291. ios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver The diagram visualizes the required connections The sign indicates the signal generator that acts as a master instrument 4 Provide all other instruments with the reference frequency and the trigger signal of the master signal generator See also To create load and play the waveforms of a 2D scenario automatically on page 255 14 Creating Generator Profiles and Configuring the Instruments Files generated by the R amp S Pulse Sequencer can be transferred to and played by remotely connected signal generators The connection between the software and the signal generator is configured with the following steps e Create a generator profile The generator profile is a logical placeholder for a physical instrument It describes the minimum requirements that must be fulfilled so that the signal can be gener ated When a new empty repository is created one default generator profile is created too e Configure a physical instruments Generator profiles are assigned to physical instruments e Assign a generator profile to the scenario Instrument Configuration Settings 14 1 Instrument Configuration Settings To access these settings gt Select Menu bar gt Configure gt Instruments Path A Path B Path A Path B Range 100 kHzto 6 GHz 100kHzto 6 GHz Range 100kHzto 6 GHz 100 kHzto 6 GHz Baseband Baseband Bandwidth 160 MHz 160 MHz Bandwidth 160 MHz 160 MHz Memory 1024 MS
292. irst GPIB card that is installed GPIBO Add Adds an instrument manually If an instrument with the selected IP address computer name or complete VISA resource string exists it is added to the list of instruments Remote command INSTrument ADD on page 308 Refresh Standard edit function List of connected instruments Displays information on all known and previously configured instruments like the used remote control interface firmware version and status information on the performed capabilities check e Select Profile to change the profile the connected instrument is compared to See To find connected instruments and assign the generator profiles to them on page 222 e To update an instrument on Refresh select its checkbox Disable an instrument in the list if it is temporarily unavailable but should not be deleted from the list If you disable an instrument that is currently being used in one of the scenarios this scenario is configured to store the calculated waveform as an ARB file See also Load ARB File on page 59 Double click on an instrument to change the displayed Comment Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 280 INSTrument MAP on page 309 INSTrument COUNt on page 280 INSTrument FIRMware on page 309 INSTrument STATus on page 309 Generator Profile Settings Device Capabilities Profile Capabilities A side to side overview of the provided and required capabilities Remote comm
293. it cannot be edited manually in the software Parameters Lock ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 INSTrument CAPabilities GENerator CAPabilities lt Capabilities gt Queries the generator capabilities regarding supported scenario types and processing of waveforms and multi segment files Parameters lt Capabilities gt string Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Manual operation See Capabilities on page 221 INSTrument ADD lt Add gt Adds an instrument wit hthe specified IP address computer name or the VISA resource string Setting parameters lt Add gt string lt IP_Address gt or lt Computer_Name gt or lt GPIB_Address gt Generator Profiles and Instruments Commands Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add on page 218 INSTrument FIRMware Queries the firmware version of the selected instrument Return values Firmware string Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Usage Query only Manual operation See List of connected instruments on page 218 INSTrument MAP Map Maps a selected generator s profile to the selected instrument Use the command INSTrument STATus to query the status of the performed capa bilities check Parameters Map string existing generator profile Use the com
294. itial orientation after com pleting the last turn Direction Sets the direction clockwise CW or counter clockwise CCW the antenna is turning in Remote command SCAN SPTRal ROUNds on page 296 SCAN SPIRal STEP on page 297 SCAN SPTRal RTIMe on page 296 SCAN SPTRal RETRace on page 295 SCAN SPIRal ROTation on page 292 Lobe Switching Scan Settings A lobe switching antenna uses two or four slightly separated antenna elements 8 3D Scan View My TestScenarios gt Test Antenna Scan ele Test Antenna Scan Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization Pattern Visualization Gaussian pattern A RT 4ms C scan Line C Pattern Minimum displayed Level vom bo E Parameters Lobes 4 Y Squint Angle 10 Direction Horizontal v Dwell Time 1ms Lobes Set the number of lobes Direction Sets the switching direction i e horizontal or vertical Squint Angle Sets the angle that the beam axis is offset from the tracking axis i e the y axis of the antenna Dwell Time Sets the antenna motion i e how fast the switches between the lobes How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans Direction Sets the direction clockwise CW or counter clockwise CCW the antenna is turning in Remote command SCAN LSW LOBes on page 294 SCAN LSW DIRection on page 294 SCAN LSW SQUint on page 294 SCAN LSW DWEL1 on page 294 SCAN LSW ROTation on page 292
295. itory is currently opened by another user with explicit write access e insufficient user right for the particular repository e insufficient user right on the file system directory the repository is stored in Try out to e wait until the repository has been closed and try to obtain exclusive write permis sion see To obtain write permission on a repository on page 50 change your current user or use a user with different role see To change the default user used to access repositories on page 52 e login as user with sufficient write access rights on the file system Remote command REPManager CATalog on page 353 Load Loads and displays the selected repository in the workspace See To load a repository on page 49 Remote command REPManager LOAD on page 354 Export Exports the selected repository to an archive file See To create and export a repository archive on page 50 Remote command REPManager EXPort on page 355 Copy to Copies the selected repository to a new location The R amp S Pulse Sequencer will automatically copies all relevant files and data base elements Discard Discards the entire repository from the permanent mass storage if e the current user has write permission see table 5 1 the repository is not opened by another user with write permission Remote command REPManager DISCard on page 354 Refresh Refreshes the list of found repository files Add Path Add I
296. its rise on and fall time you can use your custom enve lope shape My TestPulse Timing Level MOP Marker General A Custom Envelope More _ Standard Profile Custom envelopes are described in one of the following ways e Asan equation see Envelope Definition as an Equation on page 76 e Asa function of imported l Q data see Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data on page 77 Both ways affect the level versus time and can be used with any kind of modulation MOP Custom envelopes are multiplied with the existing pulse shape as defined with the timing parameters The software maps the custom envelope to the pulse shape Envelope Definition as an Equation sss 76 Envelope Definition as a Function form Imported Data 77 Envelope Definition as an Equation Envelope is described by an equation as selected with the parameter Preset Pulse Settings Use Equation Preset Equation Raised Cosine Pulse Value of PI 3t T Tr Tw TF defines total pulse time Rise Time Pulse Width 0 5 1 cos 2 PI t T Fal Time Tr Tw TF Time 0 T Press Shift Enter For new line The software provides a selection of envelope shapes Upon selection the dialog dis plays the used equation as well as information on the used parameters and variables For description of the provided envelope functions see Equations and parameters used to define custom pulse envelopes
297. l SGANIRAS TO RREMRACO icti rod ist PI ATE DERE SCAN RASTer UNIDirection SGAN RAS Ter WID Thor addon SCAN REMOVO SCAN SECTOREELY Back iana e A A VE eM NONIUS SCAN SECTor NELevation SCAN SECTORNODDINS etre tenetur Ere Ve Y EU ke eue nue FATE E ote SGAN SEGTOEUNRAT ctt rrr E e VC ARA KERN SCANISEGTOEPAPMSGE ii tierce eripe isa SCAN SECTORPIRAT Cie SCAN SECTORPSQUIN Evitar AA Aa A ia SCAN SECTORRA Escocia iaa SCAN SECTor UNIDirection a SCAN SECTORWIDT ics ttr etre pee pr A anes AA As SCAN SEG lluna aii pl pa is ii SCAN SPIRaERETERAOCGO AM E oo PA EE EEEE EEEE SCAN SPIRalBROTOALIOFL coria Rca SCAN SPIRalROUN OS civic rica dean iiec cc ATERS EREE SCAN SPIRal STEP SCENAMO CA Tal iii dla 276 iie irexeis sp 279 SGENario CEMItALIas crcen rer rtp tne taaan 363 SGENario CEMit CURRent irae ertt rere rae Ye nn 363 iier NE o 0l 11 c UR 281 SCENario CEMit DIREction BEARIN asarana a ra 364 SCENAario CEMit DlIRection ELEVatiON cccococococccnncnonononncnnononononnnnonnnonnnnnononnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnncnnannnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnos 364 SCENario CEMit EMITter SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE
298. l 2 Clear Selection Set to Min Append Newltem Set to Max Insert Item Before Selection Set Step from Csr Insert Item After Selection Copy SCENario FREQuency Remove Selected Items Copy SCENario FREQuency 3e 09 1 Context menu of an icon 2 Context menu of a parameter Tooltips Tooltips indicate the possible value range of a parameter or list overview information on current settings 3 5 Means of Users Interaction r Rising edge time The MOP is generated from the beginning Min 0s O the rising edge until the end of the falling edge Max 3 6 ks Step 1s 1 Tooltip of a setting parameter indicating the allowed value range 2 Tooltip with detailed information on a setting Dialog names The name of a dialog indicates its content or the functionality this dialog covers The used naming convention helps you to recognize which data base element you are con figuring to which scenario does it belong and what is its current name lt Repository Element Scenario Name gt Function Name 1 Repository element 2 Scenario name 3 Function name Interactive 3D displays Several dialogs display the configured settings as 2D or as interactive 3D models or full 3D antenna radiation patterns Turning the mouse wheel zooms in and out on these dialogs Moving the mouse while holding the left mouse key rotates the 3D view around its origin Means of Users Interaction This chapter p
299. l generators Select Connection diagram On define the master device connect the instruments as illustrated on the diagram For detailed description see chapter 19 4 2 How to Play the Waveforms of Emitter Based 2D Scenarios on page 255 To delete wavefroms form the hard disk of the signal generator If the waveforms uploaded on the vector signal generator are no longer required they can be deleted automatically form the R amp S Pulse Sequencer 1 Open the Scenario dialog 2 In the context menu of the Upload to VSG block select Sanitize and select e g This Scenario Upload to VSG O RS SMW 9 Q gt Target gt e RFA Select gt Clear New Edit Sanitize gt This Scenario Entire Repository All Pulse Sequencer The waveforms belonging to the current scenario are deleted from the hard disk of the signal generator 19 4 2 How to Play the Waveforms of Emitter Based 2D Scenarios To create load and play the waveforms of a 2D scenario automatically 1 Open a test scenario with Scenario Type gt Localized Emitters e g LocalizedE mitters Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator see chapter 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver on page 209 2 Select Upload to VSG gt Target gt Generator 3 Select Upload to VSG gt Assign Emitters 4 Drag amp Drop an Emitter Interferer to assign its signal to a gener
300. lated pulse SCPI ULSe CREate P 1 ULSe CATalog Pi ULSe SELect P 1 ULSe COMMent PW 100us ULSe TIME REFerence FULL ULse TIME WIDTh 100 us LSe TIME RISE 10 us ULSe TIME FALL 10 us ULSe TYPE RISE LINear ULSe TYPE FALL LINear ULSe MOP ENABle 0 ULSe MOP EXCLude ENABle 0 remane the pulse ULSe NAME P1 W c UU U U U U U U U U Uu U c Pulse Commands Example Creating a linear chirp pulse SCPI ULSe CREate LinearChirp ULSe CUSTom 0 ULSe TIME REFerence POWer ULSe TIME RISE 1e 05 ULSe TYPE RISE RCOSine ULSe TIME WIDTh 0 0001 LSe TIME FALL 1e 05 ULSe TYPE FALL RCOSine ULSe LEVel ON O ULSe LEVel OFF 100 ULSe LEVel DROop 1 ULSe RIPPle 0 ULSe RIPPle FREQuency 50000 MU U U U U U U U U U UU uU c ULSe MOP ENABle 1 ULSe MOP TYPE CHIRP ULSe MOP CHIRp TYPE UP LSe MOP CHIRp DEViation 5e 06 ULSe MOP EXCLude MODE LEVel ULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STARt 25 ULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STOP 25 vu vu w Uv DU uU c Example Creating a FM step pulse SCPI ULSe CREate FM Step ULSe TIME REFerence FULL ULSe TIME RISE 0 ULSe TIME WIDTh 0 000125 ULSe TIME FALL 0 ULSe LEVel ON 0 ULSe LEVel OFF 100 ULSe MOP EXCLude MODE WIDTh vu UU ov Do Uo Do U ULSe MOP ENABle 1 ULSe MOP COMMent fstart 50 MHz fend 50 MHz Df 25 MHz N 5 ULSe MOP TYPE FMSTep ULSe MOP FMSTep ADD ELect 1 URation 2 49999993684469e 05 REQuency 50000000 DD ULSe MOP FMSTep LSe
301. lation scheme to a pulse 1 In the repository tree select Pulse gt PulseName gt MOP 2 Select MOP gt Settings 3 Select MOP gt MOP Type gt Plugin 4 Select Plugin and select a loaded user defined modulation scheme e g My QAM PlugIn Comment 16 QAM 5 Select Pulse gt PulseName gt MOP gt Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP gt On 6 Use the Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse settings to determine the exact pulse part the modulation is applied to To assign the user defined IPM profile 1 Import a suitable plugin IPM Stagger Comment PRI Stagger Inter Pulse Mod 1 0 0 Rohde amp Schwarz 2 Inthe repository tree select Inter Pulse Mods gt IPM Name 3 Select Profile Plugin 4 Select Plugin and select a loaded user defined IPM profile e g IPM Stagger PRI Stagger Comment Plugin creates values between 2 5 and 2 5 Unit of Affected Parameter Tel vw Pun No verable ala ree gt roo 5 Select 2D to visualize the IPM profile 6 Ifrequired change the values of the used variables and observe the effect on the 2D diagram 17 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals Markers signals or markers are binary signals that are additionally generated and added to the generated signal Markers are commonly used to synchronize a device under test DUT or a spectrum analyzer to the generated signal for example to th
302. le on page 229 22 8 Emitter to Generator Mapping Commands DSRC ITEM TYPE Type Sets the data type of selected item Parameters Type PATTern PRBS USER Example see example Creating data source on page 299 Manual operation See Data Source Table on page 229 Emitter to Generator Mapping Commands Example Performing signal to generator mapping SCPI ASSignment GENerator LIST My RS SMBV RS SMW Connected My RS SMW ASSignment GENerator SELect My RS SMW ASSignment GENerator CAPabilities RFA 2e 10 BWA 1 6e 08 MEMA 1e 09 SWA K300 K301 RFB 6e 09 BWB 1 2e 08 MEMB 6 4e 07 SWB K300 ASSignment GENerator PATH LIST ASSignment GENerator PATH SELect Path A ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter LIST 11 E3 ASSignment EMITters LIST El E2 ASSignment EMITters SELect E2 ASSignment GENerator PATH SELect Path A ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter ADD ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter LIST ff Xi E2 E3 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter SEL I1 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter DELete ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter LIST E2 E3 ASSignment EMITters LIST 11 El Emitter to Generator Mapping Commands ASS MEN EMULE A aaa n 302 ASSignmenbt GENeraler IST coco 302 ASSignment GENerator CAPabilities caesis enne nennen nnne 302 ASSignmehtGENerator PATEEBIST S iicet eee te RE t tear 302 ASSignment GENerator
303. le extension pwd Pulse Sequencer PDU Report Date 2014 11 28T10 41 25 Repository My TestScenarios Scenario SimplePulseTrain TOA RF PW PA MF MOP BW ns GHz us dBm kHz o 3 000000 120 000 0 0 O NONE 0 2500000 3 000000 120 000 0 0 O NONE Dl 5000000 3 000000 220 000 0 0 O NONE Oo 10000000 3 000000 220 000 0 0 O NONE 0 15000000 3 000000 220 000 D 0 O NONE Oo 22000000 2 999500 120 000 10 0 O NONE Oo 24500000 2 999500 120 000 10 0 O NONE Oo 25000000 2 999500 220 000 10 0 O NONE 0 30000000 2 999500 220 000 10 0 O NONE Dl Fig 20 1 Example of a text report file Type gt Template e User defined plugin Reporting Settings This reporting creates reports according to custom templates like DFS DIV8 PDW etc You may for example create a Microsoft Excel plugin for example that retrieves the pulse parameters and it fills them in a spread sheet For detailed description of the file formats the template and the plugin see e chapter A 1 1 File Format of the Reporting Template on page 390 e chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 e chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Status information on whether report logging is enabled or not is displayed in the Sce nario dialog See also chapter 20 2 How to Create Test Rep
304. lect Repository Tree gt Scenario gt New b In the Toolbar select the scenario icon A scenario wizard opens that helps you to select a predefined scenario configura tion sins ENT Scenario Type The Sequence scenario is used to create sequences from individual pulses Pulse parameters include the pulse envelope modulation on pulse MOP carrier frequency and level The sequence editor defines the order in which the pulses are generated and also adds control Single Sequence M elements such as loops and fillers Inter pulse modulation profiles can be applied to vary pulse parameters Sequence Waveform Generator PULSE PULSE u 31 3 BD create Cancel Select Scenario Type gt Single Sequence The dialog displays a short description of the current scenario See also chapter 6 1 Overview of the Available Scenarios and Their Complexity on page 53 Confirm with Create Created is a new scenario with default name Scenario lt n gt where n is a number starting at one The provided settings depend on the selected scenario type and are described in chapter 6 2 Scenario Settings on page 54 Add information to describe and identify the scenario like a name or a comment Use the standard functions in the context menus to select or create new sequen ces select the signal generator etc How to Select and Create a Test Scenario See table 3 4 Perform further confi
305. llustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The shown values may not represent realistic test situations The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 2 Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer The R amp S Pulse Sequencer is a software that generates complex pulse signals by using predefined configurable test scenarios with different complexity You can simu late the signals of different emitter and receiver configurations including antennas and scan types The signal can be played by the instruments listed below for example to perform radar receiver tests e R amp S SMW e R amp S SMBV e R amp S SGT The R amp S Pulse Sequencer software is a stand alone PC based application that cre ates waveform files This software is available for free download on the R amp S website Pulse Sequencer features e ARB based signal generation e Multi segment waveform sequencing e Pulse shape definition with rise and fall time droop ripple overshoot e Modulation on pulse with all major formats like chirps Barker Codes Polyphase Codes PSKs AM FM e Single pulse pulse train generation with repetition count per pulse e Inter pulse modulation of amplitude phase frequency etc values from pulse to pulse e Internal and e
306. ltiple samples are represented by one screen point See also chapter 18 2 Waveform Reference Level Settings on page 243 Remote command SCENario VOLatile VIEW YMODe on page 386 Units Sets the units time or samples used on the x axis Remote command SCENario VOLatile VIEW XMODe on page 386 Waveform and Data View Settings Zoom in out Zooms in and out e changes the resolution on the x and y axis Remote command SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt on page 386 SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM RANGe on page 387 Marker traces In each of the view modes enable Marker gt On to display the up to four marker traces M1 to M4 See also chapter 17 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals on page 236 Duration Samples Sets the number of displayed signal samples e g to display only a part of the entire waveform The Waveform Viewer displays a maximum of 100000 Samples to visualize a longer part of a waveform you can reduce the clock rate used by the calculation see Clock Duration Time line The length of the timeline symbolizes the play time of the entire waveform The blue slider indicates the area of the waveform that is currently visible The red dots indicate the time that corresponds to the mouse position The current time is also displayed numerically above the timeline A left mouse click adjusts the viewport center position to the selected time Slide the blue slider to shift the visible waveform are
307. lugin and Reporting Commands Parameters lt Path gt string Example see example Generating reports on page 327 Manual operation See Target Path Set Path on page 262 SCENario PDW TYPE Type Sets the template used be the reporting function Parameters Type DEFault TEMPlate PLUGin Manual operation See Type on page 262 SCENario PDW PLUGin NAME Name Selects and loads a reporting template This template must exist in the Plugin library To query a list of availabel plugins use the command PLUGin CATalog Parameters Name string Example see example Generating reports on page 327 Manual operation See Plugin and Plugin Variables on page 263 SCENario PDW TEMPlate Template Edits the selected template Parameters Template string Pulse Commands Example SCPI SCENario PDW TEMPlate Pulse Sequencer PDW Report Date lt ISODATE gt Repository lt REPOSITORY gt Scenario lt SCENARIO gt TOA RF PW PA MF MOP BW ns GHz us dBm kHz HDR lt TOA gt RF lt PW gt PA lt MF gt lt MOP gt lt BW gt END OF REPORT OPT TOA 12 0 9 OPT lt RF 9 6f 9 gt OPT PW S SIfi 6 OPT lt PA 6 1f 0 gt OPT lt BW 6 0f 3 gt Manual operation See Edit Template on page 262 22 14 Pulse Commands The following are examples on how to create and configure pulses in remote environ ment Example Creating an unmodu
308. m on page 134 Sets the waveform period Parameters lt Period gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Default unit sec Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 IPM WAVeform PKPK lt Pkpk gt Sets the value range of the linear ramp profile or the period of the sine profile Parameters lt Pkpk gt float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Default unit sec Example see Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles Manual operation See Waveform on page 134 SEQuence ITEM IPM A A SEQuence ITEM IPM B B Sets the paramters a and b of the transformation y a x b Parameters B float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Transformation on page 143 Marker Commands SEQuence ITEM IPM MODE Mode Defines the way the variations are applied on repeating pulses Parameters Mode INDividual SAME Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Repetition on page 143 SEQuence ITEM IPM RANDom RESet Reset Resets the start seed of random generator Parameters Reset ON OFF 1 0 Example see Assigning an IPM profile to a sequence Manual operation See Restart on page 144 SEQuence ITEM IPM RESTart Restart Restarts the IPM for this sequence line item Parameters Restart ON OFF 1 0 Example see Assigning an
309. m supported baseband bandwidth Memory Extension Sets the total available ARB memory Remote command see GENerator OPTion on page 308 Software Options Selects the installed required pulse sequence options e g K300 Pulse Sequencer or K301 Enhanced PS The Capabilities is updated and displays information on e which scenario types are supported with this particular combination of features e whether the generated waveform file can be processed as an ARB file Installed Options An overview of the installed instruments options Remote command GENerator OPTion on page 308 Capabilities An overview of the generator capabilities regarding supported scenario types and pro cessing of waveforms and multi segment files Remote command GENerator CAPabilities on page 308 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments Configure the remotely connected instrument connections first see e To create a new custom generator profile on page 221 To find connected instruments and assign the generator profiles to them on page 222 Toretrieve the profile of the connected generator on page 224 e To assign a connected instrument to a scenario on page 225 To create a new custom generator profile 1 Select Repository Tree gt Generator Profiles gt New 2 Enter a name and add a comment 3 Select Profile Type Custom Profile 4 Set the type of used signal generator e g Gen
310. mand GENerator CATalog to query the existing profiles Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Manual operation See List of connected instruments on page 218 INSTrument STATus Queries the status of the performed capabilities check Return values Status 011 0 status check fails the instrument capabilities are not sufficient for the selected generator s profile To check the capabilities use the commands 1 NSTrument CAPabilities and GENerator CAPabilities 1 status check passed Example see example Creating generator s profile on page 307 Usage Query only Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Manual operation See List of connected instruments on page 218 22 11 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example Using list and wavefrom type IPM profiles SCPI IPM CREate My PRI Stagger PM COMMent List 600 us 750 us 910 us IPM UNIT SEConds IPM TYPE LIST PM LIST ITEM ADD IPM LIST ITEM SELect 1 IPM LIST ITEM VALue 0 0006 IPM LIST ITEM REPetitions 1 IPM LIST ITEM COUNt 1 IPM LIST ITEM ADD IPM LIST ITEM SELect 2 IPM LIST ITEM VALue 0 00075 IPM LIST ITEM COUNt 2 IPM LIST SAVE C _PS files IPM PRI Stagger txt IPM LIST CLEar load an existing ASCII file IPM LIST LOAD C PS files IPM PRList txt IPM CREate Stagger PRI IPM UNIT SEConds IPM TYPE WAVeform PM WAVeform TYPE SINE IPM WAVeform OFFSet 0 0004 IPM WAVeform PHASe 0 PM
311. me periods during that the RF power is attenuated or totally suppressed but per default there is modulation or data content present Note Avoiding data truncation To avoid truncation of data during the rising time add guard bits to the data source Per default modulation is already present during the rising and falling phases You can restrict the pulse area on that the modulation is applied see Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse on page 80 Pulse Settings 7 2 3 Pulse Level Settings To access these settings gt Select Pulse gt Level My_TestPulse 100 us div E s o s Fig 7 4 Pulse Level understanding the displayed information 1 Pulse top power corresponds to 1000mW Pulse Envelope Watt i e little or no attenua tion Attenuation Top Power 0 dB 2 Base Power i e high attenuation typically 100 dB 3 Amplitude change from the beginning to the end of the pulse ON time 4 Overshoot level in Volt diagram uses Watts 5 Damping constant that influences the time it takes the overshoot to decay 6 Amplitude of the oscillating signal in Volt diagram uses Watts 7 Signal oscillating with the selected frequency Frequency 10 kHz i e the oscillation period is 100 us 8 Pulse amplitude units Y axis units 9a 9b Pulse timing Profile gt Standard 0 100 Rising Edge Fall
312. meters Scan Rate sls Tums 8 Step Angle ES Retrace Time is Direction CW M Scan Rate deg s Defines how fast the antenna is turning Step Angle deg Sets the step width the antenna azimuth is changing Turns Sets the number of 360 turns the antenna performs Retrace Time Defines how fast the antenna returns to its initial orientation after completing the last turn Direction Sets the direction clockwise CW or counter clockwise CCW the antenna is turning in Remote command SCAN HELical RPM on page 293 SCAN HELical ELEVation STEP on page 293 SCAN HELical TURNs on page 293 SCAN HELical RETRace on page 295 SCAN HELical ROTation on page 292 Spiral Scan Settings A spiral antenna scan turns in a circle scans 360 and performs several scans with different radiuses Antenna Scans Settings Test Antenna Scan Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization Pattern Visualization Gaussian pattern Comment RT 550 ms C scan Line Pattern Minimum displayed Level gem bo E seus Parameters Rounds 5 Round Time 100 ms Angular Step 50 Retrace Time soms und Rounds Sets the number of rounds the antenna performs Angular Step Sets the distance in degrees with that the scan radius is increased Round Time Defines how fast the antenna is turning Retrace Time Define how fast the antenna returns to its in
313. meters Retrace Time Direction Scan Rate s Hz 4 Adjust further settings like Raster Width and Bar Width 5 Select 3D to display the 3D antenna pattern 6 Use the mouse cursor to turn it around any of the axis and the mouse wheel to zoom in the view The antenna scan confirms the settings How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans ora O soni po son La w O i B Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization attern Visualization Z Fig 10 6 Horizontal raster scan understanding the displayed information 1 Antenna pattern visualized as HPBW 5 2 Raster Width 3 Bar Width 4 4 10th scan as defined with Bar Count 5 Retrace Time For description of the provided settings see chapter 10 3 Antenna Scans Set tings on page 164 To create a custom antenna pattern based upon the required antenna character istics 1 Create an Antenna Pattern See To create an antenna pattern on page 171 2 Select Antenna Model gt Custom 3 Adjust the settings e g set the HPBW XY 10 HPBW YZ 3 etc 4 ObDserve the antenna pattern on the 2D and 3D views How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans Fig 10 7 Custom antenna pattern understanding the displayed information 1a 1b Antenna pattern diagram as a function of angle deg and antenna gain dB 2 HPBW XY 10 i e the main beam width at half
314. mitter s Frequency is not sufficient for the current antenna Frequency 3 GHz Emitter Modes m Ant Pattern Y My_PlanarAntenna M 3D Type Array Antenna Frequency 9 5 GHz to 10 5 GHz Set the emitter s Frequency to a value within the suggested frequency range Antenna Scan Selects an existing antenna scan or accesses a dialog for creating a new one See To create an antenna scan on page 174 Remote command MITter MODE NAME on page 277 MITter MODE ADD on page 279 MITter MODE COUNt on page 280 MITter MODE SELect on page 280 MITter MODE CLEar on page 282 MITter MODE DELete on page 281 MITter MODE ANTenna on page 305 MITter MODE ANTenna CLEar on page 281 MITter MODE SCAN on page 306 MITter MODE SCAN CLEar on page 282 Hi Ei pi Bi DE pd bl Ep bd p p Emitter Beams In each operating mode the emitter may use one or more beams e g different pulse sequences while using the same antenna and scan type Use the standard functions in the context menu to create or rename beams Assign a pulse sequence to each beam Emitter Settings evalion Fig 11 1 Stacked beams simplified representation Activate Activates a beam Sequence Selects an existing sequence or accesses a dialog for creating a new one See chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Ele ments on page 117 Frequency Offset Offsets the beam frequency by the selected
315. mo OUTPUETAREShO diccionario SCENanio PDW ENABI6 A e Po II tascebbavansseeseeeesnesnceseacdsanes SCENAano PDWPA Trevor ls AA AAA AAA AAA A SCEENanio PDW PLUGIN NAME coords SGENario PDW PLUGInMARIable CATalog conan tion ri tica pe traen 329 SCENario PDW PLUGINWARiable SELE Cd ccoo ere E ee rere vel A SCENario PDW PLUGin VARiable VALue SCENaNO AS SMS PR eE TEE SCENano PDWIMPE o SCENaNO REMOVGs m RNET SEIN ANNO ELE OC e SCENAnO SEQUCNCO rece cusee terete dtt p Pv te resp tu oe eve c tpe td ta SGENario SEGQUernce CDEGgL troie eene eet erri cce e erc deal din ees e EO Et OUR SCENario STARt SCENaNO STOP aimara ito iei rsigcm E M SGCENario VOLatil amp VIEW 2 erret re rtr adas SCENano VOLatile VIEW XMOD6 i e cera croco Eier ie IB Er E e ne era eee SGENario VOLatile VIEWYMODEO SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt SEQuence CREate SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQue nce T EM CUB Al sec thse dr etd cete top ety ee ee ned P a tp gere be aren 282 SEQuence ITEM COUN rt 280 SEQUENCE MEM DELETE APP 281 SEQu nce lFEM EILber MODE nessen A eed tv e EE n RR v T E 375 SEQuence lirEM FIELer SIGNal nere era eio e pneter aa ina K So Ee AEE KAE os EY RYE Hee asen seas 375 SEQuence JTEM FIELer TIME i
316. modulation sym bols are coded directly before and Q values or frequency shifts are assigned This software supports the Differential and Grey coding and the combination of both For more information see chapter A 4 Common Coding Algorithms on page 410 Remote command PULSe MOP DATA CODing on page 342 Filter Filters are applied to shape the signal before it is modulated on the RF The selected filter type and shape affect the output signal especially while generating broadband signals This software supports the following filter types Rectangular Gauss Cosine and Root Cosine Depending on the selected filter type one or more filter parameters are provided for adjustment of the filter characteristic like more steeper edges or customization of the transition bandwidth 7 2 7 Pulse Settings For more information see chapter A 5 Supported Filter and Impact of the Filter Parameters on page 410 Remote command PULSe MOP FILTer TYPE on page 344 PULSe MOP FILTer BT on page 343 PULSe MOP FILTer BWIDth on page 343 PULSe MOP FILTer LENGth on page 344 PULSe MOP FILTer ROLLoff on page 344 Envelope and Modulation Graphs Envelope Clap En 96 Dresd eger m aa 97 L Time domain display se metit ir Por resp err er FR Y tgo us 97 L VQ constellation A A 98 A MIE 98 Envelope Graph Displays the current pulse shape depending on the selected Standard Timing Profile and Rising
317. mplex Scenario sssee 30 Transferring the Waveform to and Playing it with a Connected Instrument 33 Saving and Recalling Settirigs iiec cea 34 Advanced Features and Examples 2 2 ccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeesensaeeeees 34 Customizing the Software eese nennen nennen nn nnne nnn nennen 35 Customizing Your Works pat csecsen abinin neni aE aia 35 Changing Colors and Default Configuration seen 36 Getting Information and Help esee nnne nnn nnne nn nennt 38 About the R amp S Pulse Sequencer eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 39 Organizing the Project Data in Repositories 42 5 1 5 2 5 3 6 1 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 6 1 7 2 6 2 7 2 6 3 7 2 6 4 7 2 6 5 7 2 6 6 7 2 6 7 7 2 6 8 E21 7 3 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 Repository SettinGS c cccccccceccceeccceesctec ceceesteed seeesstee cecensttee cecessted deeestted PARAR RERR PRA NR RRR RR RARR 42 Repository Manager Settings eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenn nennen nnne nnns 46 How to Manage the Project Data eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneen nennen nnne nnns 48 Selecting a Suitable Scenario and Creating Scenarios 53 Overview of the Available Scenarios and Their Complexity
318. mulate an interferer Waveforms can be processed as sequence or in Localized Emitters scenarios used to simulated interferes In these scenarios interferers are treated like emitters i e they are described with an waveform an antenna pattern and antenna scan static location with it X Y and Z coordinates and orientation defined with an Azimuth and an Ele vation gt See To add an existing waveform as an interferer to the scenario on page 210 for how to simulate an interferer 13 Creating Complex 2D Scenarios with Receivers and Interferers This section explains the interferer and receiver settings and provides a brief informa tion on radar systems Receiver One of the typical receiver characteristic is the Minimum Detective Signal MDS The MDS is a measure of the receiver sensitivity and describes the minimum received sig nal amplitude Smin that the receiver is able to correctly detect A typical receiver ach ieves a Smin within the range of 80 dBm and 110 dBm In the R amp S Pulse Sequencer the receiver is described by an antenna pattern antenna scan Gain and a pointing direction defined as azimuth and elevation In a simple emitter receiver scenario with static receiver the R amp S Pulse Sequencer calculates the received signal and displays the time variation of the received normal ized power Normalised Power Level at Receiver dB D The signal received by a static receiver has
319. n Navig ION CONTO e 241 b A m 241 US coin e tu E MEM LUE LM 241 ZOOITI IF DERE niece tatto Te tea e teda d tat er aote o donde 242 Marker aO o idee stie tiere coe ep aute Eid icon 242 D tation Samples nieto AI 242 IDEST a LS LLL 242 Xi Dela Cursors Della MAKES iii e ee niea cea e ena ea Rd 242 Play SIOD P IA 242 Display MOUS ES 242 Ocotal Plot e 243 Navigation controls Steps forward or backward to the beginning or end of the waveform View mode The window size and the screen resolution limit the number of screen points in the time domain display This also limits the resolution at which level and time information is represented Particularly when a large signal section is analyzed one single screen point may contain the information from a large number of signal samples Depending on the zoom level each screen point may represent multiple signal sam ples If so the area between the minimum and maximum value is filled with a semi transparent trace color 1 Q and Q trace on a linear scale in the range between 1 0 and 1 0 Magnitude dB Watt Volt Signal amplitude on a 100 dB 1000 mW 100 mV scale Phase Phase trace on a linear scale in the range between Pi and Pi Frequency Frequency trace on a linear scale with adjustable scale Average Power Average value when mu
320. n Time 3D Scan View Sets the time it takes the animation to complete a scan The Real Time is also displayed Scan and Pattern Visualization 3D Scan View Defines the way the scan is represented e Scan Line On the scan is represented by a line the antenna pattern is disre garded e Pattern Visualization Pattern the visualization uses a Gaussian pattern If you have opened this dialog form the Emitter dialog or the 2D map the visuali zation corresponds to the current selected antenna pattern e Pattern Visualization gt HPBW the antenna is represented by its HPBW e Minimum Displayed Level the minimum displayed side lobes level Circular Scan Settings A circular antenna turns in a circle and scans 360 Antenna Scans Settings 0 Antenna Scan My_TestScenarios gt My Circular IMy_Circular Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization Pattern Visualization Gaussian pattern Comment 10 05 al RT 45 pone Fig 10 2 Circular scan with enabled nodding understanding the displayed information 1 Elevation Rate 2 Elevation Angle 3 Rise Time Elevation Angle Elevation Rate Scan Rate Sets speed the antenna is turning with Direction Sets the direction clockwise CW or counter clockwise CCW the antenna is turning in Nodding If enabled superimposes a horizontal nodding on the circular scan The height of the nods and their rise time
321. n table i e a pulse or a waveform is processed once To repeat an item several times enable a repetition WZ Fixed Value Randomly Selected Step ur PS Auto Set by Duration Repetition Variables Prefix Index1 N prefix i Rep Count N prefix n Start Time lt prefix gt t For a step by step instruction see To define and enable pulse repetition on page 118 Repetition Number Defines how many times a pulse a waveform or a loop will be repeated The repetition number can be e afixed value e arandomly selected value within a value range defined with its minimum maxi mum and step values Randomly Selected e defined to fit in a selected duration Auto Set by Duration where the repetition number can be rounded up or down Remote command SEQuence ITEM SEQuence ITEM TYPE on page 381 COUNt MINimum on page 380 SEQuence ITEM COUNt MAXimum on page 380 SEQuence ITEM COUNt STEP on page 380 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt DURation on page 379 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt ROUNding on page 380 ER BE A 8 2 3 Sequence Settings Repetition Variables You can define repetition variables that will be used by the pulse calculation within one row Prefix Indicates the repetition the variable belongs to If empty no variables are used Remote command SEQuence ITEM REP VARiable on page 381 Loop
322. nce CA Tal Piscina 276 Is eMP TUE oc pm 276 iiie rope WE oor at eat 276 ANTES CRE AO cii e rrt rre c e n roe soe die esed as 276 DSRG GREaGlI6 eode ice Ree eoe enne ant oo e ea Tee RA RED M du re EN eMe ERR SR E cease 276 a licsPrizli a A cade ioecastesasanauaetasemuneaws 276 GENeratpr ORE AU tet Exxon A ed b NEA 277 IPMECREG E ocn ELE 277 PEEIGITOBEGSL cota ues disaniwatesdemuwansesdecaseitdswusse scoters 277 PULSE CREAG ii A A A ped AA a 277 SDANIORESIG inicial aidad 277 SCENario CREATE cui daa 277 SEQu nte CREAG ipee a i pae Ad a Aia dada nds 277 WAVETOTMiCRESTE cocaina A a eo d co ERROR 277 REPOSO CRE IIE nica 277 ANTENAS ELE id tr A A ES TE EA 277 DSRG SELGCE HO 277 EMMO SELO nea ae a A ete initi 277 GENerator SELEC Lue eee AEA AE EEE A N QA NEP RERET 277 AS A E EE E O O ERRNEREE ES 277 PLUGIM SELEG a2 a at di 277 PULSES BOGE acid a A aaa 277 SCAN SELO O Ea EEEE 277 SOENario SELOG eet ate eene ees A a N A Ai 277 SEQWence SEEGDD cias 277 Commands with Similar Syntax WAW ETON ELSE ue RE 277 REPOSO ELO iia 277 P gar opi M 277 DS FRE ANN Eta A iS 277 EMITte MODE NAME an aa a A A ENN 277 ENTERA conina A a er RUN A R aa 277 GENSrater NAME la did edita i x xn nto ln 277 PMNAME csi tirita 278 IPREPLUCGA NAME a 278 PLUGIN MODule NAME ccccccsscscsecscueuscucuscucuanacnanacsesacsauarecuaueescueuacuauacen
323. nce between two reference levels 1096 and 90 96 nominally of the same transition Pulse width also known as pulse ON time or pulse duration That is the difference between the first and the second transition of one pulse i e the duration the signal remains above the 5096 reference level Pulse Off time also known as pulse separation The duration between the 5096 reference level of the second transition of one pulse and the 50 reference level of the first transition of the subsequent pulse in the same pulse train e Pulse repetition interval also known as pulse period Is defined as the duration of one complete cycle consisting of the pulse width i e pulse ON time or pulse duration the pulse Off time pulse separation Pulse parameters Timing Profile 0 100 Note that the pulse parameters differ if a Timing Profile gt 0 100 is used 7 2 Pulse Settings The following definitions apply Rise time Fall time That is the difference between the 0 and 100 reference levels of the same tran sition i e between the base and the top level Pulse width pulse ON time The duration the signal power remains at the top level 10096 reference level Pulse Off time The duration the signal power remains at the base level 096 reference level Pulse repetition interval is defined as the duration of one complete cycle consisting of the rise time the pulse width the fall time the pulse
324. ne 364 SCENario GEMIEDIRection BEARING scrii iori oro reto eoe ed RDA 364 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection BEARING ceceeeeeeeeetececeeeeeecaeaeaeaeaeaeeeenenes 364 SCENano LOCalized DiRection BEARING 1i Lc il n a 364 SGENario EMITteEDIRection THE TA oia aasPrias 364 SGENario CEMIEDIRection ELEValtiOt 44 eae etae lances anaona an naa aain a aan ia 364 SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DlRection ELEVatiON occcoccccccconnnccccnncnonnnoconnnonononnnnnnnnnns 364 ScENarbiLOCalised DIReetlongELEVallon x oorr eoa ttr i divae eto iri aa riia 364 SENSO EMITE oia nd 364 SCENaNOCEMIRENVIME ui ii dad sehe d tec obest ed da daa 364 SCENano LOCalzed EMITE ensce aaa qnse aA 364 SENSO EMITEN ODE cocoa ii 365 SCENario CEMICUEMITter MODE are cro rn eoo Aa AA A E ENa abc 365 SGENario LOCalized EMITter MODPBE 11e cuiiis enne etre han dianian iraina aD Aa eaa YE LR ETT Ra Yee 365 SCENario EMITteEMODE BEJRM 2 2 xat eR exe A Ai ee eua an RE Cm ERES 365 SCENario LOCalized EMITter MODE BEAM ccccssscecsceeceescecesseeceascceseeseceaeeeeeaneeeaes 365 SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE BEAM ccccssccceesececescceceesecesseeeseesececeaceeesseeeseaeeeees 365 SCENano LOCalized DIS Vance cui a ab aeree daa cene dus 365 SCENano L OCalized DIREection TRACK ocio iia 366 SCENario LOCalized LOGation EAST 0 ccc0cccteaisesesestecensceenssanccnasaadeneccanssceccaattaneacccnaas 366 SCENario LOGalized LOCAtOn N
325. nerator R amp S SMW B10 e option Frequency R amp S SMW B1xx B2xx e option Baseband main module one l Q path to RF R amp S SMW B13 e option Pulse Sequencer R amp S SMW K300 per signal path Additional non mandatory options e option Advanced Features for Pulse Sequencer R amp S SMW K301 per signal path e further options depending on the particular application e g if waveform files generated with R amp S WinlIQSIM2 will be used within the sequences the corresponding R amp S SMW K2xx options R amp S SMBV100A R amp S SMBV100A base unit equipped with e option Baseband Generator R amp S SMBV B51 e option Memory Extension for ARB R amp S SMBV K511 e option Frequency R amp S SMBV B1xx e option Pulse Sequencer R amp S SMBV K300 Additional non mandatory options e option RF Bandwidth Extension R amp S SMBV K521 K522 e option Advanced Features for Pulse Sequencer R amp S SMBV K301 Installing the Software e further options depending on the particular application e g if waveform files generated with R amp S WinlIQSIM2 will be used within the sequences the corresponding R amp S SMBV K2xx options R amp S SGT100A R amp S SGT100A base unit equipped with e option Frequency R amp S SGT KB106 e option Baseband Generator R amp S SGT K510 e option Pulse Sequencer R amp S SGT K300 Additional non mandatory options e option Memory Extension for ARB R amp S SGT K51x e option Advanced Features for Pul
326. nerators are set accordingly Signal generation is started synchronous with a fixed delay of 1 ms the signal is output at the RF connectors 9 In the block diagram of the current scenario select Volatile gt View gt E1 to visual ize the waveform of the emitter E1 1 H A 995 29 us Marker fz z oo Fig 19 1 Data View Example of a waveform in a test setup with multiple instruments 1 Automatically appended blank segment 2 Blank segment with fixed duration of 1 ms 3 Second segment 4 Marker M1 the sequence start marker which appears at the first pulse of the sequence M1 can be used to trigger e g an analyzer to the start of the scenario 5 Marker M2 automatically generated marker at the middle of the blank segment M2 is used for syn chronization purposes The Data View shows that a blank segment of 1 ms is appended to the wave form In the middle of this segment i e after 500 us the automatically generated marker signal M2 appears see figure 19 1 This marker M2 is used to synchronize test setups with multiple instruments The master instrument the R amp S SMW in this example is triggered by the R amp S Pulse Sequencer Once the waveform is loaded into the ARB of the master instrument the blank segment is played first The marker signal M2 triggers the ARB of the slave instrument this is the second R amp S SMW The duration of the blank segment and the time interv
327. ngle Emitter Scenario Settings Nee SimpleEmitterScenario Single Emitter one test emitter Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format e Busy Path A h D start Scenario Settings Use the context menu in the Emitter block to select and configure the emitter You can switch between the emitter modes define the current beam set the azimuth and elevation and visualize the signal received by a static receiver on a 3D preview In this scenario the Frequency is a read only parameter that displays the Frequency value of the Current Emitter as selected in the Emitter dialog See e chapter 11 4 How to Create and Configure Emitters on page 186 e chapter 11 1 Emitter Settings on page 180 chapter 6 2 1 Common Scenario Settings on page 55 Remote command SCENario EMITter on page 364 SCENario EMITter MODE on page 365 SCENario EMITter MODE BEAM on page 365 SCENario EMITter CLEar on page 282 Emitters Collection Scenario Settings You can use Emitter Collection scenario test the receiver s ability to correctly detect the signal from different static emitters In this dedicated scenario you can configure several emitters and switch between them sequentially You can also configure the receiver and change its position in the scanning beam of the emitters Emitters Collection Reporting is turned off Data output is in waveform format 9 BUSY cu
328. ngs Sequence Description Settings Sequence Name Comment and Type Sequence Description Table Block Diagram REM 109 New Insert Append Remove Clear ltems sssesseseseeeeeeen nennen 109 IC CE DIO os aa aaa rere a e Er Ee ARR EPOR sua TES ER NU TDUN RUE eR TERME IURE ERA RRE 110 Mri tare adden wanda EE E E E E E T E EEE T 110 ol e E E E E E E reer ere cr 110 PUSE VAS OM iii 110 REN OON iaa A 110 dea MO hve cee A 111 DPW CONO CON Ag AN 111 STR S aaa DITE Rm 111 PS PVC OD D LLL LLLI 111 FAMEM UTI EET 111 CIIM 111 iN TERI ERREUR 111 Br C M 111 Sequence Name Comment and Type Sequence Description Table Block Dia gram A sequence is defined with its unique name an optional description and with informa tion on the sequence content waveforms or pulses A sequence is defined in table form where each row represents one item If enabled an interactive block diagram displays the current sequence configuration Left click to select the item see Select No on page 110 e Right click to access the context menu see New Insert Append Remove Clear Items on page 109 e A double click on an item works like the More icon in the Sequence Descrip tion Table and accesses the settings of the item directly Remote command EQuence CREate on page 277 EQuence CATalog on page 276 EQuence SELect on page 277 EQuence NAME on page 278 EQuence COMMent
329. ngs Antenna PAE NAMES ci ii O Edd Ltd 156 COMME inicia e 156 Pacoudorl e 156 Z IRotation NSIOLQUOTL c or ne e lr b A 157 Frequeney Bandwidth 2 rr erii ett ree i 157 Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation Type sssssssssesseee menm 157 2D and 3D o ET rz REEL 158 Dipole Antenna Settllis cotorra ttc tetti tg a ntt d 158 Parabolic Antenna Settings eee dieere eed EE i A 158 Gaussian Antenna SOMOS eines 159 HEX AMEA SOUN ect cric ed idi rt lE eee trds ve 159 Pyramidal Horn Antenna Settings ete reete t 160 Cosecant Squared Antenna Settings eee 160 Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings 160 Custom Antenna SANGE us ciel Galea erect E tle teu b ce be A Pocta 161 Imported Antenna Settings reise acceda 161 impon Wizard EE 162 Antenna Pattern Name Enter the name of the antenna pattern Remote command ANTenna NAME on page 277 ANTenna CATalog on page 276 ANTenna CREate on page 276 ANTenna SELect on page 277 ANTenna REMove on page 278 Comment Enter a short description Remote command ANTenna COMMent on page 278 Antenna Model Selects the antenna pattern Use the 2D and 3D diagrams to visualize the polar antenna gain patterns Further provided antenna pattern settings depends on the selected antenna model see Dipole Antenna Settings Parabolic Antenna Settings Gaussian Antenna Settings Sin x x Antenna Settings Py
330. nly Manual operation See Export on page 47 REPManager PATH ADD lt Add gt Add the selected directory Setting parameters lt Add gt string complete file path Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Repository Commands Usage Setting only Manual operation See Add Path Add Install Path Add Home Path on page 47 REPManager PATH DELete lt Delete gt Removes the selected file path Setting parameters lt Delete gt string file path Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Remove Path on page 48 REPManager PATH LIST Queries the direcotry in that the repository files are stored Return values lt List gt string compete file path Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Scenario Commands 22 16 Scenario Commands Example Creating simple pulse train scenario SCPI SCENario CREate SimplePulseTrain SCENario TYPE SEQuence SCENario OUTPut RF ENABle 1 UTPut LEVel 10 UTPut RESet ENABle 1 SCENario SCENario e T O SCENario OUTPut FREQuency 6e 09 O O O SCENario OUTPut RUNMode CONTinious SEQuence CATalog My S1 PT My S2 S1 F1_S1 F2 My PT PRI Stagger My PT F Hops My WV Seq My TestSequence SCENario SEQuence My S1 PT SCENario OUTPut TARGet INSTrument GENerator CATalog My R amp S SMW My R amp S SMBV R amp
331. nment GENerator CAPabilities on page 302 ASSignment GENerator PATH LIST on page 302 ASSignment GENerator PATH SELect on page 280 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter LIST on page 303 Add Remove Adds or removes a selected emitter interferer to a selected generator s path Alternatively use the Drag amp Drop method Remote command ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter ADD on page 279 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter SELect on page 280 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter DELete on page 281 Connection diagram Visualizes the required physical connections between the signal generator s and the DUT In test setups with more than one signal generators the sign indicates the signal generator that acts as a master device Provide all other instruments with the reference frequency and the trigger signal of the master signal generator See also chapter 19 4 2 How to Play the Waveforms of Emitter Based 2D Scenarios on page 255 Signal Generator Remote Control Settings 19 3 Signal Generator Remote Control Settings Waveform files generated with the software are automatically uploaded to the connec ted signal generator in one of the following alternative ways e via the SCPI interface e via FTP transfer If enabled this second option is automatically applied when the calculated files are large Both methods require that the signal generator and the PC on that the software is installed are connected
332. nn 400 COMMON FUlictlOls e uie Eire E ess a a eri eR Pe me ER e gus 401 MOR FUNCIO ote obe er ines duct ade onis eundo avc 404 IPM FUECUORS ridotte RR e n et ee UD Pe S x Ru e te n Arpa as 409 Common Coding Algorithms eese 410 Supported Filter and Impact of the Filter Parameters 410 References a PNE RAEUE 412 Glossary Terms and Abbreviations eene 413 User Manual 1176 9512 02 03 7 R amp S Pulse Sequencer Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This User Manual provides all the information specific to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer and describes the software and all its options This description assumes that all available options are installed Required options are stated at the beginning of each section or in the parameter description if one particular parameter required additional option If your software does not support all options con sider the corresponding parts as not relevant The main focus in this manual is on the provided settings and the tasks required to generate a signal The following topics are included Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer options R amp S SMW SMBV SGT K300 K301 Introduction to and getting familiar with the option Getting Started Information needed to install and start working with the software as well as basic operation and typical signal generation examples About the R amp S
333. nstall Path Add Home Path Opens the Find Path dialog that is very similar to the Windows Explorer How to Manage the Project Data Navigate to the required directory and load it Found repository files are displayed in the list Remote command REPManager PATH ADD on page 355 REPManager CATalog on page 353 Remove Path Removes the selected path The repository files within this directory are also removed from the list Remote command REPManager PATH DELete on page 356 5 3 How to Manage the Project Data See e To create a new repository on page 48 e To rename the repository on page 34 e To save the repository on page 34 To delete a repository on page 49 To remove a repository from the workspace on page 49 Toload a repository on page 49 e To create and export a repository archive on page 50 To import a repository archive on page 50 e To share a repository with other users on page 50 To obtain write permission on a repository on page 50 To protect a repository from accidental changes on page 51 e To remove the password protection on a repository on page 52 To create a new repository 1 In the menu bar select File New Repository A new empty repository is created and added to the project tree Repositories are named automatically The repository names follow the syntax New yyyy mm dd T hhmmss where yyyy mm dd and T lt hhmmss gt indi cate the curr
334. nt GENerator PATH EMITter SELect esssssssssssssseeeenenen nnne 280 ASSignment GENerator PATH SELect cion 280 ASSignmenb GENe6ralor SELGGL ici 280 EMITter MODE BEAM SELect eessssseseeeeeeeeen nennen enne nnne senes inesse enses nnns 280 NISI 280 PULSe ENVelope DATA JTEM SELecL iiie trece dre eicere de i edad 280 PUES MOP AMS Tep S ELEGE rur oe certo aee a 280 PUESeG MOPIEMSTepISEDBOL irpo tra irte e ae ted ve adieu gatus 280 PULSeMOP PCHirpiSELgcl ria AA AAA 280 PULSE MOP PUSESE cocodrilo 280 SCENario LOGCalizediSEL6ebt cure iniru aE a EE bab nena nrbi nnd aae hao ERAEN 280 SOENano CSE QUENCE SEO oed A na e eee tee Dai aia 280 SCENano CGEMIESELEC e 280 DSRC MEM SELEG iini or E eti ida 280 IPNEBISTATENESELBGL 2i nece A x nece e rende es ce dax A EXER ERES 280 SEQuence TEMIPM SELE6GGL 222i itr tae tavit oret aae Fu c ada 280 SEQuencsTTEMSELGGL ipta neret botes di 280 Pulse MOP ANISTOpIN SO cire reote id id 281 PULSEMOF FMS Tep INGEM 2c oreet nete te EpL te rr ea dto xot b eae avo Renee px teras eausa 281 PULSeMOP PChHlirp INSert 2 coire retur tiae AA n nada 281 PULSCMOP PLISUIBNSG osuna 281 INSETImMEnEDELSE T mm 281 ASSignment GENerator PATH EMITter DELete esses nennen 281 DSRC TEM DE Were 2 1 2 rre nao a
335. ntent type of the selected item Parameters Type PULSe FlLLer LOOP OVL SUBSequence WAVeform Example see example Creating a CW segment on page 373 Manual operation See Type on page 110 Status Commands This system contains the commands for the status reporting system Refer to the R amp S SMW SMBV SGT user manual for detailed information Value ranges e Return parameters Queries return the current value of the respective register which permits a check of the device status Range A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 2215 1 e Setting parameters The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R amp S Pulse Sequencer cause the status registers to be changed Range A decimal value in the range 0 to 32767 2215 1 System Commands STATus OPERation CONDition Queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out because it indicates the current status Return values lt Condition gt float Example STATus OPERation CONDition queries the Status Operation Condition register Usage Query only 22 19 System Commands The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation SYSTem ERRor Queries the error event queue for
336. o the Y values Offset Offsets the envelope Ele e Le Icons that access standard functions like add or delete row etc see also table 3 4 Use the functions in the context sensitive menu to append new item or reorder the existing item Pulse Settings amp Import Data from File Standard file management function to load custom envelopes from and as a ASCII file with txt or csv file extension When file is loaded the Data Import dialog assists you to select the used delimiter and separator to correctly interpret the file content oc as File C lists custom envelope txt Delimiter mmm Start Row Decimal Separator mum End Row Thousands Separator Start Column End Column The provided settings are self explanatory Remote command PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM ADD on page 279 PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM SELect on page 280 PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM DELete on page 281 PULSe ENVelope DATA ITEM VALue on page 335 PULSe ENVelope DATA UNIT on page 335 PULSe ENVelope DATA MULTiplier on page 336 PULSe ENVelope DATA OFFSet on page 336 PULSe ENVelope DATA LOAD on page 335 PULSe ENVelope DATA CLEar on page 282 7 2 5 Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings To access these settings 1 Select Pulse gt MOP Pulse Settings 2 Select Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP My TestPulse Timing Level MOP Marker General A Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP Restrict modulation to a
337. ocessing start at the same time and lasts up to the overlay duration is Longer segments are truncated Overlay is a method that changes the default behavior figure 8 1 and adds sev eral pulses segments to a common time line i e segments are stacked on top of each other An overlay group spans several segments of any kind like regular pul ses and fillers Segments are added to the existing data starting at the beginning of the first seg ment If the new segment is shorter than the overlay length the remainder is left blank Longer segments are truncated see figure 8 2 About the Sequencing Principles Overlay Duration Fig 8 2 Segments processing in overlay mode Segments are added 1 Overlay Duration sets the length of the resulting sum segment 2 Short segment remainder is left blank 3 Long segment segment is truncated 4 Resulting sum segment Seg 1 Seg 2 Seg 3 Seg 4 is processed right after the overlay duration elapses See also To define and enable overlaying segments on page 122 To include a sub sequence in an existing overlay on page 124 chapter 8 2 4 Overlay Settings on page 114 e Sub sequence A sub sequence defines a sequential sequence of segments within an overlay See also To include a sub sequence in an existing overlay on page 124 Filler Fillers are unmodulated continuous wave CW or blank signals used to fill in cer tain period in a sequence There are two ways to set the
338. oftware Con cept on page 39 e chapter 3 6 Trying Out the Software on page 25 3 4 Understanding the Displayed Information The following figure shows an example test scenario during software operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections RBS Pulse Sequencer 00000 o e es File Repository Configure Window Help 1 de e 800222320 A o AQ Scenario Repos 1 gt Scenario 1 erm 4 Pulse Repos 1 gt Pulse 1 Ela Name Comment f Name Scenario 1 Single Sequence Pulse 1 Auto crested by Startup Wiz CC TN UN cw Scenarios Simple scenario auto created by wizard Reporting is tured off Se RET Modulation eee pen dy Data output is in waveform Format Tring Level moe Marter Genera i IP Emitters Normalized Pulse Envelope UY Ant Pattems Custom Envelope More 8 Ant Scans z id Wine O C Statwthrest BUSY Current Task P Standard Profle Sepeni Crested by alar i ES wi Pulses o A o me a E Puse Created bywizard Refteve DABM Continous jw aso Rising Edge Os Linear y 99 F Waveforms dl Inter Pulse Mods width 100 us 0 8 PE Data Sources D d Generator Profiles Sequence Waveform Local ARB File Falling Edge os Linear h 07 19 Plugins Sequence 1 Generation Gent
339. oient Tror ocio npe rerit Eae nee E ERO I RBe aa 409 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setbBits rtr tpe ten rere rece en RR 406 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setModulationParameter sese enne 405 void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS setRndFnPtr E void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS shutdownPl gin traer nni nn a ira 403 Inge yr ordd 276 NVA G TORII COMIC IN m 278 WAV eform CREA Otis A AA ee aaa ne A 277 WAVetorm O CUE SE vasos 385 WAWVetorm EEVel RELGF6riCe cue ceti ente sata esteis 385 WAVeform NAME cuco 278 WAWVeform NOISe BWIDIN cursi tt O i 384 WAVeform REMove WAVeformm SEL iuris A A A A A A WAVeform SIGCont 33 WAVEIORM TN d ERE RERO cm WAWVetorm VIEW XMODBDJ oc ctore ette tete cep at eee pede co doeet gp pute eed ee 386 WAVetorm VIEW mque 386 WAVeform VIEW ZOOM POINE cocinas neta spi seven D DES t eus eR 386 WAWVeformi VIEW ZOOM RANGO 2 1 tpe tuse cer Pe cepe sete poe ae du EPA 387 WAWVetorm WAVetorm GL Er iioc oe Hee nants clea becca Ea Ebo ecu a Nera arte 385 WAVeform WAVeform LOAD Index Symbols 2D map Igel e 202 3D Rota ranas ED E aE cde RN Roh 22 Zooming mouse wheel sssessesees 22 A Angular Step Spiral SCAN rirnan rEd yaa 169 Antenna Modelismo atenas 156 Antenna pattern GOMMOGME ERR CDD 156 Name E Antenna pattern settings 5 e
340. on page 278 EQuence TYPE on page 375 EQuence REMove on page 279 u c CO gt to UN UD New Insert Append Remove Clear Items Standard functions for items handling see Standard function in the context menus on page 24 You have to select a row for example to delete it or to insert a row before it Remote command SEQuence ITEM ADD on page 279 SEQuence ITEM CLEar on page 282 SEQuence ITEM DELete on page 281 Sequence Settings Select No Select an item to perform any row based actions Items are indicated by consecutive number also used for indication in remote control Remote command SEQuence ITEM SELect on page 280 SEQuence ITEM COUNt on page 280 Nesting Indents table rows in order to include them in a loop to assign them to an overlay or build parallel branches See To define and enable overlaying segments on page 122 Remote command SEQuence ITEM INDent on page 376 Type Defines the type of content of the current item Available are Pulse Wave To select a pulse or a waveform use the Pulse Waveform Filler Creates dummy data like a blank segment or a CW signal See chapter 8 2 5 Fillers Settings on page 114 Loop Creates a loop See chapter 8 2 3 Loop Settings on page 113 Overlay An overlay processes sequence items in parallel See chapter 8 2 4 Overlay Settings on page 114 Sub Seq In overlay incl
341. on page 279 PULSe MOP FMSTep COUNt on page 280 PULSe MOP FMSTep SELect on page 280 PULSe MOP FMSTep INSert on page 281 PULSe MOP FMSTep FREQuency on page 338 PULSe MOP FMSTep DURation on page 338 PULSe MOP FMSTep CLEar on page 282 PULSe MOP FMSTep DELete on page 281 7 2 6 3 Chirp Modulation A chirp is a signal in which the frequency varies over the time The chirp sweeps the RF signal across a set frequency range The chirp modulation scheme is used for pulse compression A O 87 EUA ELE 88 Polyanna CAND cosasnin tte Cre ette Dette pene be tectae degeret 88 Linear Chirp The linear chirp varies the frequency linearly over time Pulse Settings Comment MOP Type Linear Chirp Type up M Deviation 100 kHz Type Defines the frequency variation e Linearly increasing UP e Linearly decreasing Down e Following a full sine wave Sine e Ascending and then descending triangle Deviation Chirp deviation Remote command PULSe MOP CHIRp TYPE on page 341 PULSe MOP CHIRp DEViation on page 341 Equation Define your custom chirp mathematically as a function of time e g 1e6 1 2 T Select Update Preview to visualize the signal Comment Update Preview Equation 1e6 1 2 t T Press Shift Enter For new line PI Value of PI T Tr Tw TF t Time 0 T See also chapter A 2 Formula Syntax on page 398 Remote command PULSe MOP N
342. on page 295 SCAN RASTer PALMer on page 298 SCAN RASTer PRATe on page 298 SCAN RASTer PSQuint on page 298 Conical Scan Settings A conical antenna scans a conus with defined Squint Angle radius the radar beam is rotated around the y axis i e boresight 8 Antenna Scan My TestScenarios gt Test Antenna Scan fe Test Antenna Scan Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization Pattern Visualization Gaussian pattern Comment 5 0s RT 10ms 7 Scan Line Pattern Minimum displayed Level A HPBW 3o PS a smoro a Parameters Scan Rate 100 He Squint ange 150 Direction Cw M Antenna Scans Settings Scan Rate Hz Defines how fast the antenna is turning Squint Angle deg Sets the radius of the scanned circle Direction Sets the direction clockwise CW or counter clockwise CCW the antenna is turning in Remote command SCAN CONical RATE on page 293 SCAN CONical ROTation on page 292 SCAN CONical SQUint on page 294 Helical Scan Settings A helical antenna scan turns in a circle scans 360 and performs several scans with different elevations 0 Antenna Scan My TestScenarios gt Test Antenna Scan Test Antenna Scan Scan Animation Time Scan Visualization Pattern Visualization Gaussian pattern Comment 5 05 Ej RT 655 O scan tine CO Pattern Minimum displayed Level vow be Ej Scan Type Helical M Para
343. on page 58 SCENario SEQuence lt Sequence gt Assigns a pulse sequence see SEQuence CATalog on page 276 Parameters lt Sequence gt string Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Single Sequence and Waveform Scenario Settings on page 60 SCENario SEQuence CLEar Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sequence and Waveform Scenario Settings on page 60 SCENario CEMit ALlas Alias SCENario CSEQuence ALlas Alias SCENario LOCalized ALlas Alias Enters an alias name Parameters Alias string Example see example Creating a scenario with multiple emitters and interferes on page 359 Manual operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario CEMit CURRent Current SCENario LOCalized CURRent Current SCENario CSEQuence CURRent Current Sets the sequence emitter that is currently used by the scenario Parameters Current float number of the sequence emmiter in the list with multiple sequen ces RST 1 Example see example Creating sequence collection scenario on page 358 Manual operation See List of sequences on page 116 Scenario Commands SCENario EMITter DIRection PHI Phi SCENario CEMit DIRection BEARing Bearing SCENario LOCalized RECeiver DIRection BEARing Bearing SCENario LOCalized DIRection BEARing Bearing
344. oop on page 119 e To create a scenario with several pulse train sequences on page 125 To create a simple sequence This examples explains how to create a simple sequence with two pulses P1 and P2 We assume that the required pulses have been created see chapter 7 3 How to Cre ate a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings on page 98 1 In the repository tree select Sequence New 2 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements In the Sequence dialog enter a Name and a Comment e g My S1 PT For each sequence item perform the following steps a Select the Append New Item icon b In the Sequence Description table select Type gt Pulse and select an exist ing pulse e g Pulse P1 C Ifthe list is empty select the pulse icon and create a pulse first d See chapter 7 3 How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings on page 98 e Set the PRIp e g PRI 2 5 ms Enable Show Block Diagram ECC Da Pulse wn Ixus ME 1234 08 o e IP 2 lt Ye iyu E A234 0d oe sms 9 0s pem 1 Sequence with two items 2 Pulse with different PRIs i e items with different duration The items are processed once and one after the other see also figure 8 1 You can change the default processing see e To define and enable pulse repetition on page 118 e Todefine and enable overlaying segments on page 122 e Todefine and apply a loop on pa
345. operation See Properties of the selected Emitter Interferer on page 207 SCENario CSEQuence lt Csequence gt Select an exsiting sequence see SEQuence CATalog on page 276 Parameters lt Csequence gt string Example see example Creating sequence collection scenario on page 358 Manual operation See Sequence Collection Scenario Settings on page 61 See Sequence on page 117 SCENario CSEQuence VARiable lt Variable gt Sets the collection variable Parameters lt Variable gt string Example SCENario CSEQuence VARiable Manual operation See Collection Variables on page 117 SCENario OUTPut CLOCKk MODE Mode Sets the clock mode Scenario Commands Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO MANual AUTO Clock rate is retrived form the generated waveform MANual Clock rate is user defined Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO OVERsampling lt Oversampling gt Sets the minimum oversampling factor Parameters lt Oversampling gt float Range 1 to 1000 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk AUTO BORDer Border Sets the minimum clock rate Parameters Border float Range 1000 to 1e 08 Example see example Creating simple pul
346. or SELect on page 277 GENerator REMove on page 278 Comment Enter a short description Remote command GENerator COMMent on page 278 Profile Type Defines the way the generator s profile is determined The hardware characteristics of the selected generator determines the way the gener ated waveform file is processed In particular the available ARB bandwidth limits the waveform length See also chapter 19 Playing the Generated Waveform Files on page 247 Custom The instrument configuration is selected manually See To create a new custom generator profile on page 221 Connected The instrument s configuration is retrieved automatically from the con nected instrument See To retrieve the profile of the connected generator on page 224 Generator Selects the type of the signal generator form the list of supported instruments Remote command GENerator TYPE on page 307 List of Available R amp S Signal Generators With Profile Type Connected lists all instruments that are configured in the Instru ment Configuration dialog To create the profile of a particular instrument use the Create Profile function RF Frequency Range Sets the maximum RF frequency per RF output Remote command see GENerator OPTion on page 308 14 3 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments Baseband Sets the baseband related parameters Bandwidth Sets the maximu
347. or example at http www rohde schwarz com product SMW200A html gt Downloads gt Firmware Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S Pulse Sequencer and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manual for the latest product version The web help is available from the signal generator s product page For example at http www rohde schwarz com product SMW200A html gt Downloads gt Web Help 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Application Notes Application Notes Application Cards White Papers and Educational Notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive description of specific test configura tions as well as the background information on special technical topics Consider the following sample of further useful information e Application Note 1MA211 Coexistence Test of LTE and Radar Systems e Application Note 1MA256 Real time Radar target Generation e Application Card Simplify pulse and emitter generation for radar testing e Application Card Analyze your radar signals with wideband power sensors e Application Card Flexible target generation for radar receiver testing e Application Card Simplified analysis of frequency agile radars The latest versions of application notes and program files are available for download from the R amp S website at the http www rohde
348. or example the sequence description table the FM and AM Step modulations the data source IPM profiles in list form lists of multiple emitters etc Lists and tables are composed of items where items are referenced by their number Use the SELect command to select one item to which the subsequent com mands apply A typical remote control sequence would look like in the example Handling items on page 272 Example Handling items The following is a simple example that explains the principle of items handling by using the common commands activate the remote control mode SCPI creates a pulse based sequence with 2 items i e segments SEQuence CREate Seql SEQuence SELect Seql Commands with Similar Syntax SEQuence TYPE PULSe SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM COUNt 1 SEQuence ITEM SELect 1 SEQuence ITEM TYPE PULSe SEQuence ITEM PULSe P1 SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM COUNt 2 SEQuence ITEM DELete 2 SEQuence ITEM COUNt 1 SEQuence ITEM CLEar SEQuence ITEM COUNt 0 ANTenna CATalog iiu redeat Eua ette td xe coe RE eo ndn Mna D Eae EN REOR Rea isa 276 DSRC CATI M dyeee 276 I pr Eoo 276 GENeratom CATA Em 276 IPM CATI OO rM PEE 276 PLUGin GATalog ope EEEE A o dica A a EY HAE uuu 276 PUES GAT AGG A 276 ens Hen qr 7 ira A A A i 276 SCE NAMOsCA Tal cocaina ridad blo tc 276 SEQue
349. or on a particular point to retrieve detailed information A single cursor is indicated by a blue line It sets the center point for all zoom oper ations 3 Use the mouse wheel or the Zoom In Out functions to display a part of the wave form or the whole generate waveform 4 Toretrieve delta information How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with 1 Q Data a Select the x icon and Drag amp Drop the cursors The delta cursors are indicated by brackets The delta information is displayed in the Delta section of the dialog b Drag the mouse cursor on the diagram The delta information is displayed temporary above the line 12 218 Mitr Orns D a l Delta information upper value is the Ax in the selected Units lower value is the A y units depending on the selected View mode 2a 2b Start and end y values units depending on the selected View mode 5 Select Waterfall or Spectrum 6 If you observe a part of the waveform select the play icon to playback the wave form and observe the signal changes over time To measure the reference signal level of a waveform 1 Select Repository Tree Waveform 2 Select an imported waveform e g WV Matlab See To import a custom waveform on page 197 3 Select Waveform Level The Waveform Reference Level dialog displays the and Q data versus time as the Waveform View does but additionally calculates the reference signal
350. ort Supported File Types and File Formats Example Example of a template R amp S Pulse Sequencer PDW Report text Date lt DATE gt Repository lt REPOSITORY gt A lt Token gt Scenario lt SCENARIO gt TOA RF PW PA MOP GHz us dBm HDR HDR lt TOA gt RF PW PA lt MOP gt gt END OF REPORT lt Col 1 gt lt Col 2 gt OPT lt TOA 12 0f 9 gt OPT lt RF 9 6f 9 gt pa ee OPT lt Token Format Exponent gt OPT lt PA 4 0 0 gt Fig 1 1 PDW template explanation General template text and available tokens The general template text is copied to the final report All tokens are replaced by val ues or text provided by the software See table 1 2 for an overview of the available tokens Table 1 2 List of available tokens Token name Description lt USER gt Current user name lt TPATH gt Target file path the generated report file is stored in lt ISODATE gt Date amp time in ISO format lt DATE gt Date amp time in local format lt REPOSITORY gt Repository name lt RCOMM gt Repository comment lt VERSION gt Repository version lt AUTHOR gt Repository author lt RCDATE gt Repository creation data lt RPATH gt Root path of repository lt SCENARIO gt Scenario name lt SCOMM gt Scenario comment Adding and formatting data with the HDR keyword Each report contains one or more data lines The position of these dat
351. orts on page 263 20 1 Reporting Settings To access and change the settings influencing the report generation 1 In the Scenario dialog select Waveform Generation gt Config 2 Select Reporting Output decks Duration Features Reporting PDW Reporting A Enable Target Path C My Report Files Type Plugin Pugin veiabes No Verable JO alas Available are the following settings Reporung EMable WEE 262 Target Path Seb P e a E EAA A 262 dug e A E E E e 262 EE Tampico ii A AAA AA M 262 Plugin and Plugin Vartables coincida 263 Reporting Settings Reporting Enable Enables generation of reports Remote command SCENario PDW ENABle on page 329 Target Path Set Path Indicates current storage location Per default report logs are stored in the user directory of the current user that is the SHOMEPATHS directory To change the storage location select the Set Path icon See also To set the storage location for the generated report files on page 264 Remote command SCENario PDW PATH on page 329 Type Sets the template used be the reporting function Default Loads the predefined Template The report is a plain text file The format is simple column based and cannot be modified Further settings are not required Template Enables the predefined template for editing see Edit Template on page 262 Plugin Enables loading according to custom tem
352. ository quick access to cur Instruments e Console e About e Load and Manage Repo rently loaded repository Remote Control e Message Log e User Manual sitory Settings e Cascade e Wizard mport Repository e Colors e Minimize All Archive e Close All e Save Repository Screen 1 Screen Clear Workspace 4 e Open Workspace e Save Workspace e Save Workspace As e Exit Toolbar Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbar at the top of the Screen IAN Fig 3 2 Standard functions in the toolbar Save as stores current workspace configuration Access the Manage Repository dialog for loading discarding or exporting repositories Creates a new repository Creates a new scenario Starts a wizard Access the Program Settings dialog Opens the message log window Help displays context sensitive help topic for currently selected element Screen switches between the virtual screens 0 Hardcopy copies current dialog to the clipboard 2 OANODOARWHND Virtual screens Using the R amp S Pulse Sequencer you can handle several scenarios with even compre hensive settings at the same time You can arrange logically the dialogs across multi ple screens so that you easily switch between them You can for example assign the subset of antenna dialogs to one screen and the pulse and modulation dialogs to another Repository tree The repository tree shows the content of all curr
353. ou can rename it afterwards The automatically assigned names follow the syntax New_ lt yyyy mm dd gt lt T gt lt hhmmss gt where lt yyyy mm dd gt and T lt hhmmss gt indicate the current date and time respectively Repository Settings Security Level A security level information is assigned to each repository where Level 0 is the lowest level that means no restrictions and Level 4 is the highest one Elements belonging to a repository with higher security level cannot be copied to a repository with lower one If more than one repositories are currently loaded the workspace dis plays the highest required security level see chapter 3 4 Under standing the Displayed Information on page 19 Complexity The complexity level defines whether basic or advanced features are Level used in the repository The complexity level also reflects the option concept of the signal generators For example if Complexity Level Advanced K301 is used the signal generator has to be equipped with the option Advanced Fea tures for Pulse Sequencer e g R amp S SMW K301 See also e chapter 2 Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer on page 13 chapter 3 1 Required Options on page 15 Remote command REPository CATalog on page 276 REPository CREate on page 277 REPository SELect on page 277 REPository REMove on page 279 REPository AUTHor on page 352 REPository DATE on page 352 REPository VERSion on page 353 REPository
354. ows that partially defined antenna patterns are also allowed In lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 antenna pattern az res 5 00000000e 00 az res elev res 5 00000000e 00 elev res data 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 10 100 10 100 100 0 100 100 100 0 100 100 100 10 100 100 10 100 10 1 00 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 data antenna pattern the example defined are only the subset of values that describe the beam pattern all other values are assumed to be zero see figure 1 2 Pattern Visualization Minimum Level 60 dBm Fig 1 2 3D view of the imported partially defined antenna pattern Supported File Types and File Formats Example Antenna pattern with back lobes lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 lt antenna_pattern gt lt az_res gt 5 00000000e 00 lt az_res gt lt elev_res gt 5 00000000e 00 lt elev_res gt lt data gt 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 90 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 30 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 80 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 5
355. page 291 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 SCAN RASTer WIDTh Width SCAN SECTor WIDTh Width Sets the width of the sector to be scanned Parameters Width float Range 0 1 to 180 Default unit degree Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Sector Scan Settings on page 166 SCAN RASTer DIRection Direction Sets the scanning direction Parameters Direction HORizontal VERTical Manual operation See Raster Scan Settings on page 167 see example Defining antenna scans on page 291 SCAN SPIRal ROUNds Rounds Sets the number of rounds the antenna performs Parameters Rounds float Range 0 1 to 15 Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Spiral Scan Settings on page 169 SCAN SPIRal RTIMe lt Rtime gt Sets the turning speed of the antenna Parameters lt Rtime gt float Range 0 01 to 10 Default unit degree s Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Antenna Scan Commands Manual operation See Spiral Scan Settings on page 169 SCAN SPIRal STEP lt Step gt Determines the step size to increase the scan radius Parameters lt Step gt float Range 1 to 11 25 Default unit degree Example example Defining antenna scans on page 291 Manual operation See Spiral Scan Settings on page 169 SCAN TYPE Type
356. plates like DFS DIV8 PDW etc Custom templates are used in the same way as the predefined tem plate see Plugin and Plugin Variables on page 263 Remote command SCENario PDW TYPE on page 330 Edit Template Opens the predefined template in edit mode 20 2 How to Create Test Reports 1 Pulse Sequencer PDW Report 2 3 Date ISODATE 4 Repository lt REPOSITORY gt 5 Scenario lt SCENARIO gt 6 m TOA RF PW PA MF MOP BW 8 ns GHz us dBm kHz 9 uA eee es eee U 2 eee ee a e eee eee OD eee ee nn O o aD c e ee O a D 10 HDR 11 lt TOA gt RF lt PW gt lt PA gt lt MF gt lt MOP gt BW 12 END OF REPORT d3 OPT lt T0A 12 0 9 gt 14 OPT lt RF 9 6f 9 gt 15 OPT lt PW 9 3 6 gt 16 OPT lt PA 6 1 0 gt HM OPT lt BW 6 0 3 gt Eye See chapter A 1 1 File Format of the Reporting Template on page 390 for descrip tion of the file format Remote command SCENario PDW TEMPlate on page 330 Plugin and Plugin Variables Selects and loads a reporting template form a d11 file This template must exist in the Plugin library Report plugins may register a set of variables that can be used to further control the plugin s algorithms See chapter A 3 Plugin Programming API on page 400 chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on pa
357. power 3 dB 9 Side lobe level i e the attenuation of the first pair of side lobes 4 Roll off factor or step size used to calculate the attenuation of the subsequent side lobes 5 Scale factor to calculate the HPBW of the side lobes i e how much smaller or wider the side lobes are compared to the main lobe To import a user defined antenna pattern from file 1 Create an Antenna Pattern See To create an antenna pattern on page 171 2 Select Antenna Model gt Import from File 3 Select Load navigate to the folder with your custom antenna patterns and load a ffe a tsv a ffd a csvora ant pat file See chapter A 1 2 Antenna Pattern File Formats on page 393 4 Open the 2D view to visualize the antenna pattern How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans Fig 10 8 2D view Example of a user defined antenna pattern In this example the antenna pattern is directed to 90 5 Select Antenna Pattern gt Z Rotation 90 eae eae ee Simulate Back Lobe oun HO o Parameters How to Create a Library with Antenna Patterns and Scans 6 On the 2D and 3D views observe the effect of this parameter Pattern Yisualization Minimum Level 60 dBm Fig 10 9 3D view Example of a user defined antenna pattern The antenna pattern is directed on the Y axis 11 Emulating Emitters In the context of this software a simple emitter describes a pulse sequence where
358. pported e FEKO Far Field f fe files e ant pat files in the Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary format e Antenna Magus tsv files e ANSYS HFSS ffd files e Antenna patterns in csv file format The Import Wizard assists you to import csv files See chapter A 1 2 Antenna Pattern File Formats on page 393 for description of the file formats To import a user defined antenna pattern from file on page 176 Remote command ANTenna MODel USER LOAD on page 289 ANTenna MODel USER CLEar on page 281 Import Wizard When a csv file is loaded the Import Wizard opens and tries to determine e the used column separator e the decimal delimiter e the first row with data e the data content of each column You can change the values afterwards Antenna Pattern Settings Column Separator 1st Column Decimal Point d 2nd Column First Row 3rd Column 4th Column 5th Column 6th Column FRQ 3 0E 9 PIN 0 171146799151093 THETA_SYM_0 0 THETA_SYM_90 0 PHI_SYM_0 0 PHI SYM 90 0 INTERP DBI 0 Theta deg Phi deg E Theta Re E Theta Im E Phi Re E_Phi Im f Far field exported from Antenna Magus 5 3 0 1686 f On Friday March 06 2015 at 1 17 55 PM f Theta Samples 181 f Phi Samples 361 0 000000000000E 000 0 000000000000Et000 4 303687774512E 016 0 000000000000E 0 Remote command ANTenna MODel USER CSV FORMat on page 289 Antenna Scans Settings 10 3 Antenna Scans Settings To acces
359. provides a wide range of commonly used modulation schemes such as AM FM or Chirp You can also add your custom pulse content chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Some MOP require data sources that are used with a modulation scheme A data source for the symbols of the modulation has to be created first See chapter 15 Defining the Data Source on page 226 for description of the provi ded settings To access the MOP settings 1 In the repository tree select Pulse gt PulseName gt MOP 2 Select MOP gt Settings The available modulation settings depend on the selected MOP Type See chapter 7 2 6 Built In Modulation Types and their Settings on page 82 3 Select for example MOP gt MOP Type gt Chirp gt Linear Chirp di Pulse My_TestScenarios gt My_FM_Chirp My FM Chirp Timing Level HOP marker Genera Envelope ester LINE Settings Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse No Restriction D Pulse Width Automatic C Exclude Time women os nos EE WZ Level Threshold RisingEdge 25 w O teo iy 10 576 us div 6M 8M 10M Clock 20 MHz limited Samples 2115 10 dB div Q 9 Fig 7 15 Modulation on pulse MOP understanding the displayed information 1 Enable Modulation on Pulse MOP gt On i e MOP is appli
360. r example IPM SHAPe BASE PULSE PM SHAPe COUNt 10 IPM SHAPe BASE TIME IPM SHAPe PERiod 0 5 PM SHAPe INTerpol NONE WP PACT VIP E 0 A EO 313 Is ip 313 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet PARameter ccoooccccconccccconoconnnccnoonnnnoconononnccncnnnnnnnaanononanen 313 SEQuence TEMIPM TARGET PE cun a aT 313 SEQuence ITEM IPM TARGet VARiable ccooocccccocnnncccnnnnnoccnnnononnnoconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnccnonnnnonnnnnnns 314 PEQUE ii te ne Ero ea a eite ee dede enia e EP A O eo ends 314 PMEEISTITEM VAL UO oia ia 314 IPMELIS TI TEM REPED ii 314 PS OAD os ata EN EE RAE EA EE A aia 314 PRELET OAV OM 315 IPMERRANBDODnEDISTFDUION 2 2 20 se a aeda reves rai una NE 315 IPRMERRANDOmENORMALLEIMIL nci irato E dida a 315 PMERANDOM NOR Mal MEAN cional 315 PMIRANDOMiNORMalSTD soria oi ais 316 IPMEIRANDOIEU GENTE uote Rec be ia ads 316 PNERANBDOm U RANGO sc duni reato oda a ORE eSI ica 316 IPNERANDom FU NIF Orn MINIMUM aine cou rina tas a addaa hiaai kaaa 316 PMERANDOMUNIFO mm MAX cuisine T E Pi a reds resorts 316 IPMERANDOm UNIFOTWESTEP 1 2 er ertt ooi ce eode r RR nae ce eR x eral x denRo eR anle ra EKT 317 IPITISBISBI UR Sionin e A ea edu dudes e e VENE e ia 317 IPRETISEISEREUSGS iir pressis rE Pa E Cop CE o TEdPr RENE Ea YN Teu PE nes Ta ez pe VEU Oe ed DeC N 317 IPM SHAPE BAS E a noia 317 IPM SHAPE COUNE EE 317 IPM SHAPE Tempolatios AE e 318 IPMESHAPSIPERIOG
361. r configuration and its different operating modes Overview of the Main Antenna Parameters Antennas are elements that radiate energy Radiated energy focused in one defined direction is referred to as a main beam or main lobe see figure 10 1 Radiated energy in other than the required direction form the side lobes and the back lobe The angle at that the radiated energy falls down to the half of the maximum is referred to as half power beam width HPBW Fig 10 1 Main characteristics of an antenna Main lobe bream The region around the direction with maximum radiation Side lobes Energy radiated in undesired direction Sa Angular resolution O Theta Antenna beam width or the 3dB angle defined by the half power HPBW Antenna pattern Antennas of different type and with different purpose use more wider or more directed beams for example pencil beams have a typical HPBW of about 2 deg The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a wide range of commonly used antenna patterns such as Parabolic Cosecant Squared or Planar Phased Array antennas Moreover you can e adjust the antenna pattern settings to simulate for example a directive antenna that concentrates the radiated energy in a particular direction Antenna Pattern Settings e simulate a back lobe pattern e create a custom antenna pattern based on the required antenna characteristics see To create a custom antenna pattern based upon the required antenna charac te
362. ra a anra aan gu e Ua ind edit 378 SEQuence T TEMPDELgy e t a s 378 SEQuesncei TEMPAASSOFESO E cuina eite pere eue du ata ev idad 378 SEQuenceTPEMUTPRL id 379 SEQuence ITEM WAVeform cesses nennen nennen nn nnne nan sss e ese ntes esee ied 379 ime Ec Lt 379 SEQuence dTEM REP COUNEDU RO 2 niece ia aaa dada 379 SEQuencedTEMIREPICOUNELFUIXGG ntur ra radeon iii die 380 SEQuence TEMAREP COUNGMINETIBT 212 cider rent ete cetera osea certo tese eedem 380 SEQuence TEM REF COUNEGM AXI 2 52 22 02 0 deck naa cz odi y t raodo Ec d ex tace st nerde eiua 380 SEQuencelTEM IREP COUNCRO D Nditig racer oae PR iio 380 SEQuenced TEM IREP COUNEST EP coca eo etude rene io seo ta aaa AE ta ee one mue 380 SEQ We mee TEM REP TYPE iti reri rere iia 381 SEQuerice1TEM REP VARIable 22 e oratio coto ohne zur eique a an hcl ai 381 SEQUE ll TEN WIRE iiie lt 381 Sequence Commands SEQuence TYPE lt Type gt Sets the sequence type Parameters lt Type gt PULSe WAVeform Example see example Handling items on page 272 Manual operation See Sequence Name Comment and Type Sequence Descrip tion Table Block Diagram on page 109 SEQuence ITEM FILLer MODE Mode Sets the way the filler duration is determined Parameters Mode DURation TSYNc Example see example Creating a CW segment on page 373 Manual operation See Mode on page 115 Sets t
363. ramidal Horn Antenna Settings Cosecant Squared Antenna Settings Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings Imported Antenna Settings Antenna Pattern Settings e Custom Antenna Settings Remote command ANTenna MODel TYPE on page 289 Z Rotation X Rotation Rotates the antenna pattern around the selected axis Table 10 1 Effect of antenna pattern rotation X Rotation 15 Z Rotation 15 INE x 1 Rotation around the x axis 2 Rotation around the z axis Positive values rotate the antenna boresight towards the Positive values rotate the antenna boresight positive z axis counter clockwise towards the x axis This parameter is useful for example e to simulate a radar boresight displacement e to align a user defined antenna pattern to the boresight see To import a user defined antenna pattern from file on page 176 Remote command ANTenna MODel ROTation X on page 289 ANTenna MODel ROTation Z on page 289 Frequency Bandwidth Sets the frequency and bandwidth the antenna pattern is calculated for See also Frequency e Emitter Modes Remote command ANTenna MODel FREQuency on page 287 ANTenna MODel BANDwidth on page 287 Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation Type Enables the simulation of a back lobe and sets its power level and shape The parameter Type defines the shape of the back lobe pattern e Mirror the back lobe pattern is the mirrored antenna pattern attenuated with t
364. ration See Rising Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope on page 71 PULSe SETTings Settings Switches between the displayed settings Setting parameters Settings TIMing LEVel MOP MKR GENeral Example PULSe SETTings MOP PULSe PREView MODE MOP PULSe PREView MOP IQ Usage Setting only PULSe PREView MODE Mode Switches between the envelope and modulation graphs Setting parameters Mode ENVelope MOP Example See PULSe SETTings on page 349 Usage Setting only Repository Commands Manual operation See Envelope Graph on page 96 PULSe PREView MOP lt Mop gt Sets the displayed modulation characteristics Setting parameters lt Mop gt IQ PHASe FREQuency Example See PULSe SETTings on page 349 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Time domain display on page 97 22 15 Repository Commands Do not change the default folder structure and the repository file names Changing file paths and file names may lead to data lost and irreparable faults in the data sources Example Working with repositories SCPI create new empty repository REPository CREate Repository for tests REPository CATalog Repository for tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequencer Repositorie K300 and K301 Tests C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequencer Repositories Rep C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequ
365. reach spectrum mask requirements Cut Off Frequency The cut off frequency or corner frequency is a filter characteristic that defines the fre quency at the 3 dB down point This frequency is the bound to the transition band here the filter characteristic changes form the passband to the stopband where the signal is completely suppressed Roll Off Factor The roll off factor is a measure for the excess bandwidth compared to the ideal band width of a brick like filter The roll off factor affects the steepness of the filter flanks A Roll Off Factor 0 would result in the steepest flanks theoretical possible values near to 1 make the flanks more flat References Roll Off Factor 0 22 8 Roll Off Factor 0 c I Roll Off Factor 1 f Hz Passband The passband describes the frequency span that the filter passed unchanged The total passband of a filter is given as follow Bandwidth 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate A 6 References e R amp S SMW200A Vector Signal Generator user manual the latest version is availa ble for download at R amp S SMW200A product homepage e R amp S SMBV100A Vector Signal Generator operating manual the latest version is available for download at R amp S SMBV100A product homepage e R amp S SGT100A SGMA Vector RF Source operating manual the latest version is available for download at R amp S SGT100A product homepage Glossary Terms and Abbreviations AM Amplitude modulat
366. reate scenarios and use the created sequences or assign them to emitters e Top down create your scenario create new emitter define the antenna pattern scan define the used sequence and define the pulses and waveforms Repository one or more 7 Scenario level scenarios describe one or more emitters and one ore more sequences Emitter level emitters are described among others with antenna patterns and antenna scans Antenna patterns and antenna scans Sequence level sequences are build of one or more pulses or waveforms 7 Pulse and waveform level 7a 7b Creating elements at any level with clone and copy ORAON For information on the naming conventions and description of the database elements see Introduction to the Software Concept on page 39 Means of Users Interaction Handling database elements While creating database elements consider also the following possibilities e Change Files describing elements are stored once but may be used several time When one file is changed its parent elements are also updated e Clone Elements can be cloned to create a deep copy of the database element e Delete Elements can be deleted if they are not referenced by other elements e Copy If two repositories are opened in the project tree a drag amp drop operation creates a copy of the selected element and all referenced elements Standard function in the context menus Each dialog with settings belonging to a hig
367. red PRI and Staggered PRI are used to explain the principle e Jittered PRI In general a jitter is understood as the short term variations of a significant pulse parameter deviating from their ideal positions in time in either random or ordered way see figure 9 1 You can for example use the random variation of the rising and falling pulse edge positions to simulate a technically imperfect trigger signal W W coe PRI PRI PRI Fig 9 1 Example of Jitter effects 1 Ideal pulse with constant pulse repetition interval PRI and pulse width PW 2 Pulse affected by Jitters Jitter PRI PRI PRI2 and varying pulse width PW PW As illustrated on figure 9 1 the time between two subsequent pulses varies ran domly on a pulse to pulse basis as does the pulse width e Staggered PRI Staggered pulse trains are commonly used against range ambiguities und blind speeds see also Pulse repetition patterns on page 127 Staggered PRI is a transmission method based on pulse trains with constant pulse width PW and varying PRI The principle of staggered PRI is illustrated on fig ure 9 2 1 2 3 1 PRI PRI PR PRI PRI PRI Fig 9 2 Example of an IPM effect Staggered PRI 1 Stagger start delay 1 2 3 Pulse train group composed of three pulses PRI Group PRI Pulse repetition interval of the pulse train group PRI PRI PRI Pulses transmitted with different PRI As illustrated
368. rent Task taksataj M Stop EN O m d Laj 9 A scenario with several emitters requires a list of emitters You can switch between these emitters and select which one is currently transmitting The Current Emitter parameter indicates the alias name of the currently selected one In this scenario the Frequency is a read only parameter that displays the Frequency value of the Current Emitter as selected in the Emitter dialog See To configure complex scenarios with several emitters on page 189 chapter 11 3 Lists with Multiple Emitters on page 185 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario e chapter 6 2 1 Common Scenario Settings on page 55 Remote command SCENario CEMit CURRent on page 363 Localized Emitters Scenario Settings name LocalizedEmitters Localized Emitters Data output is in waveform Format 2D plane 3xEmitter 1xinterferer 1xreceiver Reporting is turned off Comment O BUSY Current Task start Idle Stop You can use Localized Emitter scenario to test the receiver s ability to correctly detect the sum signal from different static emitters and interferers In this dedicated scenario you configure the signal of one ore more emitters and optional one or more interferers that would be received by a receiver with defined characteristics You can also config ure the receiver and change its position in the scanning beam of the emitter
369. requency on target instrument on page 56 SCENario OUTPut RUNMode lt Runmode gt Defines the way the generated signal is processed 22 17 Sequence Commands Parameters lt Runmode gt CONTinuous SINGle Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Playback mode on page 57 SCENario OUTPut TARGet Target Defines whether the software creates an ARB file or transfers the generated waveform to a connected physical generator To assign a generator profile use the command SCENario GENerator on page 362 To set the name and the directory the ARB file is stored in use the command SCENario OUTPut PATH Parameters lt Target gt INSTrument FILE Firmware Software see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Upload to VSG Vector Signal Generator on page 58 SCENario OUTPut THReshold lt Threshold gt Sets a threshold Pulses at levels below this threshold are omitted Parameters lt Threshold gt float Range 100 to 0 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Features on page 249 SCENario VOLatile VIEW If a waveform exist in the volatile memory opens the Waveform Viewer and displays this waveform Usage Event Manual operation See Volatile Repository on page 57 Sequence Commands In the following examples we assume that a pulse base
370. rios es gts lo NIME ssc OA CO eteoa daa error cte ive a e del Feu ead a Rp EYE E ae IU A ke HEP ERR YE De EA YU RRE 55 COMING y PORRO On T m DEI 55 eC O e e E E vean 55 Status Mioma Mienia a a A 55 Set RF level and frequency on target inStruMEenN cooionccininiconnciancccnreniadccn cocinan 56 gie rin rE AE EEEE E E E ETa 56 ROT Level iaa 56 Start With RESET isinai era treten II A 56 SCIO aiii 57 Playback MOOG cocoa A A AAA AAA 57 Start Stop DU 57 Waveform Sonrisa ii ad 57 Volatile REPOSO voii a o 57 Upload to VSG Vector Signal Generator ccena 58 Load ARB FIE ta 59 New Edit Clear Select Config VIBW c cce ai nnne en tee A aii 59 Scenario Name Enter an unique name to identify for your current scenario in the repository Remote command SCENario CREate on page 277 SCENario CATalog on page 276 SCENario NAME on page 278 SCENario SELect on page 277 SCENario REMove on page 279 Comment Enter a short description of the scenario The first line is displayed in the repository tree Remote command SCENario COMMent on page 278 Scenario Type Displays the scenario type Remote command SCENario TYPE on page 361 Status information Displays information on e kind of generated waveform file single segment or MSW report generation status type and file location To enable report generation select Waveform Generation gt Reporting gt Report
371. ristics on page 175 e import your user defined antenna pattern see To import a user defined antenna pattern from file on page 176 visualize the antenna pattern on a 2D and a 3D preview see figure 10 4 Antenna scan Antenna scans describe the movement of the antenna beam in three dimensional space A conical scan for example is a movement where the beam points in the direc tion of the target and is rotated in a circle i e the half power points of the beam draw a circle The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a wide range of commonly used antenna scans Such as a raster scan helical scan conical scan etc You can also adjust the antenna scan settings visualize the configured antenna scan on a 3D preview e observe the signal received by a receiver for a particular antenna pattern and antenna scan configuration See Receiver on page 201 To visualize the signal received by a static receiver on page 188 10 2 Antenna Pattern Settings To access these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Antenna Pattern gt New My_PlanarAntenna Comment planar phased antenna with parabolic aperture distribution Model Planar Phased Array y 3D 2D Z Rotation 102 X Rotation pe Frequency 10 GHz Bandwidth 1 GHz Simulate Backlobe Attenuation 30 dB Antenna Pattern Settings Antenna Patterns are characterized with the following common and model specific setti
372. rned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values Conformity 22 2 22 3 Programming Examples Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S Pulse Sequencer follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Programming Examples The following section provide simple programming examples for the R amp S Pulse Sequencer The purpose of the examples is to present all commands for a given task In real applications one would rather reduce the examples to an appropriate subset of commands The programming examples have been tested with the built in console which provides an environment for the development and execution of remote tests To keep the exam ples as simple as possible only the clean SCPI like syntax elements are reported Non executable command lines e g comments start with two
373. rovides an overview on how to work with the R amp S Pulse Sequencer and describes the manual operation of the software and also the alternative ways of opera tion There are two ways to operate the R amp S Pulse Sequencer Manual operation Run the software on your PC and use the mouse and or keyboard Means of Users Interaction e Remote control Create programs to automate settings tests and measurements The software is controlled by a program running on the same or on another computer This way of operation is described chapter 21 Automation of R amp S Pulse Sequencer on page 266 Basic operation concept This section lists settings and functions that are common to the dialogs and are per formed in the same manner throughout the software You can use them alternatively or complementary As described in Introduction to the Software Concept on page 39 the R amp S Pulse Sequencer software is based on a relational database that organizes database ele ments within repositories Database elements are indicated by their names within one repository element names must be unique see Name and comment on page 21 Creating elements Once created database elements can be used by other elements within the same repository Elements can be created in both the bottom up and the top down direction or in a combination of these two methods e Bottom up you can create your pulse and waveform library first then build Sequences c
374. rrent scenario status Scenario Commands Return values lt State gt IDLE RUN Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Stop Busy on page 57 SCENario CACHe VOLatile CLEar Deletes the file from the volatile memory Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Usage Event Manual operation See Volatile Repository on page 57 SCENario CACHe VOLatile VALid Queries whether the volatile memory contains a valid waveform Return values Valid ON OFF 1 0 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Usage Query only Manual operation See Volatile Repository on page 57 SCENario GENerator lt Generator gt Sets the signal generator Parameters lt Generator gt string use the command GENerator CATalog to query a list of con figured generator profiles Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Upload to VSG Vector Signal Generator on page 58 SCENario GENerator PATH lt Path gt Selects the signal path that will play the generated signal Parameters lt Path gt float Range 1 to 32 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Scenario Commands Manual operation See Path on page 57 See Upload to VSG Vector Signal Generator
375. rs Version string Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Manual operation See General Repository Settings on page 42 REPManager CATalog Queries available repository elements in the database Repository Commands Return values lt Catalog gt lt RepositryName gt lt path gt lt RepositryName gt is the name of the repository as defined with the command REPository CREate lt Path gt is the compete file path Example see example Working with repositories on page 350 Usage Query only Manual operation See Discovered Repositories on the Mass Storage on page 47 See Add Path Add Install Path Add Home Path on page 47 REPManager LOAD lt RepName gt lt Path gt lt Username gt lt Passwd gt Loads the selected repository to the workspace If more than one repositories with the same name exist loaded is the first repository with a name match To query the available repository elements in the database use the command REPository CATalog Setting parameters lt RepName gt string Repository name as configured in the workspace lt Path gt string Compete file path as queried with the command REPManager PATH LIST The lt Path gt must be specified if lt Username gt and lt Passwd gt are used lt Username gt string required if the repository is password protected lt Passwd gt string required if the repository is password protected Example se
376. rtain area of the pulse on page 80 PULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STARt lt Start gt PULSe MOP EXCLude LEVel STOP lt Stop gt Sets the threshold levels at the beginning and the end of a pulse for the modulation to be excluded Pulse Commands Parameters lt Stop gt float Range 0 to 100 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse on page 80 PULSe MOP EXCLude MODE Mode Selects the parameter that determines the area the MOP is to be restricted Parameters Mode TIME LEVel WIDTh Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse on page 80 PULSe MOP EXCLude TIME STARt Start PULSe MOP EXCLude TIME STOP Stop Sets a time span to be excluded at the beginning and at the end of the pulse Parameters Stop float Range 0 to 5e 05 Example see example Creating a linear chirp pulse on page 332 Manual operation See Restrict modulation to a certain area of the pulse on page 80 PULSe MOP FILTer BT Bt Sets the B x T filter parameter Parameters Bt float Range 0 15 to 2 5 Example see example Using a plugin as a modulaiton source on page 326 Manual operation See Filter on page 95 PULSe MOP FILTer BWIDth lt Bwidth gt Sets the transition bandwidth of the filter
377. s ssssssssseeeeee 301 Emitter COMMAS xoc oder tvep eicere ev peter aveo ears ee ita 304 Generator Profiles and Instruments Commands eee 307 Inter Pulse Modulation Gommands 2 ttt itr taa etri terri tici 310 Marker d Otia S ose Loca C EE Ce ever rv EE vue is 322 Plugin and Reporting Commands iere te rette te 326 ANEP vesci secre rrt b bae anh n au da aA enu aa eaae ea Rus 331 Repository COMINO 350 Scenario C SMM NGS aia Od Pepe rr rivtS OR ager CP Pe PE ENDE CERO IY 357 Sequence Commands cion da 372 Status Commedia ta ida 381 System COMMANA S E 382 Waveform Commands occisi ees esa cr perta aa bec cea tick a tin nne ska ea axe ile 384 Waveform Viewer COMMANGAG cccccccesseeececesneseeecceateasecececeauseeceeeeaneasseeeeeeanees 385 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If acommand can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only retu
378. s Select Emitters gt 2D to display the 2D view of the receiver and currently configured emitters and interferes together with their main characteristics See e chapter 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver on page 209 e chapter 19 2 Signal to Generator Mapping Settings on page 250 e chapter 6 2 1 Common Scenario Settings on page 55 When you create ARB files Loacl ARB File gt Target gt File select Generator Setup gt Open to access the generated waveforms and the Setup Info txt file Follow the instructions in this Setup Info txt file See also To create transfer and play the waveforms of 2D scenario manually on page 258 6 3 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario The overview in table 6 1 helps you decide which scenario type is suitable for a certain test case How to Select and Create a Test Scenario Table 6 1 Typical test cases with their suitable scenario types Test case Scenario type Low level receiver tests Single Sequence Receiver tests with IPM profiles and modulation on Sequences Collection pulse Waveform Sequence Advanced receiver tests Single Emitter Receiver tests with antenna patterns and scans as well Emitters Collection as reception of multiple signals at the same time Localized Emitters To create a single pulse train scenario 1 To access the scenario settings dialog perform one of the following a Se
379. s an envelope shaping according to a custom envelope function Pulse Settings See chapter 7 2 4 Pulse Envelope Settings on page 76 Remote command PULSe CUSTom on page 335 PULSe ENVelope MODE on page 337 Standard Timing Profile Enables and selects a predefined standard envelope profile Select from a voltage based Voltage 10 50 90 a power based Power 10 50 90 or a 0 100 0 100 timing profile For brief introduction to the timing profiles and their impact on the pulse timing see chapter 7 1 Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation on page 66 See figure 7 3 for illustration of the pulse width pulse rise and fall time and period between the beginning of the rising edge and the pulse start for each of the envelope profiles Enable Show Timing to visualize the timing parameters Note that the Envelope Graphs use different Normalized Pulse Envelope settings PO Normalized Pulse Envelope Qo Y Stow Timing voltage v Normaiced Pulse Envio D W Don Tes Wait g roer moror T HH LH 1 Fig 7 3 Pulse timing parameters and the envelope profiles linear rising and falling slopes la Voltage 10 50 90 profile 1b Power 10 50 90 profile 1c 0 100 profile 2a Rising Edge 100 us 2b Falling Edge 100 us 3 Width 500 us 4a Time period between beginning of the rising edge and pulse start with 0 100 profile this time is O us 4b Time period bet
380. s form the hard disk of the signal generator on page 255 Remote command SCENario OUTPut TARGet on page 372 SCENario GENerator on page 362 SCENario GENerator PATH on page 362 Load ARB File Select Upload to VSG Local ARB File gt Target gt File to generate an ARB file instead of transferring the file directly to the signal generator Local ARB File Qua s e Use the Load to ARB gt Select gt Set Path function to define the storage place for the generated ARB file e Use the Load to ARB gt Select gt Open Path in Explorer function to access the storage folder in the Windows Explorer Remote command SCENario OUTPut PATH on page 371 New Edit Clear Select Config View Standard functions in the context sensitive menu See table 3 4 Scenario Settings 6 2 2 Scenario Specific Settings Single Sequence and Waveform Scenario SettingS omooccccnnnnocccccnnnoonncnnnnnonnnnnononos 60 Sequence Collection Scenario Settings ssssssssssseeeenee 61 single Emitter Scenarlo Settings 2 1 2 02 1 Ie etuer Er sue Fa CDL eas 61 Emitters Collection Scenario Settings sssssssssssseeeenenee 62 Localized Emitters Scenario Setlings x ote een a tas dai rea 63 Single Sequence and Waveform Scenario Settings Name My Waveforms Waveform Sequence test waveform scenario Default report is written to C My Report Files Data output is in w
381. s how many time an increment is repeated Parameters Burst float Range 1 to 1000 Example Manual operation See Random List on page 136 IPM RLISt REUSe Reuse If disabled each value is used only once Parameters Reuse ON OFF 1 0 Example IPM RLISt REUSe 0 Manual operation See Random List on page 136 IPM SHAPe BASE lt Base gt Defines the way the list items are processed Parameters lt Base gt PULSe TIME Example see Using the interpolated shape IPM profile Manual operation See Interpolated Shape on page 135 IPM SHAPe COUNt lt Count gt Sets the number of pulses for that the data from the list is used Parameters lt Count gt integer Range 1 to 1e 09 Inter Pulse Modulation Commands Example see Using the interpolated shape IPM profile Manual operation See Interpolated Shape on page 135 IPM SHAPe INTerpol Interpol Enables a linear transition between the increments Parameters Interpol LiNear NONE Example see Using the interpolated shape IPM profile Manual operation See Interpolated Shape on page 135 IPM SHAPe PERiod Period Sets the period of time over that the list items are equally distributed Parameters Period float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example see Using the interpolated shape IPM profile Manual operation See Interpolated Shape on page 135 IPM STEP BURSt Burst Sets the number of times an increment is repeated
382. s the frequency of the beam Parameters Frequency float Range 1e 09 to 1e 09 Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Beams on page 182 EMITter MODE BEAM SEQuence lt Sequence gt Assigns a pulse sequence see SEQuence CREate Emitter Commands Parameters lt Sequence gt string Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Beams on page 182 EMITter MODE BEAM STATe State Activates a beam Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Beams on page 182 EMITter MODE SCAN lt Scan gt Assigns an antenna scan see SCAN CREate Parameters Scan string Example example Creating emitters on page 304 Manual operation See Emitter Modes on page 181 22 10 Generator Profiles and Instruments Commands Generator Profiles and Instruments Commands Example Creating generator s profile SCPI GENerator CATalog RS SMW Connected GENerator CREate My RS SMW GENerator LOCK GENerator TYPE SMW GENerator OPTion RF 0 R amp S SMW B120 RF 1 R amp S SMW B206 BB 0 R amp S SMW B10 BB 1 R amp S SMW B10 DB 0 R amp S SMW B13T SW 0 R amp S SMW K522 SW 0 R amp S SMW K512 SW 0 R amp S SMW K300 SW 1 R amp S SMW K300 SW 0 R amp S SMW K301 INSTrument COUNt 4 INSTrument CLEar INSTrument ADD 10 113 10 91 INSTrument MAP My RS SMW
383. s these settings gt Select Repository Tree gt Antenna Scan gt New My RasterScan Comment raster scan Scan Type Raster ow Parameters Retrace Time Direction Palmer Scan Scan Rate sig squntange ase oo Antenna Scans are characterized with the following settings Antenna Scan Names aE pa E a dn dde 165 SIMILE ITI SUE 165 CaM e e IH 165 SL SCAN WCW c E 165 L Sean Animation TTG rod Fri td di 165 L Scan and Pattern Visualization essent 165 Circular Scan SSt MGS iat cus certet etae eb eaae ester re te abor HABLAR Eae 165 Sector Scan Settings ime aei e e oer nein E dec de 166 Raster Scan Settings 2 cete e e OE RR ERR E PER ASK XE RE He RYE aes 167 Comical SCAM SUN EE 168 Helical S3can DOUE ete edad ex deeds 169 Spiral Scan SCS iia iii 169 Lobe Switching Scan Settings nennen 170 Antenna Scans Settings Antenna Scan Name Enter the name of the antenna scan Remote command SCAN NAME on page 278 SCAN CATalog on page 276 SCAN SELect on page 277 SCAN CREate on page 277 SCAN REMove on page 279 Comment Enter a short description Remote command SCAN COMMent on page 278 Scan Type Defines the scan type Use the 3D Scan View diagram to visualize the selected scan Remote command SCAN TYPE on page 297 3D Scan View Visualizes the antenna scan in a 3D preview See the example on figure 10 6 Scan Animatio
384. se Sequencer R amp S SGT K301 e further options depending on the particular application e g if waveform files generated with R amp S WinlIQSIM2 will be used within the sequences the corresponding R amp S SGT K2xx options 3 2 Installing the Software Software updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and mod ifications are available for download at the product homepage of the signal generator e g R amp S SMW Software and Hardware Requirements The following minimum requirements have to be met Software Microsoft Window 7 Professional 32 Bit SP1 operating system Rohde amp Schwarz VISA IO Libraries for Instrument Control or other VISA run time library e g National Instruments VISA 4 0 or higher e Hardware Table 3 1 Hardware requirements Minimum requirements Recommended hardware AMD or Intel CPU Dual Core 2 GHz Intel Quad Core i7 Quad Core Xeon AMD FX series RAM 22GB 16 GB Video NVIDIA Quadro 128 MB or ATI Radeon NVIDIA Quadro 128 MB or ATI Radeon Video resolution 2 1280 x 1024 pixels 2 1920 x 1200 pixels Rendering OpenGL shader model 3 OpenGL shader model 3 Network LAN 1 GB s LAN 1 GB s Installing the Software To install the software Download the R amp S Pulse Sequencer software form the R amp S website The R amp S Pulse Sequencer software consists of the file PS Install lt major gt lt minor gt lt build gt lt release gt m
385. se train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut CLOCk USER lt User gt Sets a user defined clock rate Parameters lt User gt float Range 1 to 2e 09 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut DURation MODE lt Mode gt Defines the waveform duration Parameters lt Mode gt SEQuence MANual SCAN Scenario Commands Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut DURation TIME Time Sets the duration of the generated waveform Parameters Time float Range 1e 06 to 3600 Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Clock Duration on page 248 SCENario OUTPut FORMat Format Sets the type of the generated waveform file Parameters Format WV MSW Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Manual operation See Output Format on page 247 SCENario OUTPut LOOP COMBine Combine Combines loop contents into a single segment Parameters Combine ON OFF 1 0 Manual operation See Output Format on page 247 SCENario OUTPut FREQuency lt Frequency gt Sets the carrier RF frequency of the generated signal
386. sequence Test Sequence and the required Pulses have been created See also example Handling items on page 272 Sequence Commands e example Creating an unmodulated pulse on page 331 Example Creating a CW segment SCPI SEQuence CREate Test Sequence SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM COUNt 2 SEQuence ITEM SELect 2 SEQuence ITEM TYPE FILLer SEQuence ITEM FILLer SIGNal CW SEQuence ITEM FILLer MODE DURation SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME FIXed SEQuence ITEM FILLer TIME FIXed 5e 3 Example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repeated different number of times SCPI SEQuence SELect Test Sequence SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM SELect 1 SEQeunce ITEM TYPE PULSe SEQunece ITEM PULSe P1 SEQuence ITEM PRI 2 5 ms SEQuence ITEM PDELay 2 ms SEQuence ITEM REP TYPE FIXed SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt FIXed 2 SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM SELect 2 SEQeunce ITEM TYPE LOOP SEQuence ITEM LOOP TYPE VARiable SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MINimum 2 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt MAXimun 10 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt STEP 2 SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM SELect 3 SEQeunce ITEM TYPE PULSe SEQunece ITEM PULSe P1 SEQuence ITEM PRI 5 ms SEQuence ITEM FREQuency OFFSet 1000000 SEQuence ITEM LEVel OFFSet 10 SEQuence ITEM REP TYPE DURation SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt DURation 0 001 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt ROUNding UP SEQuence ITEM INDent 1 Sequence Commands Example Creating an overlay SCPI SEQuence SELec
387. si 1 Startthe PS Install lt major gt lt minor gt lt build gt lt release gt msi file The file name follows the naming conventions lt major gt lt minor gt is the software version build is the build number This is the day elapsed since 1 Jan 2000 e lt release gt indicates the release on the build date This is 1 10 of the number of seconds elapsed since midnight 2 Depending on your user rights select one of the following a Installation for all users default Requires administrator rights Is a per machine installation Project data and program data are common to all users Users keep their Individual settings b Installation for current user only e Does not require administrator rights e s a per user installation e Installation in HomePath 3 Choose the setup type 4 Follow the installation instructions The installation is competed Per default a shortcut icon is created on the desktop The software creates the folder structure listed in table 3 2 Table 3 2 Default file location software installation for all users File type File location Program data SDK files PROGRAMFILES X86 3 Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequencer InstallPath Project data Repositories SPUBLICS Public Documents NRohde SchwarzN Pulse Sequencer RepositoryPath Report files SHOMEPATHS HomePath User settings Workspace etc SHOMEPATH AppData Roaming Rohde Schwarz Pulse Sequencer Star
388. splay the test setup and the connection diagram select Emitters gt 2D gt Assign Emitters and enable Connection diagram On 20 Creating Reports and Documenting Mea surement Results In R amp S Pulse Sequencer you can document your measurement results and software configuration in the fallowing ways e create and export a repository archive so that you can repeat measurements under the same conditions create automatically scaled hardcopy of current screens or dialogs e print antenna diagrams together with additional information create and store reports in text files or in Excel files with several spread sheets This section focuses on the built in report generation function For information on the other functions see e To create and export a repository archive on page 50 e To set the size and color scheme of the hardcopies on page 37 chapter 10 Defining Antenna Patterns and Antenna Scans on page 154 Report generation The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a built in report generation function so that all parameters used during the waveform generations are automatically stored into a print able file The directory the generated reports are stored in is configurable Report files can be foramted based on Template The reporting uses a predefined but editable template Generated is an ASCII text file where data is formatted in columns including header description The reporting file uses the predefined fi
389. stal gt float Range 0 to 1 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel ARRay XDiIStance lt Xdistance gt ANTenna MODel ARRay ZDIStance lt Zdistance gt Sets the X Z elements of the Planar Phased Array antenna Parameters lt Zdistance gt float Range 0 0001 to 1 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Planar Phased Array Antenna Settings on page 160 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ENABle lt Enable gt Enables the simulation of a back lobe Antenna Pattern Commands Parameters lt Enable gt ON OFF 1 0 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation Type on page 157 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe TYPE lt Type gt Sets the shape of the back lobe pattern Parameters lt Type gt MIRRor OMNidirect Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation Type on page 157 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt Sets the attenuation of the back lobe Parameters lt Attenuation gt float Range 0 to 100 Example example Configuring antenna patterns on page 283 Manual operation See Simulate Back Lobe Attenuation Type on page 157 ANTenna MODel C
390. stogram bins i e the histogram sets used to group the obtained data Used are bins with equal size where the bin size is calculated form the value range used on the y axis in the time series display and the number of bins 9 1 2 IPM Profiles Settings The following IPM shapes can be defined co M 132 Nr E 133 Wawefopi cct A eee ar e ea a va EN ER A 134 memolated Shape 6 teo eee is 135 zo uro m 136 SE AE E 136 Random OPS innata ia 137 PRAM 138 alia ELM 139 Steps This IPM profile follows a staircase shape and creates a sequence of identical values before it moves on the next one The Burst Length defines often a certain step is repeated i e how many identical val ues are created The profile shape is defined as function of Number of Steps Start and Increment values the stop value is calculated automatically IPM Profiles Settings um ill Inter Pulse Modulation My_TestScen o E 88 Fig 9 3 IPM with shape Profile Steps 1 Start 0 Hz 2 Increment 1 MHz 3 Number of Steps 5 4 Burst Length Remote command TPM STEP BURSt on page 318 IPM STEP STEPs on page 319 IPM STEP STARt on page 319 TPM STEP INCRement on page 318 List The IPM shape is a sequence of discrete values define
391. t Test Sequence SEQuence ITEM COUNt I3 SEQuence ITEM ADD SEQuence ITEM SELect 4 SEQeunce ITEM TYPE PULSe SEQunece ITEM PULSe P1 SEQuence ITEM PRI 2 5 ms SEQuence ITEM SELect 2 SEQeunce ITEM TYPE OVL SEQuence ITEM OVL WTIMe 0 001 SEQuence ITEM SELect 3 SEQuence ITEM INDent 1 SEQuence ITEM SELect 4 SEQuence ITEM INDent 1 SEQuence TYP E noue A A ci A rna ed E e eds 375 SEQuence TEM FILLerMOBDJBE ties eco sico steer iii eR ARI Mega YR 375 SEQuentelTEMFILe SON uiro ipea reae nrbe aiii cia cian 375 SEQuence TEM Fibber TIME suit en d e A eb e a n e s 375 SEQuence1dTEM FIELer TIME EGQUatiofi 22 222 222232 1 9 2 220 certe ies Deed acne evz eire ro ies 375 SEQuernce TEM FIELer TIME FIXed 2 orien cana qnoa aq Ren sca hx cada 376 SEQuence ITEM FREQuency OFFSet esses nnn nn nnn nana rna nnne enne ns 376 SEOuancsd PEMTNDSIE caridad 376 SEQuetncedTEM IEEVel OFFSel 2 2 1 5 ciiin eode aaa aan dea 376 SEQuence lTEMIOOP GQOUNEFIX ed 2 cti cete ean nania e En pad eom riada dianas 377 SEQuence TEMILOOP ICODNEMINIYIED 221a extat oce na eren iaia a 377 SEQuence TEM LOOPICOUNEMAKIMUM cita iiai 377 SEQuencedTEMILOOP COUNESTEP cocino cin sendaads aida 377 SEQuenced TEM LOOP TIPE 0d ida coda arar 377 SEQuabceltEMIOOPAARISDIG uti dad 378 SEQuence lTEM OVE VARIable irn o timore arnold ica iaa 378 SEQuernced TEMIOVEWTIMe n canone apa aon tn cap una ka da
392. t Bwidth gt float Range O to 3e 08 Default unit Hz Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 194 Waveform Viewer Commands WAVeform SIGCont lt Sigcont gt Defines the waveform signal type Parameters lt Sigcont gt PULSe COMM Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Manual operation See Signal Content on page 194 WAVeform WAVeform LOAD Load Load the selected file containing a waveform in the Rohde amp Schwarz proprietary file format wv Setting parameters Load string complete file path with file name and extenssion Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 194 WAVeform LEVel REFerence Reference Queries the reference level Parameters Reference float Range O to 100 Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Manual operation See View Level on page 194 WAVeform IQ CLEar WAVeform WAVeform CLEar Removes the imported waveform or file with I Q data Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Manual operation See Clear on page 194 22 21 Waveform Viewer Commands WAVelormui VIEW XMODE ou etse ann eb ares eee nee ene ex tace dicm edd cux e Hae cad 386 SCENario VOLS VIEWIXNMOBG 3 0 2 1 ue dae eer erar ve d EXYE Pa sad iU Fa De es EP e E ER TUE Fear lied iaa 386 WAVeltormeVIEW YMODBDG 2 n icte
393. t end is reached the data is retrieved from the first entry If the data entry contains fewer bits than the required the data bits are repeated cycli cally Example Data source processing Configure the data source as shown on figure 15 1 My TestData Comment a aa Les ued ca E EE QU Fig 15 1 Data Source understanding the displayed information 1 Barker R3 pattern 110 required are 12 bits e the pattern is repeated 4 times 2 If more than 16 bits are required the 16 bits are repeated Use the Preview Data Source to visualize the content fele NOT pue PET Sun Byte meto 11 110 110 110 110 O 1 Displayed length is 16 bytes 2 Configured 16 bits 2 bytes repeated 8 times 3 Content of each 2 bytes 2x Pattern 1 4x Pattern Barker R3 2x Pattern 0 Supported types of data source The R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides the following types of data sources e Pattern Simple data patterns such as binary 0 0 strings or 1 1 strings Variable bit strings 1010 with alternating O and 1 and a maximum length of 999 bits Different Barker codes Barker R3 Barker R4a etc e User A user defined sequence of 0 and 1 bits The following rules apply for user defined data source Accepted are O and 1 as well as numbers in hexadecimal format Comments can be enclosed in slashes Blank characters are ignored The
394. ta crgo snot deba dia 386 Waveform Viewer Commands SGENarib VOLatle VIEW MODE odia ita oa dd 386 WAVefotm VIEW ZOONM POINI 4 cnet en caca indiano iaa 386 SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINL cccccsccccescccecesceesseseecesseeeeeaceesseseeeeseeeeeeneeeaees 386 WaAVeform VIEWZZOOMIRANGE icccchcccddeicrtnacdscsdtancdietiansidd caaveannddeeebanedccctvaseededbieoaedles 387 SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM RANGGE 0 0cc200cccssccceesscctasesceesseececsasnsscescenustensesannens 387 WAVeform VIEW XMODe lt Xmode gt SCENario VOLatile VIEW XMODe lt Xmode gt Sets the units time or samples used on the x axis Setting parameters lt Xmode gt SAMPles TIME Usage Setting only Manual operation See Units on page 241 WAVeform VIEW YMODe lt Ymode gt SCENario VOLatile VIEW YMODe lt Ymode gt Sets the view mode Setting parameters lt Ymode gt IQ MAGDb MAGW MAGV PHASe FREQuency PAV Usage Setting only Manual operation See View mode on page 241 WAVeform VIEW ZOOM POINt Point SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt Point Sets center point of the displayed area Setting parameters Point float always related to time Default unit s Example SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt 300 us SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM RANGe 100u 100 us around the 300 us point i e displayed is the time span of 200 us to 400 us SCENario VOLatile VIEW ZOOM POINt 0 5 ms
395. tage 10 50 90 e Power Voltage 10 100 Where the name of the timing profile follows the naming convention e Power Voltage indicates whether power or voltage based reference levels are used e Indication of the used reference levels i e 10 50 90 means that three reference levels are used the lower 10 nomi nally the mesial 5096 nominally and the upper 9096 nominally 10 100 indicates that two levels are used the base 096 and the top 10096 level A pulsed signal is a signal whose carrier power is modulated by two states ON and OFF If the top power level of a pulse is not constant this is called an amplitude droop The graphic on figure 7 1 illustrates the main pulse parameters and characteristic val ues when a Power 10 50 90 profile is used If voltage profile is used the definition of the pulse parameters is identical but the parameters are related to voltage Basics on Pulse Signals and Pulse Generation Rise Time Fall Time Max Power D a pen Mid Mesial 50 nominally Start Time Stop Time l 24 Pulse Repetition Interval Fig 7 1 Definition of the main pulse parameters and characteristic values Timing Profile Power 10 50 90 Pulse parameters Timing Profile gt 10 50 90 The following definitions apply Rise time Fall time also known as transition duration of the first and the second transitions That is the differe
396. tax You can use mathematical expression to define custom modulation types or envelope shapes The R amp S Pulse Sequencer uses the fast math parser library muParser that is an extensible high performance math expression parser library written in C This section list some of the default features supported by the parser For detailed information see the product home page http muparser beltoforion de index html Basic syntax elements Table 1 6 Mathematical operations Element Description v Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division By the power of Table 1 7 Built in functions Extract Formula Syntax Element Description sin sine function cos cosine function exp raised to the power of x etc Table 1 8 Other operators Table 1 9 Constant and variables Element Description Syntax if then else oper if condition then expression else expression ator Element Description Constants PI T T Pulse rise time Tw Pulse width time Tt Pulse fall time T Total pulse time T T T T Variables ip lt n gt inter pulse modulation value lt n gt t time t 0 T Equations and parameters used to define custom pulse envelopes Envelope name Equation Envelope shape Rectangular Pulse 1 Triangular Pulse t lt T 2 t T 2 1 t T 2 T 2
397. ter 7 2 7 Envelope and Modulation Graphs on page 96 To define the timing parameters of a pulse 1 In the repository tree select Pulse gt PulseName e g P1 gt Timing 2 Select Standard Profile On 3 Select Profile Voltage 10 50 90 4 Set the timing related parameters such as delay rise fall on and off time and the shape of the rising and falling slopes 5 To configure the pulse repetition interval PRI use the parameter PRI How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings 6 Use the Envelope graph to visualize the current envelope profile 100 us div A E Time period between beginning of rising edge and pulse start AO Time period between end of pulse and end of falling edge ae ae mM 1 qna _ ps d Fig 7 13 Pulse Timing understanding the displayed information 1a Standard Profile gt Voltage 10 50 90 1b Pulse Envelope Units gt Voltage 2 Show Timing gt On indicates the pulse timing parameters on the envelope graph 3a Rising Edge 100 us i e the time it takes the voltage to rise from 10 to 90 of the top level 3b Falling Edge 100 us i e the time it takes the voltage to fall from 90 to 10 of the top level 4 Width 500 us i e the duration the voltage is above 50 of the top level 5a 5b Beginning of the rising and falling ed
398. ter is described with the following parameters Alias Name Enters an alias name Emitter Name Selects an emitter interferer Mode Selects the mode the emitter is working in Beam Sets the number of the currently used beam Elevation Azimuth Offsets the antenna in terms of an Elevation and an Azimuth Antenna Pattern Scan Sequence Displays the current selected antenna pattern antenna scan and sequence To change any of them select the corresponding icon Remote command SCENario CEMit ALIas on page 363 SCENario CEMit EMITter on page 364 SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE on page 365 SCENario CEMit EMITter MODE BEAM on page 365 L 1 ib deb E SCENario CEMit DIRection ELEVation on page 364 SCENario CEMit DIRection BEARing on page 364 cr x 11 4 How to Create and Configure Emitters See e To create and configure a new emitter on page 186 To configure an emitter in a scenario with static receiver on page 188 To visualize the signal received by a static receiver on page 188 To configure complex scenarios with several emitters on page 189 Toenable static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 To create and configure a new emitter You can clone or copy an existing emitter or create an new one 1 Select Repository Tree Emitter New 2 Enter a name and a comment How to Create and Configure Emitters 3 Select Mode 1 open the context menu
399. the IPM profile dialog Perform one of the following 1 Select Repository Tree IPM New 2 Open the Repository Tree Sequence Sequence Description IPM IPM Static gt Configure Inter Pulse Modulation dialog and a onthe right of Source Profile parameter open the context menu b select New IPM A new empty IPM profile is created and added to the project tree New profiles are named IPM n where n is a number starting at one How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters You can add information to describe and identify the profile like a name or a com ment To create a simple staggered PRI IPM profile In this example we will create an IPM profile that contains three time values defined in a list form We will then assign this IPM profile to the PRI parameter of a pulse see To assign the staggered PRI profile to the PRI parameter of a pulse on page 146 Generated is a pulse train containing three pulses as for example the pulse train on figure 9 2 1 Open an IPM profile dialog See To access the IPM profile dialog on page 144 2 Select Unit gt Time s and Profile gt List My PRI Stagger Comment List 600 us 750 us 910 us Unit of Affected Parameter Time s Profile List 2D See also chapter 9 1 2 IPM Profiles Settings on page 132 3 Select List and create a list with three items The value of each item is
400. the following waveform types e Pure ARB file The R amp S Pulse Sequencer calculates a long waveform without sequencing calcu lation is performed offline and in advance e Multi Segment Waveform The R amp S Pulse Sequencer pre processes the sequence and splits it up into sequential elements These elements are then played using loops 19 1 Waveform Generation Settings In the general case the software calculates a waveform most suitable for the current signal generator e g an ARB file or a multi segment waveform To access and change the settings influencing the waveform generation Inthe Scenario dialog select Waveform Generation gt Config Available are the following settings OU TOUT POMC i 247 HO EXUEOHD as ocior cerco tercer e POTE Cc vise A E E AA 248 EGolli 88 c nre Her cerae PERO ESSE TOY Re se RR a E S Ye ev Tee EEN 249 acosp m 250 Output Format Defines the type of the generated waveform file a single ARB file or an ARB multi seg ment waveform file Waveform Generation Settings Out Clock Duration Features Reporting Output Format Create ARB Waveform Y Create ARB Multi Segment Waveform if possible Fall back to ARB waveform as needed Combine loop contents to one single segment Remote command SCENario OUTPut FORMat on page 370 SCENario OUTPut LOOP COMBine on page 370
401. the oldest item and removes it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Error string Error event number Error event description Device dependent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example see SYSTem ERRor ALL on page 382 Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard System Commands Return values lt All gt string List of Error event_number Error event description Device dependent infol If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Example SYSTem ERRor ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor COUNt Queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty 0 is returned Return values Count string Example SYSTem ERRor COUNt queries the number of entries in the error queue Response 1 One error has occurred since the error q
402. the shape of a sine wave where the ampli tude is proportional to the distance between the target and the beam axis The principle is illustrated on figure 13 1 9 e 4T o l il T Fig 13 1 Simplified representation of a conical scan and the received signal Amplitude 1 Conical scan antenna beams foresight 1a Direction of the rotating scan 1b Antenna beam represented as its HPBW 1c 1d Target to beam distance determines the amplitude of the received signal 2 Variation of the amplitude of the received signal 13 1 13 1 1 Related Settings See e To visualize the signal received by a static receiver on page 188 To configure the receiver settings on page 213 Interferers Waveforms can be processed as sequence or in Localized Emitters scenarios they can be used to simulate interferers In these scenarios interferers are treated like emit ters i e they are described by a waveform an antenna pattern and antenna scan static location with it X Y and Z coordinates and orientation defined as Azimuth and Elevation See To add an existing waveform as an interferer to the scenario on page 210 To visualize the signal on a 3D scan on page 213 Related Settings 2D Map Stings eccerre dave ered EEEREN E EEEE ES EEEE ARENES 202 S6celver SObtlidS oe A A ai 204 e SD Sean Pair View Settings iii aa 205 e Lists with multiple emitters and interferers
403. the variations are applied on repeating pulses Individual value A new value is calculated per pulse How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters Identical value The same values are used for all repetition of a particular item in the Sequence Sequence Description Table New values are selected each time the same IPM profile is applied to a different item Use the Restart options to reset an IPM profile Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM MODE on page 322 Restart If the IPM profile uses a random generator you can Restart the IPM per sequence line item i e resets incremented values starts processing of list from the first item restarts plugins e Reset the start seed of random generator to reproduce the generated random sequence at a latter time Remote command SEQuence ITEM IPM RESTart on page 322 SEQuence ITEM IPM RANDom RESet on page 322 9 2 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parameters See To access the IPM profile dialog on page 144 e To create a simple staggered PRI IPM profile on page 145 e To assign the staggered PRI profile to the PRI parameter of a pulse on page 146 To visualize the impact of the IPM profiles on page 148 e To create and assign a PRI Jitter on page 151 To vary pulse parameters simultaneously on page 152 e To create and apply an F Hop frequency hopping pattern on page 149 To access
404. the way the loop repetition is defined Parameters Type FIXed VARiable Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Loop Repetition on page 113 Sequence Commands SEQuence ITEM LOOP VARiable Variable Sets a loop variable Parameters Variable string Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Loop Variables on page 113 SEQuence ITEM OVL VARiable Variable Sets a variable Parameters Variable string Manual operation See Overlay Variables on page 114 SEQuence ITEM OVL WTIMe lt Wtime gt Sets the duration of the overlay Parameters lt Wtime gt float Range O to 3600 Default unit sec Example see example Creating an overlay on page 374 Manual operation See Duration on page 114 SEQuence ITEM PDELay lt Pdelay gt Enables a start delay Parameters lt Pdelay gt float Range O to 1e 09 Default unit sec Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Delay on page 111 SEQuence ITEM PHASe OFFSet Offset Sets a phase offset Sequence Commands Parameters lt Offset gt float Range 180 to 180 Example SEQuence ITEM PHASe OFFSet 30 Manual operation See Phase on page 111
405. ting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time 3 3 Starting the R amp S Pulse Sequencer for the First Time 1 On your PC a select Start gt All Programs gt R amp S Pulse Sequencer gt R amp S Pulse Sequencer or b double click on the shortcut icon on the desktop The Startup Assistant opens Introduction Welcome to the R amp S Pulse Sequencer Please choose what you want to do next Restore last workspace A Create a new repository Open a repository Start with empty workspace Show this wizard on startup iens n 2 Select Create a new Repository and select Next 3 Use the default settings and follow the instructions A new repository Repos 1 is created that contains a simple scenario Scenario 1 Your workspace should resemble the one shown on the following figure Fie Repository Configure Window Help e 401310223922 EIE zem PEN a en S Dom imma pas e Sal ems 7 sat 0 chm EE meet s Jl Fo iz See also e figure 3 1 in chapter 3 4 Understanding the Displayed Information on page 19 Understanding the Displayed Information e About the R amp S Pulse Sequencer section Introduction to the S
406. tings 1 In the menu bar select Configure gt Remote Control 2 Select Enable Remote Control Interface 3 Do not change the default socket port f Enable Remote Control Interface Socket Properties Port 5025 Deny from all Allow From localhost To identify the R amp S Pulse Sequencer by its serial number If you remotely control several R amp S Pulse Sequencer from the same controller it is useful to use serial numbers to distinguish between the different installations To set the serial number of the software 1 In the menu bar select Configure Remote Control 2 Open the Properties tab 3 In the Serial field enter an unique six digit number How to Configure and Enable Remote Control of R amp S Pulse Sequencer Enable Remote Control Interface To query the serial number use the command IDN See also To use the console to test SCPI commands on page 268 To use the console to test SCPI commands R amp S Pulse Sequencer provides a built in console window that allows you to test SCPI commands or commands sequences 1 To access this window in the menu bar select Window Console 2 In the Command Console window type SCPI to start the remote control mode 3 Enter any SCPI command see To use the console to test SCPI commands on page 268 S SCENario OUTput FREQuency 3e409 S IDN Rohde amp Schwarz R amp S
407. tion Z 0 ANTenna MODel ROTation X 0 ANTenna MODel SINC HPBW 3 ANTenna CREate Test CSC ANTenna MODel TYPE COSecant ANTenna MODel COSecant HPBW 2 ANTenna MODel COSecant T1 5 ANTenna MODel COSecant T2 70 ANTenna CREate User ANTenna MODel TYPE USER ANTenna MODel USER LOAD C PS files antenna ant pat ANTenna MODel ROTation Z 90 ANTenna MODel ROTation X 0 ANTenna MODel USER CLEAr ANTenna CREate Custom ANTenna MODel TYPE CUSTom ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW XY 10 ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBW YZ 3 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSTart 30 Antenna Pattern Commands ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLRolloff 10 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSCale 0 5 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ENABle 1 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe TYPE MIRRor ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ATTenuation 40 ANT Tema MODS LARRI COSN c cese A ae dure ne ad 284 ANTenna MODel ARRay DISTribution eseeesesssssseseesiseseee eene nnne nennt tren nn 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay NX esssssssseseseee sene nenen nennen ns nsns eser nn cnn nn 285 ANTenna MODGEAR Ray NZ oai tte ette este decere ERR andlor 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay PEDestal 2 iere rca 285 ANTennaMODeLARRay XDISISIGee s e ccs rot etr DR e ER eeu rre Rae Ree BROKER ERR annus 285 ANTenna MODel ARRay ZDIStance ccccccececeeeeeeeaeeeaee ae ee eee sienten enne nnne nsns nsn nunn nenen nnt 285 ANTenna MODeI BACKlobe ENABle seesssessssesen unninn nina E ssa si sse iiis ssa s
408. tion signal view Level Samples Clock Duration Pkto v 4 Select Import navigate and select the mat file and follow the instructions A Import Wizard opens The wizard differs depending on the selected file format but the differences are self explanatory How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms The software retrieves important parameters like used clock rate detects whether the file with I Q data contains one or more packets and per default scales automati cally the waveform The waveform is calculated so that it perfectly fits the 16 bit dynamic range of the instrument s ARB The waveform is not clipped Do Not Scale Full Auto Scalimg WA Cip f Required Only Scale Down a if Required IQ vs Time Spectrum Constellation 10 dB div 10000 samples evaluated The dialog shows also a preview of the waveform or for large waveforms of the beginning portion of the waveform 5 Only if your particular application requires it change the scaling level a Select Do Not Scale Clip if Required gt On to leave the signal amplitude unchanged This could lead to low signal levels or clipping b Select Only Scale Down if Required On After the import have been completed the Waveform dialog displays information on the waveform Samples 56k Clock 100 MHz Duration 560 us Pkto Ay 14 47 dB e Samples Indicates the numb
409. tis aan 285 ANTenna MODeEBAGKlobe TYPE ERI eroe Rc aida dao 286 ANTenna MODel BACKlobe ATTenuatiON oocccnccccncconnnncconnnnoconnnnnnnnnconnnonononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonons 286 ANTenna MODebOOSesants T1 eoe et ire oot et Re eii pode rere tidy ines 286 ANTernna MODeEOUSecabt T2 uiii RE AA Cid ea 286 ANTena MODE CUSTOM HPBW XV icicetnec ues cado cadillacs 286 ANTenna MODel CUSTom HPBWiYZ cocoocccccconcccccnnnnnonnnnconnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnonans 286 ANTenna MODeCUSTOM SLS Talitas 287 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLRollOFf o lt coococioonococi naccconanncono a E nem caca dada cams 287 ANTenna MODel CUSTom SLSCale ocooncccconnncccccnnncoonnncononcnononnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnninnnnns 287 AWTenns MODeEBANEDNMIGD 5 dicte eene prn eene o a 287 ANTenna MODel FREGUGBO icai cocci a1 eo suae ias 287 ANTenna MODel GAUSSian HPBW ccccescccecesceecsesceceeececeagceesseseceeaseesegecesseseceaneeees 288 ANTenna MODel COSecant HPBW cccccsscccssscecesececeeceeesssceseseceeceacesesuseeeeaeeeeegeeeeaes 288 ANTema MOD SINC HPB nocilla 288 ANTena MODelHORN LX reire a dadas 288 ANTenna MODel HORN LZ oocccnccccccconncncconnnoncnnnnonnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnnncnns 288 ANTenna MODel PARabolic DIAMGte ly ca sccess2ssesanaccesveseasdecdvsasnadenscsncusadeeseancceesteeedudersseade 288 ANTema MOB el RO Vea ton A oi A extends 289 ANTenna MODel ROTON Z cocina aaa daa 289 ANT enna MODGIT
410. ts the value range of the repetition count Parameters Maximum float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Repetition Number on page 112 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt ROUNding lt Rounding gt Sets the way the repetition number is rounded Parameters lt Rounding gt DN UP Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Repetition Number on page 112 SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt STEP Step Sets the repetition count granularity Parameters Step float Range 1 to 65535 Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Repetition Number on page 112 22 18 Status Commands SEQuence ITEM REP TYPE Type Sets the way the repetition number is defined Parameters Type FIXed VARiable DURation Example see example Creating a simple sequence with two pulse repea ted different number of times on page 373 Manual operation See Repetition Number on page 112 SEQuence ITEM REP VARiable Variable Seta a repetition variable Parameters Variable string Manual operation See Repetition Variables on page 113 SEQuence ITEM TYPE Type Sets the co
411. turns to a density plot display Waveform Reference Level Settings To access these settings 1 Select Repository Tree Waveform Waveform Reference Level Settings 2 Select Waveform gt Level Signal Duration 560 us 56000 samples Sample Rate 100 MHz a G9 a ed n O UT 5 WW 0 Fig 18 2 Waveform Reference Level Understanding the displayed information 1 Time domain view view mode Average Power see View mode 2 Cursors 3 Measured reference level 4 Navigation controls 5 View mode e g l Q data power etc 6 Zoom in out and signal part as number of samples or a time duration see Duration Samples 7 Time line The Waveform Reference Level reads the entire waveform data and provides a view of the l Q data versus time The provided navigation controls Zooming func tions and view modes are similar to the functions provided in the Waveform View dialog see figure 18 1 The additional controls define the signal portion that is used for calculating of the reference signal level see To measure the reference signal level of a waveform on page 246 Cursors Define the signal portion used for calculating of the reference signal level Measure Ref Level Calculates and displays the reference level of the waveform part as defined with the current cursors How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with I Q Data 18 3 How to Analyze the Content
412. udes a sequence in a sequence i e creates a parallel branch containing sequently processed items See To include a sub sequence in an existing overlay Remote command SEQuence ITEM TYPE on page 381 Pulse Waveform Lists all available pulses and wavefroms To access the settings of an existing pulse select more e To crate a new pulse select the pulse icon See also chapter 7 Creating a Pulse Library on page 66 Remote command SEQuence ITEM PULSe on page 379 SEQuence ITEM WAVeform on page 379 Rep Cont Sets the number of times the item is repeated For more complex repetition patterns select more See chapter 8 2 2 Pulse Repetition Settings on page 112 Remote command SEQuence ITEM REP COUNt FIXed on page 380 SEQuence ITEM LOOP COUNt FIXed on page 377 Sequence Settings more Accesses a dialog with further settings IPM Enables and defines an inter pulse modulation See chapter 9 Defining and Enabling Inter Pulse Modulation Effects on page 127 Marker Defines the active markers per pulse phase see chapter 17 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals on page 236 A Freq Enables a frequency offset relative to the reference frequency Frequency dependent parameter values are defined relative to this value See also To define and apply a loop on page 119 Remote command SEQuence ITEM FREQuency OFFSet on page 376 A Level Defines a level offset
413. ueue was last read out Usage Query only SYSTem PROGress Queries the signal generation progress status Return values lt Progress gt float Example see example Creating simple pulse train scenario on page 357 Usage Query only Manual operation See Start Stop Busy on page 57 Waveform Commands 22 20 Waveform Commands Example Creating waveforms SCPI WAVeform CREate AWGN WAVeform SELect AWGN WAVeform TYPE NOISe WAVeform NOISe BWIDth 2e 6 WAVeform CREate WV WAVeform SELect WV WAVeform TYPE WAVeform WAVeform SIGCont COMM WAVeform WAVeform LOAD C N PS filesNMdl IQ 10MBW wv WAVeform LEVel REFerence 14 4695 WAVeform WAVeform CLEar WAVelo Mi T Y PE shaveacsecduiwaasaesaveusaed oos xao atis due bero Ta eR AR eK i Rr RC Pa boi abc IR AM NERE 384 WAVefoFRENOISETBMWIDIE unimarc 384 WAV eon eO OD i rt cer eene cerle ce rt ta abet Ai 385 WAVeforinWAVetomm LOAD 2 1 2 rire A acidids 385 WaAVeform LEVel REFerence cc ccccccsescececccecencecssssceceaececeancecsseseceuaeceseageceeaececeusecesaes 385 WAWetonmilO CUESM c 385 WAVeform WAVeform CLEAT iii scire oral coca 385 WAVeform TYPE lt Type gt Sets the type of the waveform Parameters lt Type gt CW NOISe WAVeform USER Example see example Creating waveforms on page 384 Manual operation See Type on page 194 WAVeform NOISe BWIDth lt Bwidth gt Sets the bandwidth of the generated AWGN waveform Parameters l
414. ulse envelopes on page 399 5 Select Pulse gt Timing gt Custom Envelope gt On to apply the envelope The Envelope Graph displays the resulting envelope How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings To define your custom envelope shape with an equation This example explains how to enable an envelope shape that follows the shape on the following figure 0 5 t Equations are related to Voltage Allowed are amplitude values between 0 and 1 1 Select Pulse gt Timing gt More and select Use Equation 2 Select Preset User and enter the equation E T lt 0 5 t T 30 See also chapter A 2 Formula Syntax on page 398 3 Select Envelope Normalized Pulse Envelope Voltage and compare the result ing shape YT 0 5 t T 0 PI Value of PI Tr Rise Time Tw Pulse Width Tf Fall Time T Tr Tw TF t Time 0 T To generate an envelope shape in a table form 1 Select Pulse gt Timing gt More and select Use Imported Data 2 Select Import Data from File navigate to the file describing the envelope and load it How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings Decimal Separator End Row None w To visualize the pulse characteristics 1 Use the Modulation Graph to visualize the configured modulation schemes See Modulation Graph on page 97 2 Use the Envelope Graph to display the envelope shape See figure 7 13 3 Set Show Timing gt On
415. value see figure 11 1 Beam Position Offset Offsets the beam in terms of an Elevation and an Azimuth see figure 11 1 To offset the complete emitter s antenna use one of the Elevation parameters depending on your current scenario e Single Emitter scenario Elevation see To configure an emitter in a scenario with static receiver on page 188 e Emitters Collection scenario Elevation see To configure complex scenarios with several emitters on page 189 e Localized Emitters scenario Elevation see To enable static emitters and place them on the 2D map on page 211 Remote command MITter MODE BEAM ADD on page 279 ITter MODE BEAM COUNt on page 280 ITter MODE BEAM SELect on page 280 ITter MODE BEAM STATe on page 306 ter MODE BEAM SEQuence on page 305 ter MODE BEAM OFFSet AZIMuth on page 305 ter MODE BEAM OFFSet ELEVation on page 305 ter MODE BEAM OFFSet FREQuency on page 305 ter MODE BEAM CLEar on page 281 ter MODE BEAM DELete on page 281 A s H H S oS HH Hd oH z H E pi Bi Ed bi bl E b rp sd z H z E H 3D Emitter Preview Settings 11 2 3D Emitter Preview Settings This dialog display e a3D view of the emitter antenna with its pattern and scan e alive plot of the normalized signal power level at the receiver Planar My Circular 2 5 jJ Jm 9 Visualization C Scan Line S Pattern
416. void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getError char szModError 1024 mandatory Queries the plugin errors This function is started automatically whenever another func tion returns false and may return additional error information Clear the internal error text after receiving the error information Return values szModError string Explaining error text int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS getNextMsg char szInfoMsg 4096 optional Sends messages to the application The messages are passed to the Message Log of the application merely for user information The function is called as long as it does not return false 0 Plugin Programming API Setting parameters szinfoMsg lt Prefix gt lt Text gt The massage may contain one of the following prefix D Debug I Information W Warning E Error If no prefix is present information is assumed Usage Setting only int PS_PLUGIN_EXPORTS initPlugin void optional Initializes the plug in It is called once after the plugin is loaded into memory and may set up internal variables Return values initPlugin boolean true The initialization completed successfully false Error during the initialization The plugin is removed from mem ory void PS PLUGIN EXPORTS shutdownPlugin void optional Uninstalls the plugin It is called when the main application terminates and may be used to clean up previ ously allocated memory int PS PLUGIN EXPORTS
417. ween end of pulse and the end of falling edge with 0 100 profile this time is O us Remote command PULSe TIME REFerence on page 348 Rising Falling Edge Width Rising Falling Slope These parameters define the pulse shape The current pulse shape is displayed on the Envelope Graph To visualize the timing parameters on the graph select Envelope Show Timing On The parameter definition depends on the selected Standard Timing Profile see e Pulse parameters Timing Profile gt 10 50 90 on page 67 Pulse parameters Timing Profile 0 100 on page 67 Pulse Settings The total pulse duration and the pulse off time are calculated automatically from the selected pulse width rise and fall time and the PRI see PRI Rising Falling Edge Transition time of the rising falling edge Remote command PULSe TIME RISE on page 348 PULSe TIME FALL on page 348 Rising Slope Type Form of the rising falling slope Available are linear cosine raised and root cosine You can also use arbitrary envelope data or import you custom shapes see chapter 16 Defining Complex Modulation Schemes and IPM Profiles on page 232 Remote command PULSe TYPE RISE on page 349 PULSe TYPE FALL on page 349 Width Pulse duration Remote command PULSe TIME WIDTh on page 349 Time period between beginning of rising edge and pulse start Time period between end of pulse and end of falling edge Display information on the ti
418. xternal data sources for modulation e Import of waveform files for sequencing with repetition count Advanced Pulse Sequencer key features e ARB based signal generation and multi segment waveform sequencing e Single pulse and pulse train generation with repetition count per pulse e Powerful sequencing tool with loops nested loops subsequences and overlays e Antenna diagram definition and antenna scan definition e Antenna diagrams like pencil beams cosecans beams Gaussian diagrams user defined antenna diagrams phased array antenna diagrams e Antenna scan types like helical scans circular scans conical scans e Emitter definition by waveforms antenna diagram antenna scan attitude informa tion EIRP and carrier frequency e Receiver definition by antenna diagram antenna scan and attitude information e Calculation of signal under consideration of one way free space propagation according to emitter and receiver location on the 2D map e Import of R amp S9WinIQSIM2 V or customer waveforms for interference generation on the 2D map This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the software provides including remote control operation Accessing the Pulse Sequencer Functions of the signal generator are not described here they are described in the user manual of the corresponding base unit The latest version is available for down load at the instrument s page e g at R amp S SMW200A product homepage Inst
419. y Block Diagram 2 To add waveforms to the sequence perform one of the following a select the waveform icon to create a new waveform see To create a new waveform on page 196 b Ifthere are waveforms in your repository select the Append New Item icon and select Type Wave A waveform sequence contains one ore more waveform Complex sequences may also contain loops My WV Seq Comment Test sequence composed of a CW signal and a looped imported waveform File MATLAB Waveforms M Sequence Description alla Cmo Nesting Tyre o Pew repce See also To define and apply a loop on page 119 To create a new waveform 1 Select Repository Tree gt Waveform gt New A new waveform with default settings is created and added to the project tree How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms New waveforms are named Wav_ lt n gt where n is a number starting at one 2 Add information to describe and identify the waveform like a name or a comment 3 Select Type gt AWGN and set the Bandwidth 4 Change the waveform name e g AWGN AWGN Comment BW 1MHz To import a custom waveform 1 Select Repository Tree gt Waveform gt New 2 Enter a name and a comment 3 Select Type gt Custom l Q Data WV Matlab Comment imported matlab File Type Custom I Q Data Signal Content Communica
420. y with Antenna Patterns and Scans on page 171 e chapter 11 4 How to Create and Configure Emitters on page 186 e chapter 13 2 How to Create Scenarios with Emitters Interferers and a Receiver on page 209 e chapter 12 2 How to Create a Waveform Scenario and Work with Waveforms on page 195 e chapter 9 2 How to Create IPM Profiles and Use Them to Vary Pulse Parame ters on page 144 chapter 17 Defining and Enabling Marker Signals on page 236 chapter 15 2 How to Configure the Bit Stream Used by the MOP on page 230 How to import and assign user defined plugins on page 232 Customizing the Software You can customize the R amp S Pulse Sequencer s user interface so that it suits to your needs e Customizing Your WorkSpACe cooonoccccnnnnnocccccnnnonncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn ener nennen 35 e Changing Colors and Default ConfigteltOfi cac o tetto ttt rre ren 36 Customizing Your Workspace A workspace comprises the repository tree on the left side with one or more loaded repositories and the working area with one ore more screens You can create several workspaces with different repositories assigned to them You can save and load a user defined workspace and switch between the different workspaces To save a workspace We assume that you have opened or created a repository and opened one or more dialogs in one of the screens 1 In the menu bar select File Save Workspace Save Workspace As or
421. yellow data base icon 5 in the repository tree indicates that there are unsaved changes gt Inthe menu bar select File gt Save Repository gt K300 and K301 Tests The repository is stored in the data path set during the program installation To exit the software P Close the application software If the current repository contains unsaved changes you are prompt to store or ignore them Note Unsaved changes are lost For more information see chapter 3 7 1 Customizing Your Workspace on page 35 chapter 5 3 How to Manage the Project Data on page 48 3 6 8 Advanced Features and Examples With these first steps you have gained an impression of the provided functionality You find a comprehensive description of the full range of capabilities in the following sections chapter 7 3 How to Create a New Pulse and Adjust Its Settings on page 98 chapter 8 3 How to Create Sequences and Use the Control Elements on page 117 chapter 6 3 How to Select and Create a Test Scenario on page 63 chapter 14 3 How to Create Generator Profiles and Configure the Connected Instruments on page 221 3 7 3 7 1 Customizing the Software e chapter 18 3 How to Analyze the Content of Waveform Files and Files with I Q Data on page 245 e chapter 19 4 Playing Waveforms with the Signal Generator on page 253 e chapter 20 2 How to Create Test Reports on page 263 e chapter 10 4 How to Create a Librar
422. ze the created elements by their comment For information on the provided settings see e chapter 11 1 Emitter Settings on page 180 e chapter 10 2 Antenna Pattern Settings on page 155 e chapter 10 3 Antenna Scans Settings on page 164 e chapter 7 2 5 Modulation on Pulse MOP Settings on page 79 To visualize the signal received by a static receiver 1 Open the automatically created emitter based scenario Scenario 2 2 In the Current Emitter section on the block diagram select the 3D icon Scenario 2 Emitter 1 Mode 1 1 Antenna 1 Ant Scan 1 20 001 s Scan Simulation Start Time Period Os 20 001 s ba Visualization A Scan Line O Pattern C HPBW Disc 3 02 Minimum displayed level Simulation Period Duration for one scan simulation period The visualization is in slow motion if this value is larger than the scan period Normalized Power Level at Receiver Time is Relative to Start Time d8 0 20 60 100 The 3D Single Emitter dialog displays a live plot of the normalized signal power level at the receiver and an interactive 3D view of the emitter antenna pattern and scan 3 Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out Trying Out the Software 4 To rotate the 3D view around its origin left mouse click keep the key pressed and move the mouse For information see chapter 13 Creating Complex 2D Scenarios with Receivers and Interf

R&S Pulse Sequencer Pulse Signal Generation Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S Pulse Sequencer Pulse Signal Generation Software User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S Pulse Sequencer Pulse Signal Generation Software User Manual